Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® The many uses of the Italian verb “Dovere”

Colorful homes on a block in Burano with a garden and a park bench out front

April 2, 2024April 2, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Kathryn for learntravelitalian.com — Kathryn Occhipinti, MD, for Learn Travel Italian.com

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2024?

Have you set a goal to learn Italian? I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

For instance, many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. However, often the meaning of an Italian verb will vary from the usual English connotation. And in many situations, the same verb can have several different meanings in both languages, depending on the context. Dovere is an essential Italian verb that you “have to” learn to use in all its shades of meaning if you want to speak like a native Italian!

Dovere, which means “to have to,” or “to must” is one of the three helping verbs in Italian, along with volere (to want) and potere (to be able to/can). We have discussed how important it is to use the verb vorrei (from volere) to be polite as visitor in Italy with the blog, “Italian Travelers – Use ‘Vorrei’ to say, I would like.” We’ve also discussed potere, an essential verb of politeness when used in its third person, present tense conjugation può, in the blog, “Italian Travelers – Use ‘Può’ to ask for what you need!” Also important for the student new to Italian: if you learn how to preface a request politely with può, you can avoid the need to conjugate the main verb of the sentence, since helping verbs are always followed by an infinitive verb!

The third Italian helping verb, dovere, which is the subject of this blog, also fulfills an essential role in everyday Italian life, whether one is a traveler or is speaking to an acquaintance, friend, or family. Dovere is used as a helping verb to emphasize the obligation or the need to complete an action with its meanings of “to have to,” or “to must.” Think of how many times a day we say we “have to” or “must” do something — leave for work or school, run an errand, meet a friend we haven’t seen in awhile — the permutations are endless!

Take the feeling of obligation that one feels when they “must” do something a step further, and the meaning of dovere used as a stand-alone verb changes to “to owe,” or “to be indebted to.” Finally, continuing along these lines, “dovere” is also used as a noun to refer to one’s “duty” or “obligation.”

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb dovere, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 77th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verb

Dovere

so one can express what they “have to” or “must do.”

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

The Italian Verb Dovere

As mentioned above, the helping verb dovere fills an essential role in everyday life, whether one is a traveler to Italy or is speaking to an acquaintance, friend, or family. Dovere is used as a helping verb to emphasize the obligation or the need to complete an action with its meanings of “to have to,” or “to must.” Think of how many times a day we say we “have to” or “must” do something — leave for work or school, run an errand, meet a friend we haven’t seen in a while — the permutations are endless!

Also, it is important to note that in English we often say, ” I need to,” rather than the more formal, “I must,” or even the conversational “I have to,” when in truth, this need is actually an obligation. We might say, “I need to leave for work,” as a stand-alone statement, or with a qualifier, such as “right now,” “soon,” or “at 8 AM.” This type of English statement communicates that one will be leaving due to an obligation. Italians are more specific, though. When their action is a result of an obligation, something they truly need to do because they must do it, Italians use the verb dovere.*

Take the feeling of obligation one step further, and the meaning of dovere used as a stand-alone verb changes to “to owe,” or “to be indebted to.” Finally, continuing along these lines, dovere is also used as a noun to refer to one’s “duty” or “obligation.”

Since the number of ways dovere can be used in conversation is endless, the focus of this blog is on how to use dovere while traveling and in every day interactions.

* If you need a refresher on when Italians would say, “I need” in Italian, visit our blog in this series, “How to say, ‘I need…’ in Italian with ‘Ho bisogno di,’ ‘Mi serve,’ and ‘Averne voglia.'”

How to Conjugate Dovere

Dovere is an irregular -ere verb in the present tense due to its irregular stems — with two irregular stems each for the io and the loro conjugations. The more commonly used stem is listed first in the table below. Only the voi form has a regular stem and ending and is printed in green.

In general, a speaker tends to focus on what he or she “must” or “needs to” do, so the io (I) conjugation will be used the most often. When speaking to a group, the third person plural, noi (we) form dovere is also important to remember. Dovere is such an essential verb, though, it is recommended that all conjugations be memorized!

io	devo, debbo
tu	devi
Lei/lei/lui	deve
noi	dobbiamo
voi	dovete
loro	devono, debbono

Knowing how to conjugate dovere is only the first step if you want to express what you “have to” or “must” do in Italian. After “I have to,” another verb is needed to express what needs to be done — to go somewhere, to buy something, etc. Here is how to link dovere to another verb:

First conjugate the verb dovere to reflect the speaker. Then simply add the infinitive form of the main verb in the sentence after the conjugated form of dovere. This is the same as we would do in English! The verb dovere is known as a modal, or helping verb for the way that it modifies, or adds to, the meaning of the main verb in the sentence.

Two examples below demonstrate how this works. Notice that the subject pronoun io is not included in the Italian example sentences below that use dovere, since subject pronouns are almost always left out of Italian sentences. For this reason, “I” is given in parenthesis in the English translation.

(Io) Devo andare in Italia per lavoro la prossima settimana.
(I) have to go to Italy for work next week.

(Io) Devo tornare lunedì.
(I) have to return Monday.

Dovere with reflexive verbs:

If dovere* is used to modify a reflexive verb, one of the reflexive pronouns (mi, ti, si, ci, vi, si) will be attached to the infinitive form of the reflexive verb or can be placed at the beginning of the phrase, before dovere. The Italian subject pronoun. as usual, has been omitted in the Italian sentences that demonstrate this below, so it is given in parentheses.

(Io) Devo svegliarmi alle sei domani.
I need to (must) get (myself) up at 6 AM tomorrow.

(Io) Mi devo svegliare alle sei domani.
I need to (must) get (myself) up at 6 AM tomorrow.

Notice that the English translation for the examples with [dovere + svegliarsi] is “I need to,” since “I need to” is commonly used by English speakers to describe when they have set an alarm to get up in the morning. This case demonstrates a situation in which Italians use dovere to express a need; there is the understanding is that the speaker must have an underlying obligation that requires a timely awakening.

Past tense:

Passato Prossimo: The past participle is regular, and is dovuto.

When dovere used alone, such as to say, “I owed…/ I have owed…” the helping verb is avere. (However, the imperfetto is more commonly used to describe an indefinite amount of time in the past that one has owed something to another.)

When dovere is used as a helping verb, for instance to say, “I had to…” things get a bit complicated. Either avere or essere can be used; the choice of avere or essere will depend on the main verb.**

1.) If the main verb takes avere in the passato prossimo, the sequence with dovere acting as a helping verb is: [conjugated avere + dovuto + infinitive main verb].

2.) If the main verb takes essere in the passato prossimo, the sequence with dovere acting as a helping verb is: [conjugated essere + dovuto(a, i, e) + infinitive action verb]. Notice that the ending of the past participle dovuto will change to reflect if the speaker is masculine (o,i) or feminine (a,e).**

3.) If the main verb is essere (to be), such as, “I had to be…” the sequence with dovere acting as a helping verb is: [conjugated avere + dovuto + essere].

Imperfetto: Dovere has a regular conjugation in the imperfetto past tense (dovevo, dovevi, doveva, dovevamo, dovevate, dovevano).

*This rule holds true for all modal verbs.
**These rules hold true for all modal verbs.

1. Use dovere with the meaning “to have to” or “must,” to describe an obligation and create complex sentences in Italian.

As noted in the introduction, verb dovere is used to express a necessity, obligation or duty.
In grammatical terms, dovere, along with the verbs potere and volere, are referred to as modal verbs. The alternate, name for these verbs, as mentioned above for dovere, is “helping verb,” since modal verbs “modify” the main verb in the sentence and in so doing aid in understanding the situation under discussion. A by product of using a compound verb created with a modal verb is a sentence that has a more complex meaning than a simple sentence.
In the present tense, a modal verb is conjugated to reflect the speaker and the main verb follows directly after in its infinitive form. This format was discussed with dovere in the last section. (For a discussion of the other helping verbs potere and volere, see “Italian Travelers – Use ‘Può’ to ask for what you need!” and “Italian Travelers – Use ‘Vorrei’ to say, I would like.”)
Remember to leave out the Italian subject pronoun when creating a sentence with dovere and the other modal verbs, as is usual for Italian conversation. The conjugation of the modal verb will signal who is doing the talking!
Follow the progression of sentences in the examples below and notice how the modal verbs dovere, potere, and volere allow the individual to express complex ideas by adding bits of information about the action verb in the sentence. In the first sentence, which is a simple sentence, we learn only that someone goes to Rome every day. In the sentence that follows, with the addition of dovere, we learn about the person’s obligation to go to Rome. This brings up the question of “why” this individual “must go” to Rome every day, which is answered with the addition of a short phrase in the same sentence. We also learn how it is possible that this person “can” go to Rome on a daily basis with the addition of potere. Finally, with the helping verb volere, we discover that the individual actually “wants” to go to Rome frequently. Read on and see how to make more complex and descriptive sentences using dovere and other Italian modal verbs!

(Io) Vado a Roma ogni giorno.
I go to Rome every day.

(Io) Devo andare a Roma ogni giorno per lavoro.
I have to (must) go to Rome every day for work.

(Io) Posso andare a Roma ogni giorno; è facile con il treno diretto.
I can go to Rome every day; it is easy with the direct train.

(Io) Voglio andare a Roma ogni giorno; mi piace molto la città!
I want to go to Rome every day; I really like the city!

The conjugated forms of dovere can also stand alone as a complete sentence to express obligation as, “I must,” “You must,” “He/She must,” and so on. This occurs mostly in conversation, in response to a subject already under discussion. See the last question/answer example below.

(Tu) Devi andare a Roma ogni giorno per lavoro?
Do you have to go to Rome every day for work?

Si, devo.
Yes, I have to. / Yes, I must.

2. Use dovere with the meaning “to have to” or “to must,” to ask about a necessity during transactions or when asking for directions.

Dovere is often used when performing complex transactions that require an exchange of information, such as when making a purchase that comes with requirements or restrictions. In this case, one may ask about the details that are “necessary” to know about the purchase using dovere. For instance, when purchasing train tickets, there are generally several options to consider. See the first set of example phrases below, which uses both volere and dovere.
The traveler asking for directions might hear dovere in the response for they “need to do” to reach their destination. See the second set of examples below.
Other situations in which someone might ask what they “have to do” might involve making an expensive purchase, such as buying a house or a car, or filling out an application, such as for college, a club, or a job. The number of situations in which to use dovere to express necessity is endless!

Desidera? Desidero un biglietto per Milano.	What do you want/need/wish? (polite) I want a ticket for Milan.
Vorrei un biglietto per Milano.	I would like a ticket for Milan.
Vorrei un biglietto di andata e ritorno.	I would like a round trip ticket. (lit. a ticket of going and returning)

Vorrei il diretto.	I would like a direct train (non-stop train).
Voglio prendere il treno diretto.	I want to take the direct train (non-stop train).
Voglio prendere il treno diretto per Milano.	I want to take the direct train for Milan.
Devo pagare il supplemento?	Must (I) pay an extra fee (for fast trains)?
Vorrei il locale.	I would like the local (many stops on the route).

Cambio/Cambi treno a…	I/You change train(s) at…
Non vorrei cambiare treno.	I don’t want to change train(s).
Devo cambiare treno?	Must I change trains?
Quanto ci vuole per la coincidenza?	How much time is needed for the connection?

Ho/Abbiamo bisogno di indicazioni.	I/We need directions.
Ho/Abbiamo bisogno di un’informazione. Ho/Abbiamo bisogno di informazioni. Ho/Abbiamo bisogno di alcune informazioni.	I/We need information. (one fact) I/We need information. (more than one fact) I/We need some information.
Sa come arrivare a…?	(Do) you (pol.) know how to get to…?

Vado bene per…?	Am I going the right way for…?
No, sta andando nella direzione sbagliata.	No, you are going in the wrong direction.

È lontano da qui?	Is it far from here?
È vicino da qui?	Is it close to here?
Quanto dista?	How far is (it)?
Quanto dista da…? Quant’è lontano da…?	How far is (it) from…?
A quanti chilometri è da…?	How many kilometers is it from…?

Quanto tempo a piedi?	How long (walking) on foot?
Deve camminare per un’isolato.	You must walk for one block.

Deve seguire per…	You must follow for…
Deve proseguire per…	You must continue for…

3. Use dovere in common expressions that describe the necessity of what you “have to” or “had to” do during a typical day.

The following phrases that use dovere and fare will come in handy when talking about the necessity of the actions you perform during a typical day; that is, what you “have to” or “had to” do. Since fare means “to do,” to create a sentence in the present tense, just place the conjugated form of dovere before the infinitive verb fare.
In the past tense, to talk about what you did have to do recently, the formula that incorporates dovere and fare is [conjugated avere + dovuto + infinitive main verb], as given earlier in this blog in the section “Conjugation of Dovere.” You may recall that in the passato prossimo, the verb fare always takes avere, which makes the choice of avere in this situation easy! (If you need a refresher on how to create the passato prossimo, visit the blog in this series “Past Tense Passato Prossimo, ‘Avere’ or ‘Essere'”?)
When you have to leave someone’s company, use the last two popular phrases in our example list that mean, “I’ve got to go!” or in colloquial English, “Gotta go!” or “Gotta run!” To really sound like an Italian, when leaving the company of a close friend, add a phrase of assurance that you’d like to meet again soon with, “A dopo!” for “See you later!” or “A presto!” for “See you soon!”

Devo alzarmi presto lunedì.	I need to/have to get up early Monday.
Devo fare molte cose lunedì. Ho dovuto fare molte cose oggi.	I have many things to do Monday. I had many things to do today.
Devo fare…	I have to do…
Ho dovuto fare…	I had to do…
…molti servizi	…a lot of errands.
…dei servizi	…some errands.
…molti giri per…	…a lot of running around for…

Devo correre.	I have to run.
Devo scappare.	I have to rush off. (lit. escape or run away)
A dopo!	See you later!
A presto!	See you soon!

4. Use dovere in the past tense with essere to describe where you “had to” go.

In #3 of this section, we just saw how example sentences in the past tense combine dovere with fare to describe what someone “had to do” in the passato prossimo. Now let’s review the passato prossimo with a verb of action — andare (to go).
In the past tense, to talk about where you have gone, or went recently, the formula that incorporates dovere and andare is [conjugated essere + dovuto (i,a,e) + infinitive action verb], as given in the earlier section of this blog “Conjugation of Dovere.” You may recall that in the passato prossimo the verb andare always takes essere, which makes the choice of essere in this situation easy!
With the action verb andare, the other two modal verbs, potere and volere will also take essere in the passato prossimo, and follow the same sentence structure described for dovere. The past participles for potere and volere are potuto and voluto.
Our initial example sentences in #1 of this section that were created with all three modal verbs have been converted into the past tense using the action verb andare in the examples below. We are assuming the speaker is masculine, with a reminder that feminine speakers using this sentence structure with essere must change the ending of the past participle from an (o) to an (a).

(Io) Vado a Roma ogni giorno.
I go to Rome every day.

(Io) Sono dovuto(a) andare a Roma ogni giorno per lavoro.
I had to (must) go to Rome every day for work.

(Io) Sono potuto(a) andare a Roma ogni giorno; era facile con il treno diretto.
I was able to go to Rome every day; it was easy with the direct train.

(Io) Sono voluto(a) andare a Roma ogni giorno; mi piace molto la città!
I wanted to go to Rome every day; I really like the city!

As mentioned previously, the conjugated forms of dovere can also stand alone as a complete sentence to express obligation as, “I must,” “You must,” “He/She must,” or in the past tense, “I/You/He/She had to.
This occurs mostly in conversation, in response to a subject already under discussion. See the last question/answer example below for how to do this in the past tense.

(Tu) Sei dovuto(a) andare a Roma ogni giorno per lavoro?
Did you have to go to Rome every day for work?

Si, ho dovuto(a).
Yes, I had to.

5. Use dovere as an independent verb to describe what you owe “to someone.”

Dovere can stand alone as a verb that means “to owe,” in reference to an amount of money or figuratively, in payback for a favor, etc. Simply conjugate dovere in the present tense to create a short sentence about something owed to someone.
The only trick is that Italian requires one to mention to whom the money is owed — to Mary, to Mark, to him or to her. Therefore, an indirect object pronoun must be used before dovere if you want to replace [to + person’s name]. In English, we simply state the person’s name we are referring to directly, as in, “I owe Mary twenty dollars.” Therefore, in English, a direct object pronoun is used to substitute for a person. This English pronoun is placed after the verb.
As discussed in a previous blog, since the Italian direct and indirect object pronouns mi and ti are identical, it may not be apparent which pronoun one is using with these two forms. It does become apparent in the third person singular. The polite you and the third person direct object pronouns are la (you, polite; her) and lo (him) but the indefinite object pronouns are le (to you, polite; her) and gli (to him). For instance, if one has bought a friend coffee in Italy, the friend will probably ask, “How much do I owe you?” or simply state, “I owe to you… euro.” To make these simple sentences in Italian, use dovere and the indirect object pronouns!
Of note, when forming a question to ask, “how much,” the adverb quanto comes into play. Since we are using quanto as an adverb to modify dovere, quanto will be invariable. This is similar to the question, “Quanto costa (one article)?” When referring to money, the noun soldi is understood and (by convention) generally left out of the phrase. This leaves only the indirect object pronoun between quanto and dovere and the question to ask is, “Quanto ti/le devo?” “How much do I owe (to you, familiar/polite)?
Finally, when replying with the amount of money owed, the European currency used in Italy today is the euro. The Italian noun euro is not capitalized when written and has an invariable ending.
See examples below with different speakers talking about who owes what to whom in different situations.

Situation 1:
Pietro and Maria are friends. Pietro buys Maria a coffee. Since they know each other well, they speak using the familiar “tu” form for “you.”

Maria asks Pietro:
“Quanto ti devo?” for “How much (money) do I owe (to) you?”
Pietro can reply simply, with the amount in euros, or with the complete sentence:
“Mi devi cinque euro.” “You owe (to) me 5 Euros.”

Situation 2:
Pietro and Maria have just met at a gathering in a coffee bar. Pietro asks if Maria would like a coffee, goes to get it for her, and then returns to the bar where she is standing. Since they are only acquaintances, they speak to each other using the polite “lei” form for “you.”

Maria asks Pietro:
“Quanti le devo?” for “How much do I owe (to) you (polite)?
Pietro answers politely:
“Mi deve cinque euro.” “You owe (to) me 5 euors.”

Situation 3:
Pietro and Maria have just met at a gathering in a coffee bar. Two friends, Caterina and Anna have been watching their interactions, and now decide to talk about the couple.

Caterina mentions to Anna:
“Quanti gli deve per il caffè?”
“How much (does) she owe (to) him for the coffee?

Anna answers Caterina:
“Secondo me, gli deve cinque euro.”
“According to me, she owes (to) him 5 euros.”

But Caterina remembers:
“Ma, prima, Maria ha comprato un dolcetto per lui per 7 euro. E quindi, Pietro le deve 2 euro!”
“But before, Maria bought a pastry for him for 7 euros. And therefore, Peter owes (to) her 2 euros!”

Dovere can also stand alone as a verb that means “to owe,” as in “to be indebted to” figuratively. The use of the indirect object pronoun and the sentence structure is the same as noted in the previous examples.
To say one is “in debt” in Italian, you can also use the phrase “in debito.” To be in someone’s debt, nel tuo/suo debito.

Devo la mia educazione ai miei genitori, che hanno pagato per tutto.
I owe my education to my parents, who have paid for everything.

Da ora in poi, sarò sempre nel tuo debito.
From now on, I will forever be in your debt.

6. Use dovere as a masculine noun to describe the feeling of duty

Dovere is often used as a masculine noun to refer to one’s duty. This can be a general feeling of obligation or refer specifically to a job, obligation, or a task that needs to be done. The definite article il before dovere signals that dovere is being used as a noun, rather than a verb.
To emphasize the feeling of a duty as an obligation, use the phrase “sentirsi in dovere di…” as in, “Mi sento in dovere di prendermi cura mio fratello.” I feel obligated to take care of my brother.”
When writing a letter to an unknown recipient, such as in a large corporation, you may begin with “a chi di dovere” for “to the responsible party.”

il senso del dovere sentirsi in dovere di…	the sense of duty to feel obligated to…
la dedizione al dovere	the dedication to duty
È il mio dovere. Faccio il mio dovere.	It is my duty. I do my duty.
chi di dovere	the responsible party

Remember how to use the Italian verb
dovere
and I guarantee you will use this verb every day!

For “All the Italian you need to enjoy your trip to Italy,” click on the links below to purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers books — and then listen to the audiobook “Just the Important Phrases” on your favorite streaming platform! -Kathryn Occhipinti

Conversational Italian for Travelers books are shown side by side, standing up with "Just the Verbs" on the left and "Just the Grammar" on the right — Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Grammar” and “Just the Verbs” books: Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

The cover of Conversational Italian for Travelers "Just the Important Phrases" book is viewed on a smartphone — Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Important Phrases” book downloaded onto a cell phone from www.learntravelitalian.com

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s talk about… Emotions in Italian (Part 2) —Boredom and Annoyance

March 1, 2024January 27, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Kathryn Occhipinti, MD for Conversational Italian for Travelers books

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2024?

I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

Certain situations come up often among family members and friends, especially those living together in the same household. This leads to common phrases that are often used on a daily basis. In recent blogs, “Talking with family and friends with familiar Italian commands,“ and “Italian Phrases to Use with the Family,” we discussed common commands, statements and questions Italians use during interactions with those they are close to. Continuing in this vein with our series on emotions, we delve into additional Italian expressions that are used on a personal level.

For instance, an upcoming event may make one happy and generate positive feelings of excitement and anticipation. Check out our first blog about expressing emotions in Italian from last Christmas season, Let’s talk about… Emotions in Italian (Part 1) — Happiness and Anticipation. On the other hand, one may become bored with every day routines or even find themselves annoyed at certain individuals or at situations that can crop up in modern life. It is a part of being human to feel negative emotions, and we commonly talk with family and friends about our feelings of boredom and annoyance.

Expressing one’s emotions is complex, both in one’s native language and certainly in an adopted language. In Italian, many phrases used to convey emotion are idiomatic, and the choice of verbs can differ with even minor differences in a situation.

In short, we must learn to think in Italian if we are to communicate our emotions of boredom and annoyance in Italian! Then, we will be able to express our feelings like a native!

This post is the 76th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
describe

Boredom and Annoyance
in Italian

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared with
Family and Friends – Part 3

Expressing Boredom in Italian — Annoiare and Annoiarsi

Although it is nice to have something to look forward to (as we discussed in Part 1 of this series about emotions last year), given the repetitiveness of daily life, we all feel bored at one time or another.

If something or someone is making a person bored, the Italian verb that describes the action “to bore someone“ is annoiare.

The present tense conjugation of annoiare is irregular in the tu and noi forms, similar to other –iare verbs where the “i” in the stem is omitted to avoid creating a stressed “i” sound with a double “ii.”

Annoiare Presente
io	annoio
tu	annoi
lui, lei, Lei	annoia
noi	annoiamo,
voi	annoiate
loro	annoiono

Notice that annoiare is a “false friend” of the English verb annoyed!
Although annoiare sounds like the English verb annoyed,
these two verbs do not have the same meaning!

The past participle of annoiare is annoiato.

The reflexive verb, annoiarsi, means “to be bored” or “to get bored.” (Remember that reflexive verbs are used to convey the idea of “to get,” from our blog, “How to say, ‘Get…’ in Italian.”)

The adjective that means boring is noioso(a).

The noun that means bore or boredom is noia.

Now that we have listed the different parts of speech used to express the feeling of boredom in Italian, a word of caution:

But be careful!
To say something is “making you bored” in Italian,
you must tap into the Italian way of thinking!

Of course, one could conjugate annoiare in the third person singular to describe how “it” or “someone” makes an individual feel bored. Remember to put the direct object pronoun lo or la (for him/her) before the verb, as usual with Italian sentence construction.

Questo film lo/la annoia. (fromannoiare)
This film bores him/her.

But more commonly, Italians use dare — the verb that means to give — with the noun noia, for [dare + noia]. The effect is that “it” or “someone” is “giving boredom to” another!

In effect, although in English something or someone can “make” another bored,
in Italian things and other people “give” boredom with dare.

This brings up another grammatical point. Since boredom is being given to someone, indefinite object pronouns must be used to describe that someone. For the singular forms, you will recall the indirect object pronouns are “to me,” “to you,” “to him,” “to her,” in English, and mi, ti, gli, and le in Italian.

If you have been put into a boring situation
and want to describe your feeling of boredom,
once again, be careful!

If you are bored, i.e. have become bored and are feeling bored at a certain point, use the past participle annoiato(a). In this case, the verb that means bored is used as an adjective following essere.

Do not follow essere with the adjective noioso(a) when referring to yourself, unless you want to say that you are boring!

To “get bored” use the reflexive form of annoiare, which is annoiarsi. (Again, remember that Italians express “to get” with reflexive verbs and see “How to Say, ‘Get…’ in Italian” for a refresher if you need to.)

Examples below show how annoiarsi, annoiare, [dare + noia], annoiato, and annoioso(a) are used to describe the different states of boredom. The Italian subject pronouns have been put in parentheses, as they are usually left out of the sentence in conversational Italian (as mentioned before in many previous blogs).

For our example conversation, let’s say we want to talk about the fact that someone is bored by a certain film.

The simple statement given as our first example above is repeated here. But as mentioned previously, this is not usually the sentence structure people to communicate the feeling of boredom in Italian, so in the following examples, we continue on with other, more common ways to express boredom:

When I become bored…

Questo film mi annoia. (from annoiare)
This film bores me.

(Io) Mi annoio. (from annoiarsi)
I am getting bored.

Questo film mi da noia. / Mi da noia questo film. (from [dare + noia])
This film is making me bored. / (literally: This film is giving me boredom.)

(Io) Sono annoiato(a). (Use the past participle of annoiare here!)
I am bored.

If he or she becomes bored…

Questo film lo/la annoia. (from annoiare)
This film bores him/her.

Lui si annoia. / Lei si annoia. (from annoiarsi)
He is getting bored. / She is getting bored.

Questo film gli/le da noia. / Gli/Le da noia questo film. (from [dare + noia])
This film is making him/her bored. (lit. This film is giving him or her boredom.)

Ora, lui è annoiato. / Ora, lei è annoiata.
Now, he is bored. / Now, she is bored. (Use the past participle of annoiare here!)

And in this case, someone is bored about something (a certain film)…

Il film è noioso. (Use the adjective here!)
The film is boring.

But in another situation, a person, rather than a thing may be boring… Use the adjective noioso(a) in this case to describe the person!

Non sopporto Maria. Lei è cosi noiosa quando parla continuamente di suo marito!
I can’t stand Maria. She is so boring when she constantly talks about her husband!

Some ways to express just how exasperated you are by something or someone who is boring:
Che noia!
How boring!

Che palle!
How boring! (idiomatic expression)

Expressing Annoyance in Italian — Infastidire and Seccare

Of course, much as we love them, family members and friends can sometimes annoy us. The Italian verb infastidire means to annoy or to bother someone and is often used in reference to a child with the meaning “to pester.” The past participle, which can be used as an adjective, is infastidito(a).

The adjective that means “annoying, bothersome” or “pesky” is fastidioso(a).
Additional meanings for fastidioso(a) are “fussy, finicky,” and “fastidious.”

The noun that means annoyance is fastidio. Fastidio is used with dare to create the phrase [dare + fastidio] to describe someone “giving annoyance” or “pestering” someone else. This is the same sentence construction used in the last section with noia!

As with annoiare, infastidire has a reflexive form, infastidirsi, which means “to get annoyed.”

The present tense conjugation for infastidire, which is a regular -ire verb that uses the “isc” in the ending, is given below. Examples follow.

Infastidire Presente
io	infastidisco
tu	infastidisci
lui, lei, Lei, egli	infastidisce
noi	infastidiamo
voi	infastidite
loro, Loro, essi	infastidiscono

Mi infastidisco. (from infastidirsi)
I am getting annoyed.

Michele mi da fastidio! (from [dare + infastidire])
Michael is pestering me! (lit. he is giving annoyance to me.)

Sono infastidito(a). (Use the past participle of infastidire here!)
I am annoyed.

and in this case…

Michele è fastidioso. (Use the adjective to describe a person who is the pest!)
Michael is pesky.

Finally, seccare is another Italian verb that means to annoy, bother, or disturb someone, to the point of exasperation. Seccare does double duty as the verb that also means “to dry out.” It’s reflexive form, seccarsi, means both “to become annoyed” and “to dry out.” Seccare is a regular -are verb.

The adjective is seccante and the noun seccatura.

Both seccatura and fastidio/ fastidioso are used to refer to an annoyance or nuisance and are used to say, “How annoying…”

Che seccatura, la mia macchina non funziona!
How annoying (What an annoyance/What a bother), my car won’t start!

Quanto/Come sei fastidioso! Tu non mi ascolti mai!
How annoying you are! You never listen to me!

Ora, mi sono reso conto di quanto fastidiosa è questa regola!
Now, I realize how annoying this rule is!

Remember how to use the Italian verbs
annoiare, infastidre, seccare
and the adjectives annoioso and fastidioso

and I guarantee you will use these verbs on certain days!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Speak Italian to discover your true love

February 1, 2024January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2024?

Now that February has arrived, bringing with it Valentines Day, much of the world focuses on the greatest of human emotions — love. Valentine’s day has been celebrated since Roman times; many stories have circulated about Saint Valentine’s life as a Christian evangelist and his subsequent martyrdom during the Roman Empire. A letter he sent to an unrequited love, the daughter of an important Roman official signed, “Your Valentine,” has linked his name to romantic love ever since.

As noted by Saint Valentine in his letter, first encounters are often the start of the emotional journey we call love. Two thousand years later, the need to find the right words to get to know that special someone remains. In Italian, the verb “conoscere” can mean “to know a person,” but also refers to “meeting someone” for the first time. The frequently used phrase, “Piacere di conoscerla,” for instance, means, “it is a pleasure to meet you.”

After that first encounter, of course, in today’s world there is now the opportunity for two people to to meet each other (incontrarsi) by going out (uscire fuori). Many simple Italian phrases to make plans with someone you’d like to get to know better are listed in this blog. A more complicated way to ask to another to “get together” uses the Italian verb unirsi, which will also be discussed. Finally, at the end of the blog, you will find the two important ways to say, “I love you” in Italian.

In short, to meet and get to know that special someone we need only a few short phrases and the Italian verbs conoscere, incontrarsi and unirsi to relay this message in Italian!

This post is the 75th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
describe how to

Meet and Get Together in Italian

with
Conoscere, Incontrarsi, and Unirsi

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Get Together — in Italian

Meeting someone at a gathering —

Piacere di conoscerla...

Where do two people who form a lasting relationship have their first encounter?

Many times soon-to-be couples are introduced by a friend, often at a festa (party). The Italian verb conoscere is used when two people first meet. In a previous blog, An Italian Christmas celebration, we discussed the many variations of friendly Italian introductions, and the most common reply, “Piacere di conoscerla,” for, “It is a pleasure to meet you.” This phrase uses the formal “la” to mean “you.” More commonly, though, and especially at informal gatherings of young people, the familiar “ti” is used for “you” and also placed at the end of the verb conoscere. Luckily for students of Italian, the entire phrase is most often shortened to the easy-to-remember and pronounce, “Piacere.” The simple reply is, “Piacere mio,” for, “The pleasure is mine.”

“Piacere di conoscerla.” Piacere di conoscerti.”
“It’s a pleasure to meet you.” (formal/familiar)

– or –

Piacere.
(It’s a) pleasure (to meet you.)

Piacere mio.
The pleasure is mine. / My pleasure!

After you’ve met —

Conoscere, Incontrare and Conoscersi, Incontrarsi

Once you’ve officially met someone, technically it can be said that you “know” them. Again, the verb conoscere comes into play when talking to a friend about this new encounter. In this case, the context is helpful to determine if conoscere means you’ve met someone or already know a person. Often the speaker’s use of adverbs or adjectives in the sentence will act as “helping words” to clarify the different meanings of conoscere.

Remember that when we use conoscere with the meaning “to know,”
this is in regard to “being familiar with” a person or place.
There is another verb that means, “to know a fact,” which is sapere.

If you need a refresher on the different uses of the Italia verbs conoscere and sapere, visit our blog How to say, “I know” in Italian: “Sapere” vs. “Conoscere.”

For a meeting that has been planned, use a different verb that also means “to meet” — incontrare. Of course, you can always meet someone you already know by chance and in this case, incontrare per caso is a useful phrase to describe the event.

The reflexive forms of both conoscere and incontrare — conoscersi and incontrarsi — are used when in English we would say, “each other.” This use of reflexive verbs has been discussed in a previous blog, “How to say ‘each other’ with Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs.”

For our meeting and greeting phrases, two sentences that use the reflexive verbs conoscersi and incontrarsi are helpful to remember. For instance, one may approach another at a gathering with the line, “Ci conosciamo?” The ci in question asked stands in for “each other” so the sentence means, “Do we know each other?” In a situation where two friends are planning to meet each other, the verb incontrarsi comes into play, for instance, to say, “Let’s meet each other at 8,” which would be: “Incontriamoci alle otto.”

To discuss a one-time meeting in the past using the Italian passato prossimo, use avere with the past participles conosciuto and incontrato.

********************

Below is a sample conversation between a young girl Mary and her mother about a gathering Mary attended the night before. Notice the use of the verbs conoscere, incontrare,and incontrarsi, which are printed in green to stand out. The Italian “helping words” have been printed in red. As often happens between parents and children, Mary’s mother tries to clarify the situation and gain insight into what has really happened while her daughter was away for the evening.

Maria: Ieri sera sono andata alla festa di Anna. Ho conosciuto tante belle persone.
Mary: Last night I went to Ann’s Party. I met (understood for the first time) lots of nice people.

Mamma: Ma tu già conosci i cugini di Anna. C’erano anche gli amici di Anna dell’Università là che tu non conosci?
Mom: But you already know (as in know a person, clarified with already) Ann’s cousins. Were Ann’s friends from college that you haven’t met /don’t know there as well?

Maria: Si, tutti e due. Anna ha invitato entrambi i suoi cugini e i suoi amici.
Mary: Yes, both. Ann invited both her cousins and her friends.

Infatti ho incontrato Lucia, una cugina di Anna per caso la settimana scorsa e anche Lucia era alla festa stasera.
In fact, I met (Mary met someone she already knows, how they met clarified with a later phrase) Lucy, one of Ann’s cousins by chance, last week, and Lucy was also at the party last night.

Mamma: Interessante. Ma hai conosciuto anche qualcuno di nuovo, di speciale?
Mom: Interesting. But did you meet (for the first time, emphasized with the adjective “new” that follows) anyone new, special?

Maria: Forse… Ho conosciuto un certo Paolo. Lui è uno studente all’Università. Studia storia. Mi è piaciuto tanto.
Mary: Perhaps… I met (for the first time) a certain Paul. He is a student at the college. He studies history. I liked him a lot.

Maria: Ci incontriamo di nuovo per un caffè lunedì!
Mary: We (will) meet each other (now a scheduled meeting between people who know each other) again for coffee on Monday!

Simple Italian phrases to invite someone out —

Despite the fact that certain pick-up lines continue to be popular, asking another to join you in an outing can be as simple as saying, “Why don’t we get together?” Below are four sample Italian phrases that can be used to approach someone you want to get to know better. Of course, there are many variations. Chose the one that fits your style or invent your own!

Ci conosciamo?
Do we know each other?

Penso di conoscerti già.
I think that I’ve met you before.

Credo che ci siamo già visti prima? …da qualche parte?
Haven’t we seen (already met) each other before? …around here?

Perché non ci vediamo?
Let’s get together. (lit. Why don’t we get together/see each other?)

Follow your introductory question with volere or piacere in the familiar “you” to ask that special someone if they’d like to join you at a particular place. The only tricky thing in this case is the use of the Italian prepositions in and a. Remember that Italian prepositions are always assigned to the place they refer to. If you need a refresher on how to use the Italian prepositions in and a, visit a previous blog in this series.

Vuoi andare…	Do you (familiar) want to go…
al ristorante?	to a restaurant?
al bar?	to a (coffee) bar?
al caffé?	to a cafe?
in pizzeria?	to a pizzeria?

Ti piacerebbe…	Would you like to… (familiar)
Vuoi…	Do you want to… (familiar)

andare in piazza?	go to the piazza?
andare in chiesa?	go to church?
andare al cinema?	go to the movies?
andare al concerto?	go to the concert?
andare allo spettacolo	go to the show (performance)?
andare alla mostra?	go to the show (exhibit)?
andare al museo?	go to the museum?
andare a ballare?	go dancing?
andare in chiesa?	go to church (get-together)

If you’d rather invite someone for an intimate date, rather than to a crowded place, just conjugate potere (to can) into “Posso?” for a dinner invitation. Use the formal la to show respect or if you are not certain your offer will be accepted, or the informal ti to be friendly. Additional phrases to exchange telephone numbers and email addresses are below.

Posso invitarla a cena?
May I invite you (polite) to dinner?

Posso invitarti a cena?
May I invite you (familiar) to dinner?

Posso avere il tuo… May I have your…
…numero di telefono? …telephone number?
…indirizzo email? …email address?

Inviting someone to join a group —

Venire con noi… and Unirsi a noi…

Perhaps you’d like to invite a new (or old) friend to a group event. In this case, add the phrase “venire con noi,” for “come with us” to the questions,” Would you like to…”” or “Do you want to…?” Again, be careful when using Italian prepositions to pick the one that is associated with the place you want to mention!

Ti piacerebbe… Vuoi…	Would you like to… (familiar) Do you want to… (familiar)
venire con noi…	come with us…
in spiaggia?	to the beach?
al mare?	to the sea?
in montagna?	to the mountains?
in campagna?	to the countryside?

********************

A slightly more complicated way to ask the same questions is to replace the verb phrase “venire con” with the reflexive verb unirsi and the preposition a.

Unirsi means “to get together” or “to come together.” We must think in Italian to use this verb, as getting together is not reflexive in English, and the translation will not be exact. It may be helpful to remember that Italian reflexive verbs often stand in for the English phrase, “to get.” Some examples below show how this verb can work.

For the first example, we are speaking in the familiar to one person, or addressing the question to “you.” First conjugate the verb volere into the tu form, which is vuoi, as we have done in our previous examples. Then use unirsi in the infinitive form, but make sure to change the “si” to “ti.” Unirsi is always followed by the preposition a.

Vuoi unirti a noi in spiaggia?
Do you want to get together with us at the beach?

To ask, “Can you come with us?” Just substitute the helping verb potere for volere.

Puoi unirti a noi al mare?
Can you get together with us to the sea?

To ask the same question in the third person, that is if Mary, Mike, she, or he can join you, just conjugate potere in the third person and keep the “si” ending of the infinitive unirsi.

Può (Maria/Marco/lei/lui) unirsi a noi al mare?
Can (Mary, Mark, she, he) get together with us to the sea?

Or, conjugate unirsi in the present tense to question if someone wants to join your group. Unirsi is a regular -ire verb of the -isc type in the present tense: unisco, unisci, unisce, uniamo, unite, uniscono.

Ti unisci a noi?
Do you want to get together with us?

Si unisce a noi?
Does she/he want to get together with us?

How to say, “I love you” in Italian —

Ti amo and Ti voglio bene

Finally, that special someone you have met and gone out with becomes YOUR special someone. Declare your love to each other with one of two simple Italian phrases.

“Ti amo!” means “I love you!” in Italian. Amo is the first person conjugation of amare(to love) and is only used to express romantic love.

The older phrase, still sometimes used today to declare your love another romantically is, “Ti voglio bene.” This phrase is common in older Italian movies and can still be heard today to express one’s devotion to their partner with the meaning, “I love you.” However, it is now most often used between family members or friends as the expression, “I care for you.” or “I wish you well.”

Remember how to use the Italian verbs
conoscere, incontrare, and unirsi
and I guarantee you will use these verbs every day!

For “All the Italian you need to enjoy your trip to Italy,” click on the links below to purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers books – Kathryn Occhipinti

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® The many uses of the Italian verb “dare” and other verbs of giving (“regalare” and “donare”)

January 1, 2024January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2024?

Have you made a New Year’s Resolution (proposito per il nuovo anno) to learn Italian? I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

For instance, many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. However, often the meaning of an Italian verb will vary from the usual English connotation. And in many situations, the same verb can have several different meanings in both languages, depending on the context. Dare is an Italian verb that has many general meanings. It is important use dare properly “to give” a true Italian sound to your Italian conversations!

We’ve discussed the act of giving by the friendly Italian witch La Befana in our last Christmas blog. Now, let’s focus on the verb dare, which means “to give,” and its counterparts that specifically mean “to give a gift” — regalare and donare. As we’ve seen in a previous blog, “Getting from Polite to Familiar with, ‘Dare del tu,'”, dare is an integral part in the Italian expressions that let those who have just met have a friendly conversation. The common use of the interjection “Dai!” is also distinctively Italian, with the different meanings of this short word understood from the tone of voice of the speaker. The word dare can also function as a masculine noun in Italian, in which case it means “debit” or “debt”!

Finally, the reflexive verb darsi has it’s own meaning of “to exchange” and “darsi a” means “to “dedicate oneself to something;” in the extreme sense, “darsi a” can even be translated as the English idiomatic expression, “to go wild for…” Check out the blog to discover the different shades of meaning imparted on regalare and donare by their reflexive forms, regalarsi and donarsi.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” with the the Italian verbs dare, regalare, and donare, along with their reflexive forms, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 74th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verbs

Dare
Regalare and Donare

and their reflexive forms
Darsi, Regolarsi and Donare

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Let’s Talk About…

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Dare

The Italian verb dare is most often used with the meaning “to give,” or literally, “to hand over” something to someone else. When the object “handed over” is a gift, dare may be used to describe this action or the more specific verbs of gift-giving may come into play, such as regalare (to give a gift) and donare (to donate).

To truly sound like a native Italian, learn the quintessential Italian interjection, “Dai!” from the second person conjugation of dare.

The Italian verb dare is also an integral part of an important Italian expression, “dare del tu,” which allows one to change an Italian conversation from a formal, or polite conversation to a familiar conversation between friends. For an in-depth discussion about how to use “Dare del tu,” and its counterpart, “Dare del Lei,” visit our previous blog: Getting from polite to familiar in Italian with “Dare del tu.”

Many other expressions use dare, regalare and donare. The reflexive form of darsi, has it’s own special meanings, such as “to exchange.” “Darsi a” means “to “dedicate oneself to something,” and in the extreme sense, “darsi a” can even be translated as the English idiomatic expression, “to go wild for…”

The reflexive forms of regalare and donare also stretch the original meaning of each verb with application of the verb to an individual. Although the non-reflexive forms are interchangeable, the reflexive forms of regalare and donare have very different meanings. Regolarsi means “to treat onself,” and donarsi “to dedicate onself.”

Finally, dare can even be used as a noun to mean “debit” or “debt”!

When evaluating the broad list of meanings attributed to dare, it quickly becomes evident that dare is a verb that stretches its primary definition of “to give”
to fit many different situations.

Many common, every-day Italian expressions start with dare. Each word in these expressions usually does not translate one-for-one with the common English expressions that holds a similar meaning; you can think of the expressions that use dare as just another way of looking at things, or another way of relating the same idea.

See the second-to last section below for a selection of the most common expressions that use dare.

****************************************

Grammar for the Italian Verb

Dare

A note about the Italian grammar for dare from a previous blog:

In the blog “He Said,/She Said and Indirect Object Pronouns,” Italian “verbs of giving” were listed as one of the groups of Italian verbs that take indirect object pronouns.

A selection from this group of verbs is reprinted below:

Some Italian verbs of giving that take indirect object pronouns:

Dare	to give
Offrire	to offer
Donare Regalare	to gift
Mandare	to send
Portare	to bring/deliver

Adding an indirect object pronoun before the verb dare (and the other verbs of giving listed above) will allow the speaker to describe to whom something was given. Note that English uses direct object pronouns instead (for instance “him” and “her”). We must learn to “think in Italian” to use this verb, especially since the English translation will not match exactly!

The sentence structure to use with object pronouns differs between English and Italian as well. In English, when we use the indirect object pronouns “to me,” “to you,” “to him/her,” they are placed after the verb, while in Italian, they are placed before the verb. This may take some time to get used to.

A note about the Italian grammar for dare in the past tense from a previous blog:

In conversation, the verbs of giving are often used in the passato prossimo past tense. The past participle dato (gave), for instance, is used to describe the one time event when a special gift was bestowed — such as during a birthday or a holiday.

To construct a sentence in the passato prossimo with dare, first remember that in conversational Italian, by convention, the subject pronouns (lui/lei in our examples) are usually omitted. This convention, along with rule that Italian indirect object pronouns are placed before the verb, will result in an indirect object pronoun starting the Italian sentence! The conjugated form of dare to reflect the speaker will then follow the indirect object pronoun.

The subject pronouns are given in parentheses in the first example below to emphasize the passato prossimo conjugation of dare is in the third person for the conjugation table. The indirect object pronouns are in red.

(Lui/Lei) ha dato	He gave / She gave
Mi ha dato	He gave/ She gave to me
Ti ha dato	He gave/ She gave to you
Gli ha dato	He gave / She gave to him
Le ha dato	He gave / She gave to her

Keep in mind that…
although the Italian grammar for dare
is complicated, it is also useful in understanding
the many meanings of dare!

******************************

Conjugation of the Italian Verb

Dare

Let’s talk about how to conjugate the often irregular verb dare in the present, present progressive, familiar command, past, and future tenses before using it in some example sentences.

Present tense: Given that dare is composed of only four letters, if we remove three of these by taking away the -are ending to create the present tense conjugation, we are left with a stem that is comprised of only the letter “d.” To maintain the musical sound of Italian with this short verb, dare has several irregular forms; additional letters are added to the usual present tense endings, in effect creating additional syllables to keep the language flowing smoothly. The irregular endings are in red.

Present Tense Dare

io	do
tu	dai
Lei/lei/lui	dà
noi	diamo
voi	date
loro	danno

Present Progressive Tense: The gerund dando will also be important to create the present progressive tense with stare for a commonly used expression discussed in the next section.

Familiar command forms: the tu familiar command forms of dare are dai or dà. Both are used frequently in Italian expressions.

The present tense noi form of dare, diamo, is also used as the noi familiar command from. The translations differ, however; the familiar command is translated as, “Let’s do… “

The plural you, voi familiar command form, is date.

Notice that the familiar command forms dai, diamo and date
are identical to the present tense conjugations of dare!

Familiar Command Forms Dare

io	—
tu	dà/dai
Lei	—
noi	diamo
voi	date
loro	—

Past tense: When used in the passato prossimo to describe a single event, avere is used for the helping verb with the regular past participle dato.

Dare has a regular conjugation in the imperfetto past tense: (davo, davi, dava, davamo, davate, davano).

Future tense: Dare is irregular for all conjugations, as the “ar” does not change to an “er” prior to adding the final ending: (darò, darai, darà, daremo, darete, daranno).

******************************

The other verbs of giving that are the focus of this blog, regolare and donare are regular in all tenses and take avere as the helping verb in the passato prossimo.

1. Use dare to describe the act of “giving” something to someone else, or literally, “handing over” something to another.

The Italian verb dare is most often used with the simple meaning of “to give,” meaning literally, “to hand over” something to someone else. When describing the action of “giving” an object to another, use dare. Of course, as people we have many intangible needs and dare can be used in these situations as well.
If someone has something we need, the familiar command form of dare comes into play when making a request. The request can be for an object, as well as something intangible, like a bit of help. Both English and Italian speakers often ask for help with the expression, “Give me a hand!” When making a request of this kind in Italian, the tu command form “da” is combined with the indirect object pronoun, most commonly mi, to make, “Dammi…“ for “Give me… ” Notice that in the familiar command form the indirect object pronoun mi comes after the verb, is attached directly to the verb da, and the first letter of mi is doubled when written. See examples below for some common command phrases that use dare and visit a previous blog in this series, “Talking with family and friends using familiar Italian commands” to learn more about how to create familiar commands in Italian.*
If you are “just looking around” a shop, and don’t need the shopkeeper’s assistance at the moment, use the present progressive form of dare and say, “Sto (solo) dando un’ occhiata.” “I’m just looking.”
Many times, we will want to describe our happiness about a present we have received. For this one time event, use the passato prossimo and an indirect object pronoun, as described in the first section of this blog.

Present tense, present progressive tense, and familiar command examples are given below for the verb dare. All of the short, conjugated forms of dare are given in green in the examples so they stand out in the sentence.

Remember to use indirect object pronouns with dare! This will be most evident with the third person singular forms (gli=to him and le = to her), and the indirect object pronouns will be given in red.

Notice from the translations below that the English equivalent uses the direct object pronouns (such as him and her) and remember that the subject pronoun is usually omitted in Italian, so it is given in parentheses. Also, the Italian present tense verbs “stand in” for many different forms of the English present tense! Once you try these examples, you will see it is not as difficult as it may sound to create a sentence with dare!

(Io) Gli do una macchina nuova per il suo compleanno.

I give him (am giving him) a new car for his birthday.

(Io) Le do un braccialetto per il nostro anniversario.

I give her (am giving her) a bracelet for our anniversary.

(Lui/Lei) Mi da una mano ogni giorno al negozio.

He/She gives me a hand (helps me) every day in the shop.

(Io) Sto solo dando un’occhiata.

I’m only looking around. (at items in a shop)

Dammi una mano subito!

(You) Give me a hand right away!

Dategli una mano subito!

(You all) Give him a hand right away!

Past tense examples below.

(Io) Gli ho dato una macchina nuova per il suo compleanno.

I gave him a new car for his birthday.

(Io) Le ho dato un braccialetto per il nostro anniversario.

I gave her a bracelet for our anniversary!

(Lui/Lei) Mi ha dato una mano ieri sera al negozio.

He/She gave me a hand last night at the store.

(Lui/Lei) Mi ha dato un buon consiglio su viaggiare in Italia.

He/She gave me good advice about traveling in Italy.

*Of course, we can also make a request politely from someone who we do not know well. In this case, the subjunctive mood comes into play as the polite command form, which is beyond the scope of this blog.

2. The colorful Italian interjection “Dai!”

The second person present tense conjugation of dare is dai. The simple meaning for this conjugation is “you give” in the familiar “you” for someone you know.
“Dai!” is also used as an interjection with the meaning “Come on!” As an interjection, this short verb becomes one of the most colorful verbs in the Italian language with a change in one’s tone of voice.
“Dai!” can be used in a straightforward, forceful way as a word of encouragement to an individual to complete a task or continue on to reach a goal — as the familiar command form of dare.
“Dai!” can be shouted forcefully as encouragement to an athlete or a sports team during a race, soccer match, or other athletic event. This is similar to the way Italians use the words “Forza!” or “Coraggio!”
“Dai…!” can be used with a pleading tone to solicit words or actions from someone, such as a favor, similar to, “C’mon now, please…”
Drag out the single syllable word dai by placing stress on the last vowel and using an upward and downward tone in your voice to change the interjection to “Dai…iiiiii!” This gives “Dai!” an ironic tone and the meaning, “Come on!” changes to, “Really?” or “You’ve got to be kidding!” / “You’re joking!” or “Give me a break!” For added emphasis, if you want to be a quintessential Italian, precede dai with the Italian conjugation ma, for but. With a wave of your hands, say, “Ma, dai…iiiiii!” “But, come on!”
Let’s not forget another colorful Italian interjection: “Addiriturra!” This interjection can also be used to express surprise or incredulity, with meanings such as, “Really?” or “You’ve got to be kidding!” or “Give me a break!” Another use of addiriturra is as an adverb to mean simply, “even” or “directly.”

Dai! Forza! Coraggio!

Come on! Have strength! Have courage! (encouragement)

Dai…!

Come on now, please…! (solicitation)

Dai…iiiiii! / Addiriturra!

Come on! (Really?
You’ve got to be kidding! / You’re joking!
Give me a break!)

Ma, Dai…iiiiii!

But, come on! (But really? But you’ve got to be kidding!)

3. Use dare or regalare /regolarsi to describe the act of “giving a present” or “treating oneself”

When the object “handed over” is a gift, dare can describe this action, along with one of the specific verbs that mean “to give a gift,” which is “regalare.” The English translation of regalare is usually just “to give” but the Italian verb regolare has the additional meaning of “gifting” imbedded within it.
Regalare usually comes into play to describe giving a birthday or holiday gift. In fact, the noun regalo means gift. Many times in English when we use the word “get” to refer to “getting a gift” for someone, the more specific verb regalare is used in Italian.
To describe giving a gift to someone, the sentence structure [regolare a + name] is often used, the equivalent of using an indirect object pronoun.
Regalare is also part of the familiar command one might use to try to cheer up a child or significant other: “Give me a smile!” “Regalami un sorriso!” You can even start this phrase with the command form of dare, “Dai!” in a soliciting tone of voice, which in this case means, “Come on!”
Used in the reflexive sense, the verb, regalarsi takes on the meaning of “treating oneself.”

Let’s change up our initial examples for dare, this time using regalare. Remeber to use indirect object pronouns and place them before the verb, as you would with dare!

(Io) Regalo a Marco una macchina nuova per il suo compleanno.
(Io) Gli regalo una macchina nuova per il suo compleanno.

I give Marco (am giving as a gift) a new car for his birthday.
I give him (am giving as a gift) a new car for his birthday.

(Io) Le regalo un braccialetto per il nostro anniversario.

I give her (am giving her) a bracelet for our anniversary.

(Io) Ho regalato a Marco una macchina nuova per il suo compleanno.

I gave him (as a gift) a new car for his birthday,

(Io) Le ho dato un braccialetto per il nostro anniversario.

I gave her (as a gift) a bracelet for our anniversary!

And more examples, specifically for regalare and regolarsi:

Dai!
Regalami un sorriso!

Come on! (tone of voice to make a request)
Give me (the gift of) a smile!

Non so cosa regolare mia moglie quest’anno per Natale.
E non vorrei regalare niente al mio capo!

I don’t know what to get/give my wife this year for Christmas.
And I don’t want to get/give anything for/to my boss!

(Io) Mi regalo una vacanza in Italia dopo aver finito l’ultimo lavoro!

I (am go to) treat myself to a vacation in Italy after I have finished the last job!

(Lui) Si è regalato una cena gustosa al Ristoranti Paoli a Firenze.

He treated himself to a delicious dinner at Ristorante Paoli in Florence.

4. Use dare or donare /donarsi to describe the act of “making a donation,” or “giving of oneself” “devoting/dedicating oneself”

Donare sounds very much like the English verb “to donate,” and in fact the Italian noun donazione means donation, as in a charitable contribution. Donare can be used to describe giving a holiday gift, just like dare or regalare, but donare is also reserved for charitable donations. In English, the conjugated from of the verb “to donate” also takes indirect object pronouns, just as in Italian, although the English and Italian sentence structures again follow their own, different rules; the indirect object pronoun is placed after the verb in English.
One famous Italian act of charity, the caffè sospeso (suspended coffee) is said to have begun in Naples about 100 years ago, and in recent years has had a revival, even spreading to countries around the world. Daily coffee is considered a necessity in Italy, and even a human right to some. Because of this belief, many Italians will order one coffee at the café but pay for two, and in so doing help those less fortunate. The barista keeps track of these donations. When a customer asks if a sospeso is available, the barista then uses a donation to provide the coffee for free (gratis). In 2011, during a time of economic difficulty and government budget cuts, several small Italian festivals were created as part of a “Suspended Coffee Network.” In December 2011, the Neapolitan governing body declared an annual “Suspended Coffee Day” on December 10, which is also “Human Rights Day” in Italy.
Donare is also used to refer to “giving blood” for medical purposes.
Donarsi takes the idea of donating and extends it further with the reflexive form, to mean “giving of oneself” or “devoting/dedicating oneself” to a person or cause. “Donarsi a…” is most often used to describe the act of “devoting/dedicating oneself.”

Notice that although the verbs regalare and donare have very similar meanings,
the meanings of regolarsi and donarsi are completely different!

We could use the same examples for donare as in the previous sections on dare and regolare. But below are some new examples that take into account the more specific idea of making a donation.

(Io) Ho donato un sacco di soldi per la chiesa l’anno scorso.

I donated a lot of money to the church last year.

(Io) Dono un po’ soldi per un caffè sospeso ogni mattina.
(Io) Ho donato il sangue all’ospedale ieri.

I give a little bit of money for a “suspended coffee” every morning.
I donated blood to the hospital yesterday.

Examples for donarsi:

(Io) Mi dono a me stesso e ai miei figli ogni giorno.

I dedicate (my time) to myself and my children every day.

(Lei) Si è donata alla musica, escercandosi sei o otto ore al giorno.

She is devoted to music, practicing six or eight hours a day.

5. Use “darsi a” as “to devote/dedicate oneself” and in the extreme to mean “to go wild.” Use darsi to mean “to exchange”

“Darsi a…” can also be used with the connotation of “devoting/dedicating oneself, ” similar to donarsi.
Notice that when another action follows “darsi a,” the second verb will be in the infinitive.
To take the meaning of dedication found in “darsi a” to the extreme use “darsi a” to describe “going wild” for something or someone.
Darsi can also mean “to exchange something,” either literally or figuratively. The most common way to use darsi with this meaning is in the familiar command form, which is “Diamo…,” and is translated as “Let’s…” When saying, “Let’s exchange…” meaning “give each other,” use dare with the reflexive pronoun “ci” for “each other.” We’ve seen this use before with, “Diamoci del tu!” in a previous blog.
Scambiarsi and cambiare are Italian verbs that specifically mean “to exchange.” Both are used more frequently for every day conversation than darsi, with the exception of transitioning from polite to familiar speech.

(Lui) Si è dato a suonare la musica.

He is devoted to playing music.

(Lui) Si è dato ai festeggiamenti. / Si è dato a Maria.

He goes wild at celebrations. / He goes wild for Mary.

Diamoci i numeri di telefono!/ gli indirizzi mail!

Let’s exchange telephone numbers / email addresses
with each other!

Diamoci del tu!

Let’s speak to each other in the familiar “tu” form.
Let’s exchange/ give each other the “tu”!

6. Use dare in these common Italian expressions:

da re

fit for a king / like a king

dare in affitto
dare in prestito… a (qualcuno)

to rent out
to lend out something… to (someone)

dare a intendere /
dare l’idea

lead someone to believe… / to give the impression that
to render an idea, to make clear

dare a vedere

to show / to reveal

dare ai nervi / dare sui nervi

to get on one’s nerves

dare attenzione

to pay attention to

dare consigli

to give advice

dare conto

to let someone know / to be accountable for

dare da fare

to keep someone busy / to keep someone running around

dare da mangiare al… bimbo, cane, gatto /
dare in pasto al pubblico

to feed the baby / dog / cat
to feed the pubic

dare da pensare

to give one cause to think

dare il matto / dare fuori di matto

to suddenly go crazy angry, to freak out about
to go out of your mind/

dare fastidio / dare noia

to annoy someone / to bore someone

dare di stomaco

to throw up, as in to vomit

6. Use dare as a noun to mean “debt” or “debit”

The Italian word dare can be used as a masculine noun — il dare. In this case, it can mean the debit or the debt.
Note that il debito also means the debt and l’addebito also means the debit, and these nouns are used more commonly than dare.

Il dare (Il debito) degli Stati Uniti è trenta due trillione di dollari a settembre 2023.

The United States debt is 32 trillion dollars as of September 2023.

La prego, mi dica il dare (l’addebito) nel mio conto /
dare (addebito) nel mio conto.

Please, tell me the debit in my account. /
debit my account.

Remember how to use the Italian verb dare
and the verbs of giving, regalare and donare,
and I guarantee you will use these verbs every day!

For “All the Italian you need to enjoy your trip to Italy,” click on the links below to purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers books – Kathryn Occhipinti

Edit

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® It’s Christmastime in Italy, with Gifts to all Children from La Befana!

December 1, 2023January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Buon Natale a tutti voi!

Visiting Italy during Christmastime has been on my bucket list for many years. Recently, I’ve arranged my travel to Italy during the spring or fall. And yet, from the photos I’ve seen, Italy is just as magical — or maybe even more so — during the Christmas season, when the towns sparkle with lights hung above the piazza and the shops and churches decked out in their special holiday displays.

We’ve discussed Italian Christmas traditions in December each year since this blog’s inception. As noted before, the Christmas season in Italy lasts from the beginning of December until after the New Year. Below are the important dates to remember for those celebrating Christmas in Italy, along with Italian greetings for each holiday. To follow is the story of La Befana, the friendly Italian witch with gifts for all and an Italian nursery rhyme about La Befana that is still shared with children in Italy today.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” used during the Christmas Season in Italy, we will be able to celebrate with others, just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 62nd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
are used to celebrate
Christmas in Italy
and especially the friendly witch La Befana

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

The Italian Christmas Season

L’Immacolata	Feast of the Immaculate Conception: Catholic holiday that celebrates mother Mary.
La Vigilia di Natale Il Natale	Christmas Eve Christmas
Buon Natale! Buone Feste!	Merry Christmas! Happy Holidays!
Auguri di buon Natale!	Best wishes for a merry Christmas!
Tanti Auguri! / Auguri!	Best wishes!
Il biglietto di auguri Natalizi Il Regalo di Natale	Christmas greeting card Christmas gift

L’ultimo dell’anno	New Year’s Eve
La notte di San Silvestro	December 31st is the feast day of San Silvestro for the Catholic church.
Il Capodanno	New Year’s Day
Buon anno nuovo! Buon anno!	Happy New Year! (used most often)
Felice anno nuovo!	Happy New Year!
L’Epifania	Epiphany: Catholic holiday that celebrates when “Wise Men” visited the baby Jesus. In Italy, gifts are exchanged on this day. Italian tradition holds that a friendly witch, La Befana, brings gifts to children on this day, although Santa Claus is also celebrated.

If you are planning to attend a holiday party with Italian speakers this season, check out some polite phrases of meeting and greeting on our blog, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! Let’s Talk About… An Italian Christmas Celebration.”

To welcome guests to your home, remember the simple: Benvenuto! Benvenuta! Bevenuti! and Benvenute! Of course, the ending will change if you want to welcome one male person, one female person, a group of males or males + females and a group of women.

After introductions have been made, the usual reply is:

Piacere di conoscerla. Pleased to meet you. (polite)
Piacere di conoscerti. Please to meet you. (familiar)

And the reply to the above:

Piacere mio. The pleasure is mine.

Some additional phrases to describe the excitement that comes with the Christmas holiday celebrations are found in our last blog about how to celebrate Christmas in Italy: “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! What We Like About Christmas in Italy.”

Remember to use “Mi piace” to describe something you like and “A me piace” to emphasize how much you like it! As below:

Mi piace il periodo di Natale!
[To me the Christmas season is pleasing.]
I like the Christmas season!

Mi piace addobbare la casa per Natale.
I like decorating/decking out the house for Christmas.

—- or —-

Ai nostri bambini piace l’arrivo di Babbo Natale, ma a Marco no. Invece, Marco aspetta l’arrivo della Befana.
[Meaning: Our children like when Santa Claus arrives, but Mark doesn’t.]
(Implied: For some strange reason, although Mark is young, he doesn’t mind waiting until after Christmas for La Befana to bring him presents.)
The children like when Santa Claus arrives, but Marco doesn’t. Instead, Mark waits for La Befana to arrive.

As noted in the last example, the tradition of gift-giving during the Christmas season in Italy has changed a bit recently, with some Italian families celebrating the arrival of Santa Claus on Christmas Eve. But many Italian families also continue the tradition of La Befana, the friendly witch, to complete their holiday season in January.

It is said that La Befana flies on her broom on the night before the Epiphany, the Christian holiday that celebrates the day the three kings, or wise men, traveled together to bring gifts to the newborn baby Jesus. Some say Befana is a modern version of the Roman goddess Strina, who bestowed gifts, called strenae, in Latin. It is possible that the name Befana could have been derived from the Latin word strena. Another theory is that the name Befana was derived from the Italian word for this holiday, L’Epifania.

*****************************

The Story of La Befana

As the story goes, Befana was once an old woman who lived by herself in an Italian town. The three wise men passed by her home on their way to see baby Jesus. They asked for lodging, which she provided. But when they asked for her to join them on their journey the next day, she refused. When word gets out about Jesus’ importance, Befana later regrets passing up this opportunity

With the realization of this loss, Befana becomes a magical witch, destined to travel through the air each year on her broom the night before L’Epifania, searching all of Italy in an attempt to visit the baby Jesus. On her journey, seeking out this one child, she looks into the homes of the many other children and leaves a present before departing one house to continue her quest.

Of course, this is a similar idea to Santa Claus, who also travels by night and brings presents for the family earlier in the season, on Christmas Eve. In return for Befana’s hospitality, families may leave a glass of wine and even a plate of sausages and broccoli to sustain her on her trip. Although beware! Those who have not been good, children and adults alike, may receive coal (carbone), an onion (cipolla), or garlic (aglio) in their stockings from the friendly witch named Befana!

*****************************

Celebrating La Befana in Italy

On Epiphany, it is customary for Italian families to attend church and then get together to continue the celebration with a meal and gifts for the children. Often one of the adults — female or male — will dress in La Befana rags and hat and give out small presents from a sac, accompanied by a bit of clowning for the entertainment of all. The town of Urbania, high up in the mountains in the Marche region of Italy, takes the Befana dress-up festivities to their fullest extent. On the day of the Epiphany, hundreds of men and women alike dress up as La Befana and occupy the main piazza of the town, creating one last festival before the Christmas season comes to an end.

In Rome, a giant replica of La Befana is placed a the piazza by the Colosseum and lit up at night.

In Venice, there is a boat race on Epiphany (of course), called La Regata delle Befane, or Race of the Befanas. To take part in this race, the (male) rowers must dress up in a raggedy dress and shoes like La Befana. Each year, the race is limited to five rowers who steer their Gondolas down the Grand Canal. Thousands of locals and tourists line up to see the short sprint between the curve in the Grand Canal and the Rialto Bridge. Stalls along the piazza offer free drinks and candy or the onlookers.

*****************************

The Befana Tradition Continues

Shops throughout Italy display many items with the La Befana character during Christmastime— cards, dolls and figurines of all sizes — which is a testament to the attraction the Befana tradition still holds for Italians today.

Many children’s books tell the La Befana story. If you are interested in purchasing a book about La Befana, perhaps the most well-known and beautifully illustrated is The Legend of Old Befana: An Italian Christmas Story, by Tomie dePaola (Italian-American Thomas Anthony dePaola,1934-2020). In fact, Tomie dePaola was honored the past May, when the United States Postal Service issued a forever stamp with his name with a picture of Strega Nonna, a character who looks very similar to his La Befana. The version of the La Befana story by dePaola is in English but of course, there are many Italian versions as well. This story may be an entertaining way to introduce Italian to the children in your family!

Young children in Italy not only read about La Befana, but they also listen to cheerful, catchy, songs about her story. The first stanza of these songs is always taken from the well-known La Befana nursery rhyme (filastrocca). The Italian for this nursery rhyme with an English translation is below.

La Befana vien di notte

The old lady Befana comes at night

Con le scarpe tutte rotte

Wearing worn out shoes

Col vestito alla romana.

Dressed in Roman style.

Viva viva la Befana!

Long live Befana!

To get into the Italian holiday spirit, listen to an Italian song about La Befana on a cartoon video on You Tube from Lucilla & La Brigata Canterina: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FJqwa6BEf4M . After hearing her song, I’m sure you will join the Italian children in saying: “Viva viva La Befana!”

Buon Natale a Tutti Voi!

Viva viva La Befana!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s talk about… Emotions in Italian (Part 1) —Happiness and Anticipation

November 1, 2023January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2024?

I hope you have been making this goal a reality, since we are almost at the end of 2023! I have been trying to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

Certain situations come up often among family members and friends, especially those living together in the same household. This leads to common phrases that are often used on a daily basis. In recent blogs, “Talking with family and friends with familiar Italian commands,“ and Italian Phrases to Use with the Family, we discussed common commands, statements and questions Italians often use during interactions with those they are close to. In this blog, we delve into Italian expressions that are used on a more personal level, as we describe how to communicate one’s emotions.

For instance, an upcoming event may make one happy and generate positive feelings of excitement and anticipation. Now that the winter chill is upon us (at least in the northern hemisphere) and the holiday season is here, children and adults alike tend to feel more emotional than usual; traditional events unfold, one by one, until finally “the important day” arrives! It is a necessary part of human interaction to convey these emotions.

Expressing one’s emotions is complex, both in one’s native language and certainly in an adopted language. In Italian, many phrases used to convey emotion are idiomatic, and choice of verbs can differ with even minor differences in a situation. We must learn about the different Italian verbs that are used to express the emotions of happiness and anticipation and how they are used.

In short, we must learn to think in Italian if we are to communicate our happiness and anticipation in Italian like a native!

This post is the 73rd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
describe

Happiness and Anticipation
in Italian

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared with
Family and Friends – Part 1

Expressing Happiness in Italian —
Contento, Felice, and Piacere

Sono contento(a) di…

If an Italian is happy, he or she describes this emotion with by conjugating the verb essere and following this with the adjective contento(a). “Sono contento“ is used for a male and “Sono contenta“ is used for a female for the simple line, “I am happy.” Remember from our previous article about the linking verbs “essere,” “diventare,” and “somigliare” that the adjective following a linking verb must match the gender and number of the subject, as noted by the red “o” and “a” at the end of the adjective, so we have to forms: contento and contenta.

To add what you are happy about doing to the end of an Italian sentence, use preposition di and an infinitive Italian verb. The sentence structure becomes [essere contento(a) + di…]. For example: “Sono contento di andare in Italia,” for “I am happy to go to Italy.” If you need a refresher on other phrases that use the preposition di to link the subject with additional information at the end of the sentence, visit the blog “How to use the preposition ‘di’ in Italian.”

Sono felice di…

Felice also means happy in Italian, but is less commonly used to describe an individual’s general feeling of well-being. In this situation, the meaning of felice can be thought of as closer to the English adjective cheerful; if someone you know is always smiling and upbeat when you encounter them, then felice would be an appropriate descriptor of their personality.

However, there are occasions when one may be particularly happy and excited about an event. Essere felice or [essere felice + di…] can be used in this case, with the same sentence structure as used for contento(a). Of course, since the Italian adjective felice ends in “e,” both males and females can use the same ending!

For the holidays, instead of translating “Merry Christmas” or “Happy New Year” into Italian as “Felice Christmas” or “Felice Anno Nuovo,”

remember that the Italian phrases are
“Buon Natale!” and “Buon Anno Nuovo!”

Esserne contento(a)…
Esserne felice…

Now, if we want our Italian conversation
about happiness to flow smoothly and naturally,
we can introduce the Italian “ne” into our sentence.

In an Italian conversation, the pronominal verb esserne can be used before contento(a) or felice to describe being happy about something already mentioned. The pronominal particle ne is placed before the conjugated form of essere.

The Italian ne is translated into the English with “about it,” and takes the place of the thing, event , or entire situation already mentioned in the conversation. Notice from the examples below that in English we put “about it” after the verb.

An example conversation between friends:
Mia figlia Maria è felice perchè ha vinto il premio.
My daughter Maria is happy because she has won the award.

E anch’io ne sono felice!
And I am also happy about it! (ne = that the speaker’s daughter has won the award)

Fare piacere!

If someone is making you happy or has made you happy, use fare to let them know, with the lines: “Mi fai molto piacere!” or “Mi hai fatto molto piacere!” for “You make (are making me) very happy!” or “You have made me very happy!”

When talking about another’s happiness, the Italian equivalent for the English expression, “Whatever makes him happy!” is “Contento lui!” and of course for the feminine, “Contenta lei!”

Similarly, if someone is lucky, the following expressions can be used to mean, “Lucky him/her!” : “Beato lui!” and “Beata lei!”

Expressing Excitement and Anticipation in Italian — Emozionato, Aspettare, Aspettarsi and Aspettarsela

In America, we often describe being “excited” about an activity or event that is about to happen. In Italian, the adjective to use to describe this positive energy is “emozionato(a).” Beware! The adjective “eccitato(a)” sounds like excited but in Italian has the a negative connotation of excited in a nervous way, such as “hyperactive,” and depending on the circumstance can carry a sexual connotation.

And of course, if you are really excited about the prospect of meeting someone, you can use the idiomatic expression, “Non vedo l’ora di vederti!” for “I can’t wait to see you!” If desired, shorten the phrase to, “Non vedo l’ora!” to describe your feeling of anticipation.

A nice reply to either of the above phrases would be, “Anch’io!” for “Me too!”

Let’s imagine a short telephone conversation between two friends:
Domani è il mio compleanno. Sono molto emozionato!
Tomorrow is my birthday. I am very excited!

Non vedo l’ora!
I can’t wait!

Anch’io! Mi piacciono molto le feste! E non vedo l’ora di vederti!
Me too! I really like parties! And I can’t wait to see you!

Whether we feel like we can wait for an event or not, in life there is always waiting to be done! The Italian verb that means “to wait” is “aspettare.” Make this verb reflexive with aspettarsi and the meaning changes to “to expect.”

Be careful when using aspettarsi, though. Often aspettarsi will be followed by an action or event in the future. But if you want to expect something from someone else, the subjunctive mood comes into play in Italian, although English still defaults to the future tense! (See example #2 below. Pulisca is the tu present tense subjunctive conjugation.)

Mi aspetto che domani sarà meglio di oggi.
I expect that tomorrow will be better than today.

Mi aspetto che tu pulisca la tua stanza ogni giorno!
I expect that you (will) clean your room every day!

****************************

For a more advanced way to talk about expectations, there is also the pronominal verb “aspettarsela,” which means, “to expect something.” This verb is often used to express surprise at someone’s negative behavior. Perhaps you feel deluded when you realize that someone is not “la persona perbene” or “the good person” you thought he or she was. You can express this surprise and delusion with aspettarsela.

The full conjugation of aspettarsela is beyond the scope of this blog. However, it is easy to create a few common phrases with this verb. Remember these phrases and you will truly sound like a native!

Briefly, this is how the pronominal verb aspettarsela works:

To talk about a past event you did not expect, conjugate the root verb, aspettare, into the io form of the imperfetto past tense, which is aspettavo.

Since you are referring to yourself, convert the impersonal se in aspettarsela to me.

If the person who is under discussion is a female, place la (notice that la is an integral part of the infinitive verb aspettaresela) after me; when talking about a male, the la changes to lo.

Now you are ready to make the most common phrase used with aspettarsela, “Non me la aspettavo!” The translation is, “I wouldn’t have expected it!” To really sound like a native Italian emphasize the la or lo when speaking, as if to say, “From this person, no, absolutely not, I certainly would not have expected it!”

You can even add an additional phrase at the very end of the sentence to refer to the person twice — redundant, but very Italian — “da lei” or “da lui.”

Along the lines of waiting and negative behavior, if you are waiting for someone and he or she never “shows up” you can use the reflexive verb presentarsi. (Remember Italian uses reflexive verbs to change the original meaning while in English we do the same by combining the verb a preposition.)

Some examples of the disappointment that may come with waiting, using our Italian verb aspettarsela:

Ho aspettato per tre ore! Lui era molto in ritardo. Non me lo aspettavo! (da lui!)
I waited for three hours! He was very late. I wouldn’t have expected it! (from him!)

Ho aspettato a casa per tutta la notte. Lei non si è presentato! Non me la aspettavo! (da lei!)
I waited at home all night! She never showed up! I never would have expected it! (from her!)

Remember how to use verbs that express emotions in Italian.
Much happiness and anticipation
for the holidays and for every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s talk about… Italian Phrases to use with the family

October 1, 2023September 26, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

I hope you are on your way to making this goal a reality! I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

Certain phrases come up often, even every day, among family members. In a recent blog, “Talking with family and friends with familiar Italian commands,” we discussed everyday familiar commands between family members However, there are many more common expressions that family members use to communicate during their daily lives.

For instance, terms of endearment are paramount in Italian families; not only do adult family members express their affection for each other, but parents often have endearing nicknames for their children. Parents all over the world also need to impress on the children they love the proper way to behave. This requires positive and (sometimes) negative reinforcement, which may lead to a need to say “sorry,” and several unique Italian expressions.

There is also the ongoing need to find out what is happening between family members and for this the Italian verb succedere is indispensable. And, of course, there is always the need to keep track of where a family member may be at a given moment. Finally, maybe a particular day is a special day, such as a birthday. How do you wish someone a happy birthday and do Italians have a special song to sing to children, as we do in America? (Spoiler alert — they do!)

In short, if we learn a few phrases that can to be used among family, we will enrich our understanding of Italian culture and daily life!

This post is the 72nd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
are

Italian Phrases to be used
with the family

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Talk About… Italian Phrases to Use with
the Family

The Italian Family of Yesterday and Today

Traditionally, married couples in Italy had large families and raised their children as part of an extended family of aunts, uncles, and cousins. In modern Italy, nuclear families tend to be smaller, but the language for how to describe children as they grow from a baby to an adult has not changed very much. Young boys and girls are called “the baby” — with “il bambino” for young boys or “la bambina” for young girls — until 5 or 6 years, long after we Americans would consider the “baby stage” has been completed. After this, Italians refer to children as “il ragazzino” or “la ragazzina.” The “ina” ending in Italian is a diminutive used to create a noun that means something is smaller than usual and also has an endearing connotation when the reference is to a person.

In the past, boys wore shorts called “pantaloni corti” until their family considered them “young men,” at which time they were allowed to wear pants. This tradition has been abandoned in Italy today but is evident as an integral part of the culture in the neorealist movies of post war Italy. Sometime in the teen years, boys and girls are referred to as “il ragazzo” and “la ragazza.” Eventually, these children “diventano grandi” or “grow up” and “il ragazzo” becomes “l’uomo” and “la ragazza” becomes “la donna.” The plural of l’uomo is irregular — gli uomini. The plural of la donna is regular —le donne.

The list below describes children as they grow from baby to adult. The Italian words that describe adult men and women, or “gli adulti,” also carry undertones that refer to the individual’s position in society. “Il signore” means “the gentleman.” This title confers on the individual the right to be addressed as “Signore,” either as a stand-alone title or as part of a surname, with the meaning of “Mr.” Similarly, “la signora” means “the (married) lady” and ‘Signora” means “Mrs,” while “la signorina” means both “young (unmarried) lady” and “Miss.”

In feudal times, the titles “Signori” and “Signore” were used to refer in general to “lords” and “ladies” and were originally granted to land owners, among many other important titles, such as Marchese/Marchesa, Conte/Contessa, Principe/Principessa, etc. Today, if one wants to say, “Ladies and Gentleman” in Italian, the phrase would be “Signori e Signore.”

la bambina/la bimba	the baby (female)
il ragazzino	the little boy
la ragazzina	the little girl
il ragazzo	the boy/the young man
la ragazza	the girl/the young woman*
l’uomo	the man
la donna	the woman
il signore	the gentleman
la signorina	the young lady (unmarried)
la signora	the lady (married)

Please refer to the previous blog in this series, “How to express possession in Italian” for how to refer to “my mother/father” “my daughter/son” “my sister/brother,” etc.

Some historical footnotes:

Opera fans may encounter the words fanciulla (the pretty young maiden) and gioconda (the lighthearted, merry girl), but fanciulla and gioconda are otherwise not used much anymore in Italy to describe young women.

*La Fanciulla del West (The Girl of the West) is an opera by Giacomo Puccini based on a play by the American author David Belasco.

*La Gioconda is a reference to the girl who plays the title role in the grand opera of the same name, composed by Amilcare Ponchielli, and is also used as the Italian name for the Mona Lisa.

Some Italian terms of endearment (and other not-so-endearing terms) used between family members

Italians are known for having an emotional temperament, perhaps due to classical works of opera, or in more recent times due to the types of Italian characters portrayed in movies and on TV. Although often exaggerated for dramatic purposes, generally speaking, Italians are not shy about expressing their feelings toward one another, and this is evident in the many well-known Italian terms of endearment.

For instance, a husband/wife or unmarried romantic couple commonly address each other as “amore” or “amore mio” for “my love.” This form of address can also be used for children.

Another common term of endearment in Italian is “caro/cara” for “dear” or “caro mio/cara mia,” for “my dear.” A cute child might be one’s “piccolino/a” or “cute little one.” If a child is crying or has had a minor injury, a mother might try to console the child by saying, “poverino(a)” for “poor little one.”

Among brothers and male friends, you may here the Italian equivalent of the shortened form for brother, or “bro,” a common American way to refer to one’s real brother or a close friend that originated in the 1970s. The Italian equivalent “fra.”

Many more Italian terms of endearment can be found in a past blog in this series.

Sometimes, however, parents or others refer to their child in the negative. An “accio” ending can be added to ragazzo to make “ragazzaccio,” which means “bad boy.” Ragazzaccio also refers to one who is a rebel. “Bro” with a pejorative connotation is either “ragazzaccio” or “maschiaccio.”

Misbehavior in a child may be attributed to how they are raised. If a child is thought to have too many things or perhaps get their way to much, he or she might be labeled as spoiled, or viziato. The concept of “to be spoiled rotten” is “essere molto viziato” in Italian.

Finally, a child or an adult in the family who needs a lot of attention can be described in a negative way as “bisognoso(a)” or “needy.” This adjective is related to the verb bisognare. You may remember from a previous blog “How to say, ‘I need…'” that “Ho bisogno di” is one way to say, “I need…”

Some examples of how to use the adjective bisogno(a) are below:

Pietro è molto bisognoso. Lui ha bisogno di me ogni giorno, dalla mattina fino alle notte.
Peter is very needy. He needs me every day, from morning until night.

Maria è una figlia bisognosa! Ogni sera devo darle una mano con i suoi compiti!
Mary is a needy child! Every night I must help her (give her a hand) with her homework!

Giving instructions to children in Italian — what to do — and what not to do!

Parents often admonish their children to do one thing or another. As discussed in a previous blog about familiar Italian commands, if you would like to direct a child to “Be good!” you can say, “Stai buono(a)!” or less commonly, “Stà buono(a)!” These sentences use the tu imperative form of the verb stare. Remember from our previous blog about buono that the ending of the adjective buono will change, depending on the gender of the person who is addressed.

To ask if a child is being good in Italian, one says, “Stai facendo il buono?” “Are you being good?”

“Sei bravo(a)” means the speaker is addressing someone who is has done something well. This is a common compliment given out from one adult to another, as well as from an adult to a child.

Sometimes, on the other hand, children do things that they should not. If a child is making noise, for instance, their parent might say, “Non fare rumore!” or “Non fare chiasso!” for “Don’t make noise!” To ask a child or adult to be quiet, you can say, “Stop making noise!” or “Smettila di fare chiasso!” Another approach would be to say, “Stai zitto(a)!” for “Be quiet!”

Which brings us to the misbehaving child. Unfortunately, there are many different behaviors that can get a child into trouble or “mettere un bambino(a) nei guai”!

A classic line in any language is “What did I tell you about… (anything a child is not supposed to do). You will notice from the translation below, the Italian for the common expression, “Ti avevo chiesto di non…” is more like a negative statement than a question that does not translate directly into English.

Ti avevo chiesto di non… fare chiasso oggi?
What did I tell you about (literally what did I ask you about not).. making noise today?

Ti avevo chiesto di non… fare un casino quando abbiamo ospiti?
What did I tell you about… making a mess when we have guests?

Ti avevo chiesto di non… litigare con tua sorella?
What did tell you about… fighting with your sister?

Saying “sorry” in Italian

Of course, there is always a way for one to “tirarsi fuori dai guai!” or “get out of trouble!” Any improper behavior can be smoothed over by apologizing or “saying sorry,” which in Italian is “chiedere scusa.” Notice from the examples below that an Italian “asks” to be excused or forgiven,” while in English we say, “I’m sorry.”

You may remember from beginning Italian the phrase, “Mi dispiace,” which also means, “I’m sorry.” This catch-all phrase is a bit different than “chiedere scusa.” To say one is sorry by asking for forgiveness with “chiedere scusa” implies some sort of responsibility for one’s actions.

“Chiedere scusa” is also used in different situations from the Italian “Scusami” (familiar command) or “Mi scusi” (polite command) for “excuse me.” The last two commands are used in situations where one has inadvertently done or said something simple that they then want to “take back” or excuse themselves for, such as bumping into another in line or saying something embarrassing or incorrect.

For more serious situations, a parent can ask a child to say they are sorry using a familiar command. There is also a polite way for adults to ask each other to be excused using the subjunctive mood verb chieda. Dispiace and spiace also be used to make the same request.

Some example sentences to ask another for an apology in Italian:

Chiedimi scusa!
Say you are sorry (to me)! (familiar command)

Mi chieda scusa!
Say you are sorry to me! (polite command)

Voglio che tu chieda scusa.
I want you to say you are sorry. (polite request)

Dimmi che ti spiace!
Say you are sorry! (lit. tell me that you are sorry, familiar command)

Almeno di che ti dispiace.
At least (say that) you are sorry.

To say you are sorry for something you have done, use one of the following phrases:

Ti chiedo scusa.
I’m sorry. (for what I said or did to you, familiar singular)

Vi chiedo scusa.
I’m sorry.(for what I said or did to you all, familiar plural)

Or… maybe the adult or child is not sorry for what they’ve done. They may reply to a request to “say sorry” with:

Non voglio chiedere scusa!
I don’t want to say I’m sorry!

No, non chiedo scusa!
No, I won’t say I’m sorry!

Asking family “What are you doing?” and “What’s going on?” in Italian

The Italian words, “che,” “cosa,” and “che cosa” all mean “what” when they begin a sentence. To ask what someone is doing, or what is going on, we start with one of these pronouns and add what we are interested in knowing. Below is a list of easy-to-memorize common expressions in the familiar, as in every family, one needs to know, “What’s going on?”

Che fai?	What are you doing?
Che cosa fai?	What are you doing?
Cosa c’è?	What’s going on?/What’s up?
Che cosa c’è?	What’s going on?
Che succede?	What is happening?
Che è successo?	What happened?

If something is not going well, below are a few common phrases to use to express that feeling of helplessness that often comes with a difficult situation.

Che casino!	What a mess!
Che dire?	What can I say?
Cosa posso fare?	What can I do?
Che si può fare?	What can one do?

If whatever has happened is a problem that you hope can be fixed, use these encouraging phrases with future tense of andare and vedere:

Andrà tutto bene. Vedrai!
It will get better soon. You’ll see!

Of course, “Vedrai…” can be used in may other situations as well!

If you are not sure the situation will work out, or want to add a touch or irony, you can say, “Vedremo…” instead for “We’ll see…”

Both vedrai and vedremo are good future tense verbs to remember, even if you have not yet studied the future tense in Italian!

Asking family and friends, “Where are you?” or “Have you seen…?” in Italian

Probably the second most common question among family members after, “What is going on?” is “Where are you?” To answer is simple. Just use “ecco” for “here is/here are” and add the representative direct object pronoun to the end of the sentence (highlighted in red below).

How to use dove (where) and ecco (here is/here are) is discussed in Chapter 1 of the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook. Below are a few common question/answer scenarios:

Dove sei?	Where are you?
Eccomi!	Here I am!

Dov’è Pietro?	Where is Peter?
Dov’è lui?	Where is he?
Eccolo!	Here he is!

Dov’è Maria?	Where is Mary?
Dov’è lei?	Where is she?
Eccola!	Here she is!

To ask a relative, neighbor or friend where another is, the question becomes, “Have you seen…?” And the answer, of course is in the affirmative or negative with, “Ho visto…” or “Non ho visto…” and the object pronoun added for him, her, or them.

The grammar behind the answers to this phrase is complicated, and is discussed in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook. A few question/answer scenarios are listed below for male, female, and groups of people one may be searching for. Remember that the past participle must change to match the gender and number of people you are looking for when combining direct object pronouns with the passato prossimo past tense with avere as the helping verb! These ending have been highlighted in red.

It may helpful to memorize these four scenarios below given the daily use you will get out of these phrases!

Hai visto Pietro?	Have you seen Peter?
Si, l’ho visto.	Yes, I have seen him. (single male)

Hai visto Maria?	Have you seen Mary?
Si, l’ho vista.	Yes, I have seen her. (single female)

Hai visto Pietro e Maria?	Have you seen Peter and Mary?
Si, li ho visti.	Yes, I have seen them. (group of males/males and females)

Hai visto Maria e Eva?	Have you seen Maria and Eva?
Si, le ho viste.	Yes, I’ve seen them. (group of females)

A word of advice that might help one avoid having to look for a family member in the first place: give a warning before they leave not to be late with the simple line: Non fatti tardi! for “Don’t be late!”

Birthdays in Italian

The birthday of a family member is a day for celebration all over the world. In the past, Italian families celebrated birthdays according to the Catholic tradition, on the name day of the saint the individual was named after. Today, most Italians celebrate the day of their actual birth, although a second celebration may take place on the saint’s day as well if the family is religious. Usually, Italian families gather together and have a special meal for a family member’s birthday.

How do you wish someone a happy birthday in Italy and do Italians have a special song to sing to children, as we do in America? (Spoiler alert — they do!)

To wish someone a “Happy Birthday” in Italian, simply say, “Tanti auguri” or “Best wishes.” This phrase is taken from a longer sentence, that may be written in Birthday cards, “Tanti auguri di buon compleanno,” or “Best wishes for a happy birthday.”

In America, the song “Happy Birthday” is sung at the end of the meal with a cake topped with lighted candles. Italians use the same music as Americans for their “Happy Birthday” song, but instead of repeating the phrase “happy birthday” they repeat “tanti auguri a te” for “many good wishes to you” or “best wishes to you.” Then entire song is below. Try singing this easy phrase for your loved one’s next birthday!

Tanti auguri a te!
Tanti auguri a te!
Tanti auguri a (nome)!
Tanti auguri a te!

Remember how to use these simple
Italian phrases for the family
and I guarantee you will use these phrases every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® – The many uses of the Italian verb “Mancare”

September 1, 2023January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

Have you set a goal to learn Italian? Now that the “school year” has begun once again, let’s focus on this goal!

I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

For instance, many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. However, often the meaning of an Italian verb will vary from the usual English connotation. And in many situations, the same verb can have several different meanings in both languages, depending on the context. Mancare is one of those verbs that is used in many ways in Italian and is important “not to miss” if you want to speak like a native Italian.

We’ve discussed how to conjugate and use indirect object pronouns with mancare in the blog How to Say, “I miss you…” with Mancare. The examples in the previous blog all referred to a common use of mancare — to tell someone we care about that we miss them. But, it was also noted that the Italian verb mancare can have many other meanings: to miss (something)/to need/to lose/to lack/to be lacking/to omit/to fail. Mancare can even be used as a euphemism for “to die.”

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb mancare, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 71st in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verb

Mancare

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Mancare

The Italian verb mancare has many meanings: to miss (someone) /to need (something) /to lose/to lack/to be lacking/to omit/to fail and can even be used as a euphemism for to die.

Perhaps the most common way Italians use the verb mancare is to convey the idea of “to miss someone,” which was discussed in detail in a previous blog in this series, How to Say, “I miss you…” with Mancare. In the prior blog, the conjugation of mancare and the use of indefinite object pronouns needed to convey the idea of “missing someone” was discussed in detail. With this blog, we will now focus on the many other meanings of mancare and discuss other important grammar points one needs to know to converse using this complicated Italian verb!

When evaluating the broad list of meanings attributed to mancare, it quickly becomes evident that mancare is a verb that stretches its primary definition of “to miss”
to fit many different situations.

As already mentioned above, the most common meaning for mancare is “to miss” someone. It stands to reason that the verb that describes “missing” can also be used to describe a need for something that is not available. How to say, “I need…” in Italian was covered in detail in a previous blog in this series, “How to Say, ‘I need…’ with ‘Ho bisogno di’ ‘Mi serve’ and ‘averne voglia'”. We revisit this topic again, as mancare is yet another way to mention that one needs something!

The concept of “missing” also leads naturally into the literal meanings of “to omit” or “to lack” and the more figurative meaning of “to be lacking,” as in an ability or personality trait. If one takes “lacking” something to the extreme, this may lead to the use of mancare with the meaning of “to fail.” Figuratively, one can fail by simply “missing” or “losing” an opportunity. And in sports, one can literally “miss” a target.

Additional uses for mancare include how to describe how much of something is left (English equivalent = “be left”) or when someone is away (English equivalent = “be away”).

Finally, mancare can even be used as a gentle substitute for the verb morire (to die) by relaying the fact that a loved one has been “lost.” Mancare is also an integral part of the idiomatic expression “venire a mancare,” which can also mean “to die.”

There are other instances when mancare may substitute for more commonly used, concrete verbs. The use of mancare as a substitute for more common Italian verbs will also be discussed in the appropriate section.

****************************************

Grammar for the Italian Verb

Mancare

A note about the Italian grammar for mancare reprinted from the previous blog:

In the prior blog about mancare, it was mentioned that the sentence structure used for mancare when talking about “missing someone” or “to be missing to” is the same as for the verb piacere. Piacere is, of course, the prototype for irregular Italian verbs that only take an indirect object pronoun. You should also realize that this group of Italian verbs works differently from its English counterparts. Therefore, the English translation will not match the Italian word for word. The idea will remain the same, however.

First, let’s look at the English way of thinking. The subject is the person talking and the direct object is who they miss:

English: [subject: person missing someone + miss conjugated to reflect subject + direct object: person missed]

I + miss + John.

Now, let’s turn this English idea around to make an Italian sentence. To Italians, the person who is being missed is the subject of the sentence. With this logic in mind, the person missing someone must be expressed by a stressed object pronoun or an indirect object pronoun. The sentence with a stressed object pronoun:

Italian: [subject: person missed + mancare conjugated to reflect subject + stressed object pronoun: person missing someone]

Giovanni + manca + a me.
(John is missing to me.)

Although our Italian example above is grammatically correct, those conversing in Italian most commonly use an indirect object pronoun instead of the stressed pronoun,* and place the indirect object pronoun pronoun before the verb.

Italian: [indirect object pronoun: person missing someone + mancare conjugated to reflect subject + subject: person missed]

Mi + manca + Giovanni.
(To me is missing John).

More about the Italian grammar for mancare:

To make things even more complicated, mancare can be used as both a transitive verb (as above to describe missing someone, as well as to describe needing something) and an intransitive verb.

Transitive verbs “transmit” their action to a direct object (person, place, thing) that “receives” the action and completes the sentence. If the direct object is omitted at the end of the sentence, the sentence will not make sense.

An intransitive verb does not need a direct object to complete the sentence. In other words, the intransitive verb only involves the subject. Although another phrase may follow the verb in a sentence with an intransitive verb, the subject and the verb of the sentence can stand alone and still make sense.

When mancare is used as an intransitive verb, it is not necessary to use the special sentence structure with an indefinite article!

The transitive or intransitive use of mancare will be listed at the beginning of each section that describes the different uses of mancare, so as to avoid confusion when the example sentences are presented.

Keep in mind that…
although the Italian grammar for mancare
is complicated, it is also useful in understanding
the many meanings of mancare!

******************************

Conjugation of the Italian Verb

Mancare

Let’s talk about how to conjugate mancare in the present, past, and future tenses before using it in some example sentences. The spelling for the stem of mancare will change in the present and future tenses prior to adding the new ending to preserve the “c” sound of the original verb.

For those focused on conversational Italian,
the effect will be that this irregular verb has a regular pronunciation!

Present tense: Change the stem for the tu and noi forms by adding an “h” after the “c” to preserve the original sound of the infinitive verb. (Remember that the Italian “ci” combination is sounded like the English “ch” in “cheese.” Inserting the silent Italian “h” prevents this sound combination; instead, the Italian “chi” combination sounds like the English “key.”)

io	manco
tu	manchi
Lei/lei/lui	manca
noi	manchiamo
voi	mancate
loro	mancano

Past tense: When used in the passato prossimo to describe a single event, either avere or essere may be used as the helping verb. The meaning will change depending on the helping verb chosen (See section 4 of the blog.) The past participle is mancato.

Mancare has a regular conjugation in the imperfetto past tense (mancavo, mancavi, mancava, mancavamo, mancavate, mancavano).

Future tense: Mancare has an irregular stem for all conjugations, with the addition of an “h” after the “c,” which preserves the “c” sound of the infinitive verb (mancherò, mancherai, mancherà, mancheremo, mancherete, mancheranno). (Remember that the Italian “ce” combination is sounded like the English “ch” in “cheddar.” Inserting the silent Italian “h” prevents this sound combination; instead, the Italian “che” combination sounds like the English “ke” in the word “kennel.”)

If you need a refresher on Italian pronunciation, just visit any one of our Conversational Italian for Travelers books. The pronunciation guide is always in the first section!

1. Use mancare to describe the feeling of “missing” someone (see previous blog about mancare). (transitive)

2. Use mancare to describe “needing” something (transitive)

It stands to reason that the verb that describes “missing” can also be used to describe a need for something that is not available. Therefore, mancare can be used to describe something that a person needs.
When describing what one is “needing” with mancare, the subject in the sentence is the thing that the person needs; just like with piacere, the third person manca is used if one thing is needed; the third person plural mancano is used if more than one thing is needed.
For the past tense, again, use the third person singular or plural.
Use mancare to emphasize the one thing that is needed or is “missing” out of many.
Remember that there are other ways to say you “need something.” To describe the need for something intangible, use “avere bisogno di.” If the need is for something tangible, and in particular a list of things is being made to do a task, use the verb servire. When emphasizing a desire for something, “averne voglia” is often used. For more on these other options, visit the blog in this series, “How to Say, ‘I need…’ with ‘Ho bisogno di’ ‘Mi serve’ and “‘averne voglia’

Present tense examples below. Watch for use of manca and mancano.

Mi manca un corso più per laurearmi.

I need one more course to graduate.

Mi manca solamente un numero per vincere la lotteria!

I only need one number to win the lottery!

Mi mancano altri due corsi per laurearmi.

I need two more courses to graduate.

Mi mancano cento euro per comprare una bella collana per mia madre.

I need 100 euro to buy a beautiful necklace for my mother.

Past tense examples below. Since mancare works like piacere in this case, essere is used as the helping verb for the passato prossimo.

Remember to change the endings of mancato to reflect the subject’s (what is needed) gender and number when using essere as the helping verb for the passato prossimo!

If you need a refresher on how and when to use the passato prossimo and imperfetto verb tenses, visit our blogs about the Italian past tense in this series:

“Speaking About the Past: Imperfetto or Passato Prossimo?” or “Past Tense Passato Prossimo: Avere vs. Essere?” and “Past Tense Imperfetto.”

Mi mancava un corso più per laurearmi.

I needed one more course to graduate.

Mi è mancato solamente un numero per vincere la lotteria ieri!

I only needed one number to win the lottery yesterday!

Mi mancavano due corsi per laurearmi.

I needed two more courses to graduate.

Mi sono mancati cento euro per comprare una bella collana per mia madre.

I needed 100 euro to buy a beautiful necklace for my mother.

3. Use mancare to describe the “lack of” or “lacking” something (transitive) or mancare + di when describing a person’s character “to be lacking” (intransitive phrasal verb)

“To lack” something means that something is “missing,” so of course mancare is the verb to use to express this idea! For instance, one may lack an important tool to complete a particular job. In this case, mancare is used with the sentence structure for a transitive verb (with an indefinite article) and the thing that is lacking completes the sentence.
Another way the verb “lack” can be used is to describe disappointment in another’s character. Perhaps an individual “lacks” a certain personality trait that another finds desirable or that would help complete an important task. In some sense, when we use the verb mancare to refer to another’s character, we are expressing disappointment that they are “falling short of” what was expected. In this case, the Italian preposition di follows mancare and is combined with the definite article to describe the character trait that is missing.

A Marco manca la chiave inglese per aggiustare la gomma a terra della macchina.

Mark lacked a wrench to fix the flat tire on his car.

A lui mancano i soldi nonostante dieci anni di lavoro; ma è una brava persona e mia sorella l’ama.

He lacks money despite ten years of work; but is a good person and my sister loves him.

Lei è molto bella, ma manca dell’intelligenza per capire le molte cose che succedono in questo mondo.

She is very beautiful, but lacks the intelligence to understand the many things that happen in this world.

Maria manca della forza necessaria per sollevare la scattola pesante.

Maria lacked the strength necessary to lift the heavy box.

4. Use mancare to describe “failing” at something, perhaps by “missing an opportunity” or by “missing a target” in sports (intransitive)

If one takes “lacking” something to the extreme, this may lead to the use of mancare with the meaning “to fail.”
Figuratively, one can fail by simply “missing” or “losing” an opportunity. Of course, one can “miss” an opportunity to do something without failing as well!
In sports, one can literally “miss” a target.
Fallire means “to fail,” and is usually used to describe the failure of a business. Interestingly, fallire can be used to mean “to miss,” such as when one has “failed to notice something.” Bocciare also means “to fail,” in reference to an exam, or school, and does triple duty with it’s meanings of “to bounce” or “to hit” (hence the name for the game bocce).
In this case, mancare is used as an intransitive verb and does not use an indefinite article. The usual subject + verb sentence structure is used.

Marco ha mancato l’opportunità per la promozione; non ha chiesto al capo per tempo.

Mark lost the opportunity for the promotion; he did not ask in time.

Maria ha mancato la festa stasera; aveva troppo lavoro da finire!

Maria missed the party last night; she had too much work to finish!

Maria manca il bersaglio a solamente venti metri.

Maria missed the target at only 20 meters.

Ancora una volta, Mark ha mancato la rete!

Mark missed the net again! (= he missed the target)

A short note (as promised earlier) about how the choice of helping verb used with mancare in the passato prossimo changes depending on the meaning of the sentence.

Notice with the last two example sentences, one could simply say, “Maria missed,” or “Mark missed,” without mentioning the target, and the sentence would still make sense. There is an additional phrase that follows the verb in these two example sentences but the additional phrase is not essential. This is the hallmark of an intransitive verb.

Remember, though, that missing a target is different from missing/lacking something in Italian, as described in Section 3. We could make almost the exact same Italian sentence to describe that Mark was missing something/lacking something/forgot to bring something — for example, a net needed for fishing. In this case, the verb mancare is transitive; the verb transfers action to a direct object —the net —which is essential to the meaning of the sentence. Essere is used as a helping verb to express this different meaning. The English is translated to reflect this difference in meaning.

Ancora una volta, a Mark è mancata la rete!

Mark was missing (was lacking/ didn’t bring with him) the net (net as an object, for example the net with which you fish) again.

5. Use mancare as the English equivalent of “be left” and “be away” (intransitive)

When describing how much of something “is left,” in Italian, such as money or distance to the next location, use mancare.
When describing that someone “is away,” in Italian, as in absent from a meeting, or not nearby, use mancare.
The conjugated form of mancare will start the sentence or phrase.
When describing “what is left” or how many people “are away” with mancare, conjugate mancare in the third person singular or plural to match the number of things or people referred to.
In this case, mancare is used as an intransitive verb and does not use an indefinite article.

Manca un miglio alla piazza.

There is one mile left to (get to) the town square.

Mancano due miglia alla piazza.

There are two miles left to (get to) the town square.

Non siamo pronti per ordinare; manca Maria al tavolo.

We are not ready to order; Maria is away from the table.

Non è possibile cominciare la riunione; mancano Pietro, Laura, e Anna.

It is not possible to start the meeting; Peter, Laura, and Ann are away.

6. Use mancare alone or “venire a mancare” to refer to a death

Mancare can be used to describe a relative’s death in a gentle, understated way, mentioning that the person has been “lost,” instead of using the more common and straightforward verb morire (to die). Sparire (to disappear/vanish) is also used to refer to a death, similar to the English euphemism “passed away.”
The expression “venire a mancare” is idiomatic; the two verbs are used together to create a unique meaning. The use of venire in this manner puts the emphasis on the act of leaving and is used to an individual’s death. Lasciare is the more commonly used verb that means “to leave,” such as to leave a position at work or a romantic relationship.
In these cases, mancare is used as an intransitive verb and does not use an indefinite article. The usual subject + verb sentence structure is used.

Mio nonno è mancato ieri; aveva ottanta anni.

My grandfather was lost (died) yesterday; he was 80 years old.

Mio nonno è venuto a mancare ieri.

My grandfather died yesterday.

Remember how to use the Italian verb
mancare with all it’s shades of meaning
and I guarantee
you will use this verb every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Talking with family and friends using familiar Italian commands

August 1, 2023January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 3 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

I have been trying to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to understand the nuances used among family members and friends. In Italian, verbs in their familiar imperative form are commonly used, especially with children, to give encouragement, instructions, or warnings.

To the English speaker, the name “imperative verb” or alternatively “command verb” can suggest a harsh approach to interacting with others; we English speakers typically think of a command as a type of forceful instruction given by an officer in the military, or maybe by one’s boss at work, or even a strict teacher at school. And yet, we do use this form in English every day with family and friends, often without realizing it. For instance, when we say, “Be careful!” we are issuing a command that arises out of concern for another. We use a shortened infinitive form of the English verb without a subject pronoun when giving a command in English. “To be” is shortened to “be” in our example sentence, and it is understood that the speaker is directly addressing another person or a group.*

As in English, if one knows an Italian infinitive verb, he or she is able to give an Italian command, although only in the negative. In Italian, verbs must be conjugated and their imperative endings used according to whom the speaker is addressing. But if we learn several common Italian expressions with their familiar command verbs, we will truly sound like a native Italian when speaking with family and friends!

*The proper conjugation of the English verb “to be” is: I am, you are, he/she is, we are, you all are, they are. Among certain groups in America, the word “be” can sometimes replace one of the usual conjugated forms of the verb “to be” in informal speech. In this case, the word “be” is spoken after a subject pronoun (“I be, you be, he/she be), although this is not considered grammatically correct.

This post is the 70th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use
verbs in their familiar command form

when conversing with family and friends.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar.

****************************************

About Italian Imperative Verbs

To the English speaker, the name “imperative verb,” or alternatively “command verb,” can suggest a harsh approach to interacting with others; we English speakers typically think of a command as a type of forceful instruction given by an officer in the military, or maybe by one’s boss at work, or even a strict teacher at school. And yet, we do use this form in English every day with family and friends, often without realizing it. For instance, when we say, “Be careful!” we are issuing a command that arises out of concern for another. We use a shortened infinitive form of the English verb without a subject pronoun when giving a command in English. “To be” is shortened to “be” in our example sentence, and it is understood that the speaker is directly addressing another person or a group.*

****************************************

How to Create an Italian Command

By definition, the speaker using an imperative verb is giving a command to someone else. This means that there is no first person, or io conjugation, to learn; imperative verbs are conjugated only in the tu, Lei, noi and voi forms. We will not cover the polite Lei imperative in this blog, which is rendered only with the Italian subjunctive mood. This leaves us with the familiar second person singular and plural (tu/voi) forms and the noi form to discuss.

As we will see, the familiar command noi ending is identical to the present tense, although the meaning is different. For all but the -are verbs, the familiar command tu and voi verb endings are also identical to the present tense! The Italian subject pronoun is always omitted when relaying a familiar command and therefore in conversational Italian one must rely on the verb ending alone to understand the message.

Given their similarity to the present tense, Italian familiar command verbs must be taken in context during conversation. Italian commands are usually short and are spoken forcefully; in writing they are followed by an exclamation point to emphasize the command ending is being used.

The first table below shows the imperative endings for the -are, -ere, and -ire groups of Italian verbs. For the tu form, you will note from the red a that only the -are verbs have an imperative ending that differs from the simple present tense.

Imperative Tense Endings

	–are	-ere	-ire	-ire(isc)
(io)	–	–	–	–
tu	a	i	i	isci
Lei/lei/lui

noi	iamo	iamo	iamo	iamo
voi	ate	ete	ite	ite
(loro)	–	–	–	–

In the following table are three Italian verbs that are commonly used in the imperative tense.

Notice that the imperative noi form has endings that are identical to the present tense, although as mentioned previously, the meaning is “Let’s… (do something)“ when the verb is used in the imperative. Now, doesn’t it make sense that “Andiamo!” means, “Let’s go”? We are simply using the imperative form of the present tense! Check out the example verbs in the last table and their English translations.

	Guardare!(to look)	Rispondere!(to answer)	Partire!(to leave)
tu	Guarda! Look!	Rispondi! Answer!	Parti! Leave!
noi	Guardiamo! Let’s look!	Rispondiamo! Let’s answer!	Partiamo! Let’s leave!
voi	Guardate! (You all) look!	Rispondete! (You all) answer!	Partite! (You all) leave!

****************************************

Italian Imperative Verbs:
Italian Commands with Reflexive Verbs

When conjugating a reflexive verb into the familiar imperative, we must also know where to place the reflexive pronoun — which in this case is after the verb and attached to the end of the conjugated form. This rule holds true for the tu, noi, and voi forms. The conjugated verb and attached pronoun are spoken as one word.

This rule may seem confusing at first, since previously we have learned to put Italian reflexive pronouns before the verb. Although, the sequence is the same for English reflexive commands. We English speakers also put the reflexive pronoun after a command verb in English — when it is needed — so the Italian sentence structure should not be difficult to get used to.*

Try to remember the correct way to conjugate Italian reflexive imperative verbs from everyday experiences at home. For instance, think of some common phrases a mother might say to a teenager on a school morning : “Alzati!” for “Wake (yourself) up!” and “Sbrigati!” for “Hurry (yourself) up!” And, in Italian households, at dinnertime each person in the family is encouraged to, “Siediti!” for “Sit (yourself) down!” so everyone can start eating before the food gets cold!

Notice the spelling change for our example verb sbrigarsi for the noi form in the table below. The spelling change is necessary to keep the sound of this form constant with the infinitive form and other conjugated forms.

Imperative Sbrigarsi – to hurry (oneself) up

tu	Sbrigati!	Hurry (yourself/familiar) up!
noi	Sbrighiamoci!	Let’s hurry ourselves up!
voi	Sbrigatevi!	Hurry (yourselves/familiar) up!

*Remember that Italian uses reflexive verbs far more commonly than English does. Often in English uses a verb-preposition combination to render the same idea as Italian does with a reflexive verb. But think of the English examples, “Wash yourself right now!” or “Give yourself a chance!” to see that this is the case.

****************************************

Italian Imperative Verbs:
Common Irregular Italian Verbs

The imperative forms for seven important irregular Italian verbs are presented in the tables below. Notice that most of the verbs in the first table have two imperative tu forms. The more commonly used tu form is blue and is identical to the present tense. The irregular verbs avere and essere always use unique, irregular tu and voi command forms.

Anyone who enjoys watching Italian movies has heard the many ways there are in Italian to ask or tell someone to leave a place such as: “Va!” (“Go!”) or more forcefully, “Vai via!” (“Go away!”). By the way, lest we think Italians are rude when asking someone to leave, there is also a polite way to tell someone to leave, with the subjunctive verb — “Vada!” which also means, “Go!”

“Dai!” is used to encourage someone to continue on despite difficulty and means, “Come on!” You might also want to remember “Dimmi!” for “Tell me!” and “Dammi!” for “Give me!” When directing someone to get moving on a project, use “Fallo!” which means, “Do it!” Notice how the first letters of the direct objects mi and lo are doubled when writing these irregular command forms.

Finally, if you would like to direct a child to “Be good!” you can say, “Stai buono(a)!” or less commonly, “Stà buono(a)!” These sentences use the tu imperative form of the verb stare. Remember from our previous blog about buono that the ending of the adjective buono will change, depending on the gender of the person addressed. On the other hand, “Sei bravo(a)” means the speaker is addressing someone who is has done something well. When a parent wants to command their child to be patient, he or she may say, “Abbi pazienza!” for “Have patience!”

See the tables below for a summary of these important irregular verbs in the imperative tense. Imperative forms that differ from their present tense conjugation are given in brown. Some of these verbs can stand alone, while others need a pronoun or adjective to complete the sentence Look for the ellipse (…) in our tables and try to think of a complete command for each!

Irregular Imperative Verbs

	Andare (to go)	Dare (to give)	Dire (to say to tell)	Fare (to do to make)	Stare (to be to stay)
tu	Vai! / Và!	Dai…! / Dà…!	Di…!	Fai…! / Fa…!	Stai…!/ Stà!…!
noi	Andiamo!	Diamo…!	Diciamo…!	Facciamo…!	Stiamo…!
voi	Andate!	Date…!	Dite…!	Fate…!	State…!

	Avere (to have)	Essere (to be)
tu	Abbi…!	Sii…!
noi	Abbiamo…!	Siamo…!
voi	Abbiate…!	Siate…!

****************************************

Negative Italian Commands with
Common Irregular Italian Verbs

It is easy to give a familiar negative command to one person in Italian — that is, it is easy to tell someone you know not to do something! For all Italian verbs, simply put the word non in front of the infinitive form of the verb. In other words, do not conjugate!

The reflexive pronoun ti still needs to be tacked on to the end of the infinitive reflexive verb, though. For instance, if one friend wants to tell another, “Don’t worry!” the Italian is, “Non preoccuparti!” As usual for familiar imperative verbs, the subject pronoun tu is left out of the sentence. The additional verb “do” that we use in English before “not” — to make “do not” or “don’t” — is not necessary in Italian.

Below are examples that use the Italian verbs preoccuparsi (to be worried), guardare (to look) and parlare (to talk/speak). The Italian subject pronouns tu, noi, and voi are omitted from familiar command sentences but are given in parenthesis for reference. Notice that the subject pronoun is also omitted in English.

(tu) Non preoccuparti! Don’t (you fam.) worry yourself!

(tu) Non guardare! Don’t (you fam.) look!

(tu) Non parlare! Don’t (you fam.) speak!

For the negative imperative in the noi and voi forms, conjugate as usual and simply put non in front of the Italian verb. Remember to add the reflexive pronoun to the ending of all reflexive verbs. Again, the Italian and English subject pronouns are omitted.

(noi) Non preoccupiamoci! Let’s not worry ourselves!

(voi) Non preoccupatevi! (You all) Don’t worry yourselves!

(noi) Non guardiamo! Let’s not look!

(voi) Non guardate! (You all) Don’t look!

Remember how to use Italian imperative verbs
and I guarantee you will use these phrases
with family and friends every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Italian linking verbs: “essere” “diventare” and “sembrare” and adjective agreement

July 1, 2023August 30, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

I have been trying to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to use linking verbs — verbs that describe a state of being. Linking verbs do not describe movement; that is the role of the action verbs. The linking verbs, which link the subject with a descriptor, have their own, essential role to play. Remember the famous English saying, “To be or not to be? ” to understand just how important a linking verb is in any language!

It follows that if one were to make a list of the most commonly used verbs for any language, the linking verbs will top any single action verb. For instance, the English verb “to be,” and its Italian equivalent “essere,” are certainly used in ordinary conversation every day, many times a day. In English, the verbs “to become” and “to seem” are always linking verbs, as are their Italian equivalents “diventare” and “sembrare.”

Since a linking verb “links” the subject to a descriptor, there are special implications when a verb like “to be” or “essere” is employed. In short, the subject in the first phrase of the sentence and the predicate that follows are “linked” so they are “one and the same.” This creates a situation in which the verb tense and the noun and/or adjective that follows must always agree with the subject. This last rule has special implications for Italian, which classifies all nouns into masculine and feminine and requires that all adjectives match their noun in gender and number!

We have talked about Italian noun/adjective agreement in our blog in this series, Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! Italian Adjectives: Before or After the Noun? We have also described how the Italian possessive adjectives must agree in gender and number with the noun they precede in our last blog How to Express Possession in Italian. The Italian linking verbs provide yet another situation for noun/adjective agreement.

If we learn how to use the most common Italian linking verbs, essere, diventare and sembrare, we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 69th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use
the Italian linking verbs

essere, diventare, and sembrare

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Italian Linking Verb
Essere

“To be, or not to be…” is one of the most famous lines ever written in the English language. But that phrase would not be possible without a verb to express the very idea that we exist. Think of how many times a day we say, “I am” or “he is” or “we are” — all forms of the English infinitive verb “to be.”

In Italian, the verb essere means to be. Essere in the present tense is a linking verb, as it connects the subject in the beginning of the sentence with specific information about the subject at the end of the sentence. No action is described. Instead, with the verb essere, the subject can be thought of as one and the same as, or “linked” to the information that follows.

The complete conjugation of essere in the present tense is given below. Note that essere is an irregular verb and all forms should be memorized given the daily use you will have for this verb! The accented syllables have been underlined.

io	sono	I am
tu	sei	you (familiar) are
Lei lei/lui	è	you (polite)are she/he is

noi	siamo	we are
voi	siete	you all are
loro	sono	they are

Since a linking verb “links” the subject to a descriptor, there are special rules to follow when a verb like “to be” or “essere” is employed. Since the subject in the first phrase and the predicate that follows are “linked” they are essentially “one and the same.” Therefore, the verb tense, as well as the noun and/or adjective that follows, must always agree with the subject. This situation has special implications for Italian, which classifies all nouns into masculine and feminine and requires that all adjectives match their noun in gender and number!

The use of essere requires
the Italian endings for any noun or adjective that follows
to match the gender and number of the subject.
They are, after all, one and the same!

Essere is also an essential “helping verb” for compound tenses in Italian, which are made up of more than one verb. Hence essere is also classified as an auxiliary, or “assisting” verb when used in this manner. For compound tenses, essere requires a change in the ending of the verb that it assists. The passato prossimo, which is used to describe the recent past in Italian (and has been discussed in other blogs in this series), is an example of how essere is used as an auxiliary verb. Now that we know that essere is a linking verb, it makes sense that the ending of the past participle that follows the conjugated form of essere must be changed!

Let’s go through some simple examples in the present tense to see how this works.

The sentences below use the nouns that refer to a young girl, a young boy, and the different groups to which girls and boys can belong. For these nouns, one can simply change the ending of ragazzo (boy) to reflect the gender and number of the subject. Remember that in a group of males, or males and females, the Italian ending defaults to the masculine -i. A group of all females is special, though; the plural feminine ending -e is used.

The descriptor used in the sentences below, is the adjective bravo (good/nice personality), which will change it’s ending to reflect the gender and number of the noun that it modifies.

Both noun and adjective will, of course, reflect back to the subject
when using the verb to be, which is essere in Italian.

In the examples below, the gender of the subject and the noun and adjective endings that match it are given in red for the feminine and brown for the masculine. The conjugated forms of essere are green.

Caterina è una brava ragazza.
Kathy is a good/nice girl.

Pietro è un bravo ragazzo.
Peter is a good/nice boy.

Caterina e Francesca sono brave ragazze.
Kathy and Frances are good girls.

Pietro e Michele sono bravi ragazzi.
Peter and Michael are good boys.

Caterina e Pietro sono bravi ragazzi.
Kathy and Peter are good young people.

What do we do if the noun after the verb to be (essere) is omitted from the sentence and only an adjective is used to describe the subject? Simply remember to change the ending of the adjective to reflect the gender and number of the subject.

Caterina è brava.
Kathy is good/nice.

Pietro è bravo.
Peter is good/nice.

Caterina e Francesca sono brave.
Kathy and Frances are good.

Pietro e Michele sono bravi.
Peter and Michael are good.

Caterina e Pietro sono bravi.
Kathy and Peter are good.

One last word on the use of bravo. If you shout, “Bravo!” in a theater, this is for a single male performer. Shout “Brava!” for a female performer. “Bravi!” is correct for the entire cast but for some reason is less frequently used than “Bravo!” here in America.

***********************************************************

Italian Linking Verb
Diventare

The Italian verb diventare (to become), like the verb “to be,” always functions as a linking verb in both Italian and English. By definition, the subject “becomes” what is listed in the phrase that follows this verb. Although the subject changes, the verb still refers to the subject mentioned at the beginning of the sentence.

Diventare is a regular -are verb. The full conjugation is below.

io	divento	I become
tu	diventi	you (familiar) become
Lei lei/lui	diventa	you (polite) become she/he becomes

noi	diventiamo	we become
voi	diventate	you all become
loro	diventano	they become

Notice that if we substitute the conjugated form of diventare for essere in our example sentences in the first section of this blog, the endings for the adjective bravo remain the same! I’ve added a qualifier to the first sentence, which can also be used with the sentences that follow with our verb diventare.

Caterina diventa brava con la prova.
Kathy becomes good with rehearsing.

Pietro diventa bravo.
Peter becomes good.

Caterina e Francesca diventano brave.
Kathy and Frances become good.

Pietro e Michele diventano bravi.
Peter and Michael become good.

Caterina e Pietro diventano bravi.
Kathy and Peter become good.

Since the verb diventare is often used in the past tense, such as when one is talking about a change they have noticed in another, let’s try these sentences one more time with the passato prossimo. Essere must be conjugated and used as the helping verb with diventare, as with other Italian verbs that denote a change in one’s state of being.

In the examples below, notice the change in the ending of the past participle diventato to match the gender and number of the subject. Also, the addition of a specific time frame to the first sentence (which can be used with the remaining sentences as well) to go along with our use of the passato prossimo. (If you need a refresher on how to use the passato prossimo, visit the blog Past Tense Passato Prossimo — Avere vs. Essere? ).

Caterina è diventata brava lo scorso anno.
Kathy became good last year.

Pietro è diventato bravo.
Peter became good.

Caterina e Francesca sono diventate brave.
Kathy and Frances became good.

Pietro e Michele sono diventati bravi.
Peter and Michael become good.

Caterina e Pietro sono diventati bravi.
Kathy and Peter became good.

Many common Italian phrases that speak of life changes use the verb diventare. One can make something of themselves, become a grandfather, or become another’s friend and these ideas can be rendered with phrases that use the Italian verb diventare.

See below for example sentences that describe real life situations with diventare. Once again, notice that the passato prossimo and the noun or adjective that follows all must change to agree in gender and number with the subject!

Marco è diventato qualcuno quando lui ha compiuto trentadue anni.
Mark made something of himself when he became 32 years old.

Michelle è diventato nonno alla età di sessanta anni.
Michael became a grandfather at the age of 60.

Maria e Anna sono diventate amiche.
Mary and Ann have become friends.

Marco e Michelle sono diventati amici.
Mark and Michael have become friends.

Marco e Anna sono diventati amici.
Mark and Ann have become friends.

Several Italian expressions use diventare to refer to emotions that show in a person’s facial expressions or body language. For instance, the acts of blushing, showing confusion, freezing up or becoming furious.

diventare di fuoco	to blush violently
diventare rosso come un peperone	to blush lit. “to become bright red like a pepper”
diventare rosso come un tacchino	to blush lit. “to become red like a turkey”
diventare di mille colori diventare di tutti i colori	to blush a million shades of color to show awkwardness and confusion on one’s face.
diventare una bestia	to become furious/ to lose it.
diventare di gelo	to freeze up

Maria è diventata di fuoco quando ho detto che a Marco gli piace lei.
Maria blushed violently when I told her that Mark likes her.

Pietro è diventato una bestia* dopo aver guidato nel traffico per due ore.
Peter lost it after driving in traffic for two hours.

Maria e Pietro sono diventati di gelo quando hanno sentito un rumore in casa di notte.
Mary and Peter froze up when they heard noise in the house at night.

*The noun bestia is always feminine.

***********************************************************

Italian Linking Verb
Sembrare

The Italian verb sembrare (to seem/to appear/to look like) is the third verb that always functions as a linking verb in both Italian and English.* By definition, the subject “seems to be “or “looks like” what is listed in the phrase that follows sembrare. Although, in reality the subject may not fit the description in the phrase that follows, sembrare still refers back to the subject. and therefore is a linking verb.

Sembrare is a regular -are verb. The full conjugation is below.

io	sembro	I seem I look like
tu	sembri	you (familiar)seem you look like
Lei lei/lui	sembra	you (polite) seem you look like she/he seems she/he looks like

noi	sembriamo	we seem we look like
voi	sembrate	you all seem you all look like
loro	sembrano	they seem they look like

*Sembrare can also mean “to feel like” but this definition will be discussed in another blog.

Notice that if we substitute the conjugated form of sembrare for essere in our example sentences in the first section of this blog, the endings for the adjective bravo remain the same! I’ve translated bravo as nice, as in to have a nice personality, for the examples below that use sembrare.

Caterina sembra brava.
Kathy seems nice.

Pietro sembra bravo.
Peter seems nice.

Caterina e Francesca sembrano brave.
Kathy and Frances seem nice.

Pietro e Michele sembrano bravi.
Peter and Michael seem nice.

Caterina e Pietro sembrano bravi.
Kathy and Peter seem nice.

In life, sembrare is commonly used to describe how a person comes across, or presents him or herself, as above. Just replace bravo with any one of many characteristics or personality types to create many more descriptive sentences.

Lei sembra intelligente, contenta, bella, etc.
She seems intelligent, happy, pretty, etc.

Or, on the negative side…

Lei sembra maleducata, triste, brutta, etc.
She seems rude, sad, ugly, etc.

*********************

Italian Verbs
Sembrare vs. Somigliare

Sembrare is also often the verb used to describe when someone resembles, or “looks like” someone else, such as when a child looks like their parent or when someone you know resembles a famous actor. Notice that in this case the idea contained in the English phrase “looks like” is expressed with sembrare alone in Italian; no preposition or other clarifying word is needed.

The verb somigliare, followed by the preposition a, is often used in this situation as well. Since the two people or groups are similar to each other, it stands to reason they will be equivalent in gender and number. In the passato prossimo, though, sembrare uses essere as its helping verb, while somigliare uses avere.

If you want to embellish your statement, provide specific characteristics using either entrambe for a feminine comparison, or entrambi for a masculine comparison or to compare a group of males and females.

Maria sembra sua mamma; Maria looks like her mother;
entrambe sono alte e belle. both are tall and beautiful.

– or –

Maria somiglia a sua mamma. Maria looks like her mother.
entrambe sono alte e belle. both are tall and beautiful.

Pietro sembra Marcello Mastroianni;
Peter looks like Marcello Mastroianni;

entrambi sono alti e belli.
both are tall and handsome.

– or –

Pietro somiglia a Marcello Mastroianni.
Maria looks like Marcello Mastroianni.

entrambi sono alti e belli.
both are tall and handsome.

A place or object can also look similar to another place or object, depending on one’s perspective. Be careful when stating your opinion, though, since the sentence structure may require use of the subjunctive mood! If you are not familiar with the subjunctive mood but still want to emphasize that you are uncertain or stating an opinion, start your sentence with one of the following phrases: forse (perhaps), per me (for me), or secondo me (according to me). These three phrases do not require the use of a subjunctive mood verb.*

Secondo me, Roma sembra New York:
According to me, Rome seems like New York;

entrambe (città) sono rumorose e pieno di gente.
both (cities) are noisy and full of people.

– or –

Per me, Roma somiglia a New York:
For me, Rome is similar to New York;

entrambe (città) sono rumorose e pieno di gente.
both (cities) are noisy and full of people.

La nuova versione del software sembra la vecchia;
The new version of the software appears like the old;
non ho notato alcuna differenza.
I haven’t noticed any difference.

– or –

La nuova versione del software somoglia alla vecchia;
The new version of the software seems like the old;
Non ho notato qualunque differenza.
I haven’t noticed any difference.

*If you are interested in learning more about the subjunctive mood, visit my blog series “Speak Italian!” on this topic in my blog.learntravelitalian.com. The first blog in the series is Italian Subjunctive (Part 1): Speak Italian!

Remember how to use Italian adjectives
and I guarantee you will be able to create
colorful Italian phrases every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to express possession with Italian Possessive Adjectives

Burano in Venice, Italy and Everyday Italian phrases

June 1, 2023August 31, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to describe possession — this refers not only to the things we own but also to our interpersonal relationships. Did you know that to describe possession one must use a special set of adjectives, which are called the possessive adjectives? In English, we simply put a possessive adjective (my, your, his/hers, etc.) before a noun under discussion. English possessive adjectives refer to the person or persons who “own” something or have a special relationship to someone. The word placement is the same in Italian; the possessive adjectives are placed before the noun. However, the Italian use of possessive adjectives requires a different way of thinking, since Italians match the gender and number of the possessive adjective to the object or person referred to! Even more interestingly, the Italian use of the definite article to form the possessive adjective can yield clues to an individual’s interpersonal relationships.

There is also the stressed form of possessive adjectives, which flip this sentence order in both English and Italian, and are put after the noun in order to emphasize the idea of possession!

We started to talk different categories of Italian adjectives in our last blog, Italian Adjectives: Before or After the Noun? and covered adjectives of nationality, color, and personality. This blog will focus on the common use of possessive adjectives in Italian and their variations in order to express relationships with family and friends.

If we learn how to use Italian possessive adjectives in the proper way, we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 68th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

possessive adjectives

to describe ownership and interpersonal relationships.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Things

Possessive adjectives allow one to describe ownership. As we have already learned in our last blog talian Adjectives: Before or After the Noun?, Italian adjectives change their endings to match the gender and number of the noun they modify. For Italian possessive adjectives, this change holds true, and therefore will depend on what is being possessed.

Note the difference from English; the English possessive adjectives (my, your, our, their) refer to the person who is the “owner” of the thing under discussion. But in Italian, although the adjective itself describes the owner, the ending of the possessive adjective is linked to the object possessed — its masculine or feminine ending and how many of each are referred to! In effect, we can have a masculine owner of a feminine object and the possessive adjective used will have a feminine ending, or vice versa. We must really think in Italian when we use Italian possessive adjectives!

Italian possessive adjectives are placed before the person, place, or thing they modify, just like in English. The Italian definite article, which is required before an Italian noun, is often included as part of the Italian possessive adjective. In this case, all three — definite article, possessive adjective, and noun — will agree in gender and number!

The table below lists the singular and plural possessive adjectives. Of course, there are four possessive adjectives to cover all situations that might occur in gender or number for any given noun. Notice from the table below that the masculine possessive adjectives end in -o/-i and the feminine possessive adjectives end in –a/-e, except for the third person plural form, loro, which is invariable. Since loro is invariable, it cannot be used without its definite article.

Italian Singular Possessive Adjectives		Italian Plural Possessive Adjectives
mio / mia	my	miei / mie
tuo / tua	your (familiar) singular	tuoi / tue
suo* / sua*	*your (polite) singular his, her, its**	suoi* / sue*

nostro / nostra	our	nostri / nostre
vostro / vostra	your (familiar) plural	vostri / vostre
loro	their	loro

*For “polite your”, when writing, simply capitalize, as in, “il Suo amico” or “la Sua amica.”

Although the grammar for Italian possessive adjectives appears complicated at first, the matching endings flow easily when spoken and give Italian its beautiful musical cadence. In fact, in our last blog about Italian adjectives, several examples used possessive adjectives with their correct endings because they fit so easily into the sentences we were creating. Let’s take a look:

Anna è una ragazza europea; viene dalla Francia. Abita in compagna e d’estate e dalla sua casa può vedere i fiori gialli, viola, e lilla.

Ann is a European girl; she is from France. She lives in the country, and during the summer from her house she can see yellow, violet, and light purple flowers.

Mio nonno Carmelo è un uomo italiano ma gli piace molto la sua casa in America. Lui ha dipinto la sua casa blu, come il mare italiano.
My grandfather Carl is an Italian man but he really likes his house in America. He painted his house blue, like the sea around Italy.

In both examples above, the Italian word casa was modified by “la sua” — to signify “hers” in the first case and “his” in the second case. Even though the two subjects’ gender is different the examples, the possessive adjective remains the same, since the ending is linked to the noun that follows. At this point, we won’t discuss combining “da” with “la,” as in the first example, since that is the topic for another blog!

Below are some simple sentences with examples of matching possessive adjectives and nouns. Remember that nouns that end in -e are designated as either masculine or feminine in Italian. If one is not sure, just check the definite article, which will be true to the gender of the noun! Notice again that the word order for nouns and adjectives in the English translation may differ from the Italian sentence.

Mi piace la mia macchina rossa.
I like my red car.

Questo è il tuo libro.
This is your book.

I nostri lavoratori sono bravi artigani.
Our workers are talented artisans.

Il loro cibo italiano è il migliore!
Their Italian food is the best!

It should be noted that the Italian definite article can be omitted if the speaker wants to emphasize ownership of a particular thing when using the verb essere. For instance, if the speaker in our first example wanted to stress his ownership of a car, he would simply say, “È mia,” for, “(It) is mine,” and omit the definite article la and the word macchina. In English, we use mine instead of my, ours instead of our and yours instead of your after the verb “to be” in a similar way. This is called the stressed form of the possessive adjective.

Finally, the expression “a casa mia,” with the possessive adjective placed alone, after the noun, is common and means “at/to my house.” The other possessive forms can be used as well with this phrase, as in “a casa tua” (at your house) or “a casa sua” (at his/her house). And, it can always be, “colpa mia” for “my fault.”

*************************************************

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Family Members Singular

Possessive adjectives are also used to talk about relationships between family members and friends in every language. In fact, the Italian use of the definite article to form the possessive adjective can yield clues to an individual’s interpersonal relationships.

For instance, when referring to a family member in the singular, the Italian possessive adjective is used alone, without it’s definite article. Of course husband, wife, mother, father, sister and brother do not need a definite article when you mention them in conversation or in writing. This holds true for the extended family as well.

Two examples from our last blog, which refer to the speaker’s cousin and grandfather:

Ti presento Caterina, mia cugina americana.
Let me introduce you to Kathryn, my American cousin.

Mio nonno Carmelo è un uomo italiano ma gli piace molto la sua casa in America.
My grandfather Carl is an Italian man but he really likes his house in America.

Following this line of thinking, when speaking of anyone “outside” the family, from a close friend to an acquaintance one barely knows, the Italian definite article is included with the Italian possessive adjective!

Oggi ho comprato un regalo per Francesca, la mia amica del cuore.
Today I bought a present for my dear friend Frances.

La mia conoscente Anna sarà alla festa stasera.
My acquaintance Ann will be at the party tonight.

How about that boyfriend or girlfriend? Or someone who is even closer to you — your fiancé or fiancée? Always use il mio fidanzato or la mia fidanzata for a boyfriend/fiancé or girlfriend/fiancée. Italian dictates that you must use the definite article since these individuals are not yet officially a part of the family! Of course, your ex-husband or ex-wife is demoted to definite article use as well, as they have left the confines of the family; la mia ex moglie and il mio ex marito is Italian for my ex-wife and my ex-husband.

In America, many people are as close to their pets as they are to their other family members. Although Italians may be as attached to their pets as Americans, if a cat or a dog is a part of the family, Italians use the definite article when speaking about them, as in il mio gato or il mio cane. The endings of the nouns that refer to animals are not usually changed to match their gender. But, if it is important to emphasize that a pet is female, you can say, “la mia gata” (female cat) or “la mia cagnolina” (female dog).*

Finally, when one uses the Italian word famiglia to speak about “my family,” the definite article is required by convention. Notice also that the noun family is used in the singular, although by definition it refers to a group of people (otherwise known as a “collective noun”). The Italian verb used with the subject “family” will be in the third person singular as a result.

La mia famiglia viene dall’Italia.
My family comes from/ is from Rome.

*In this case, one cannot simply add the letter a to the end of cagno to create the female counterpart of this noun; a simple a ending would create a word that today is used to refer to a woman in a vulgar way. The “lina” ending is added instead.

*************************************************

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Family Members – Plural

Although the Italian definite article takes on a particular importance in denoting family relationships in the singular, this is not the case in the plural. Instead, when speaking of more than one family member, the definite article must be always be used, just as with a friend or acquaintance.

For instance:

I nostri amicisono arrivati.
Our friends (They) have arrived.
I nostri cugini sono arrivati.
Our cousins (They) have arrived.

In the above cases, notice that the past participle arrivati also has an i ending. If you need a refresher on how to create the passato prossimo in Italian, please refer to our blog: Past Tense Passato Prossimo – “Avere” or “Essere”?

Below are two summary tables for the possessive adjectives used to refer to close members of the family, one for the female members and one for the male members. Both singular and plural possessive adjectives have been included to emphasize use of the definite article in the plural.

La mia Famiglia Femminile – Female Members of My Family

Italian Singular		Italian Plural
Possessive Adjectives		Possessive Adjectives
mia madre	my mother
mia mamma	my mom
mia sorella	my sister(s)	le mie sorelle
mia nonna	my grandmother(s)	le mie nonne
mia zia	my aunt(s)	le mie zie
mia figlia	my daughter(s)	le mie figlie
mia cugina	my female cousin(s)	le mie cugine

La mia famiglia Maschile – Male Members of My Family

Italian Singular		Italian Plural
Possessive Adjectives		Possessive Adjectives
mio padre	my father
mio papà*	my dad
mio fratello	my brother(s)	i miei fratelli
mio nonno	my grandfather(s)	i miei nonni
mio zio	my uncle(s)	i miei zii
mio figlio	my son(s)	i miei figli
mio cugino	my cousin(s)	i miei cugini

* Papà, with the accent over the final a, means “dad” and is pronounced differently from papa, without the accent, and means the “pope” of the Catholic church.

*************************************************

A couple of “Exceptions” to the
Rules for Italian Possessive Adjectives

Sometimes… the Italian definite article is needed when mentioning a single family member. This will happen if an additional adjective is placed between the possessive adjective and the family member in the sentence.

See the example below. The additional adjective is in red and the possessive adjective has been underlined. Notice that the possessive adjective, the additional adjective, and the family member have endings that all match in gender and number.

Caterina è la mia cara cugina.
Kathy is my dear cousin.

***********************************

Sometimes… the Italian definite article is omitted when mentioning a group of family members. This will happen if the possessive adjective is used in a way to emphasize one’s possession of the object. In English, we use mine instead of my, ours instead of our and yours instead of your after the verb “to be” in a similar way. This is called the stressed form of the possessive adjective.

When an Italian possessive adjective is used for emphasis, the sentence structure with the possessive adjective is the same as that used for a stressed personal pronoun. In short, the definite article for the possessive adjective is placed after the noun, without its definite article.

To understand this concept, I always remember a scene from Roberto Benigni’s film Il Mostro. This film is a comedy (despite its title). Benigni’s character is mistaken for a “monster” who has been committing crimes in an Italian town. When his girlfriend decides to leave him, she emphasizes that she wants to keep the sunglasses he had given her. She leaves the apartment, comes back, picks up the sunglasses from the kitchen table, and says, “E questi sono miei” for “And these are mine!”

E questi (occhiali da sole) sono miei!
And these (sunglasses) are mine!

– or-

Questi occhiali miei sono belli!
These glasses of mine are beautiful!

Practice using Italian possessive adjectives when talking about
family and friends
and I guarantee you will use them every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Italian Adjectives: Before or After the Noun?

May 1, 2023August 30, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

I will try to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to describe the characteristics of the people, places, and things that we encounter every day. We do this naturally in our own language with adjectives — for instance, when we describe the appearance of a new acquaintance, the wispy clouds of a summer day, or the racing car red of the sportscar of our dreams. Adjectives can enliven the listener’s perception of a subject and provide additional shades of meaning. In English, adjectives are generally placed before the noun they modify. But in Italian, most adjectives are placed after nouns, while a few types of adjectives are placed before nouns. And finally, many Italian adjectives can hold either position in relation to their noun — either before or after. Interestingly, where an Italian adjective is placed in a sentence can even change its meaning!

Let’s talk about three different categories of Italian adjectives and discuss where each type of adjective should be placed in relation to its noun. This exercise will keep us on track with our goal to speak Italian more naturally and in more detail. If we learn how to use the most common Italian adjectives of nationality, color, and personality traits in the proper way, we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 67th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

adjectives of nationality,
color, and personality traits.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Italian Adjectives of Nationality
After the Noun

We discussed how to talk about traveling to a region in Italy or the United States in our last blog in this series, “When to Use ‘In’ and ‘Nel’ to Describe Italian Regions and the United States.” Of course, there are also Italian names for all the countries of the world, as well as for the people who live in each country.

To explain one’s cultural background in Italian, it is necessary to use Italian adjectives of nationality. For men, adjectives of nationality usually end in –o and change to an –i in the plural; for women, these same adjectives end in –a and change to –e in the plural. Therefore, a man from Italy would describe himself as italiano but a woman would say that she is italiana.

Some adjectives of nationality end in –ese, and in this case the same ending is used for both men and women. For the plural of the –ese ending, simply change the last letter –e to an –i.

Below is a sample of nationalities from all four continents. Watch out for the exceptions that are starred! There is no need to memorize the entire list. Instead, look up the nationalities for your family, just in case the topic comes up in conversation!

European	europeo(a) (plural: europei, europee)	African	africano(a)
Austrian	austriaco(a)	Asian	asiatico(a)
Belgian	belga(a)*	Middle Eastern	mediorientale
Danish	danese
Dutch	olandese	American	americano(a)
English	inglese	Central American	centroamericano(a)
French	francese	North American	nordamericano(a)
German	tedesco(a)	South American	sudamericano(a)
Grecian	greco(a)** (plural greci, greche)	Australian	australiano(a)
Irish	irlandese
Italian	italiano(a)	Argentinian	argentino(a)
Norwegian	norvegese	Brazilian	brasiliano(a)
Polish	polacco(a)	Canadian	canadese
Portugese	portoghese	Chilean	cileno(a)
Scandanavian	scandinavo(a)	Chinese	cinese
Spanish	spagnolo(a)	Egyptian	egiziano(a)
Swedish	svedese	Indian	indiano(a)
Swiss	svizzero(a)	Indonesian	indonesiano(a)
		Japanese	giapponese
		Korean	coreano(a)
		Mexican	messicano(a)
		Pakistan	pachistano(a)
		Russian	russo(a)
		Turkish	turco(a)
		United States (of America)	statunitense
		Vietnamese	vietnamita(a)*

*Exceptions to the rule of masculine and feminine.
**Pronunciation change for the masculine plural and spelling change to keep original sound for the feminine plural.

When speaking about an individual…

Most commonly, short sentences with the verb essere can be used to describe one’s nationality, as we discussed in the blog in this series “How to Use the Preposition ‘Da’ in Italian.” When someone asks, “Da dove viene?” for “Where are you from?” usually an Italian would simply say, “Sono italiano(a)” for “I am Italian.” (We have left out the “io” of course, as this is conversational Italian and the subject pronoun is not necessary.)

Italian adjectives of nationality always follow the noun they modify —
that is, persons, places or things from a given country —
and are not capitalized.

To take this one step further, if an Italian wants to describe a friend or relation, they might give the relationship first, and then put the person’s nationality afterward. In this case, the nationality will follow the noun friend, cousin, etc, and provide additional information or possibly emphasize a particular point about that person. Of course, there are many instances when one might want to describe their own or another’s nationality!

Some simple examples are given below, with the nouns and their adjectives underlined and their matching endings highlighted in red. Notice that the English translation puts the adjective of nationality before the noun, as this is the typical sentence structure in English.

English adjectives of nationality require capitalization, while Italian adjectives of nationality do not. Also, the English translations may not match word for word given the differences in how Italian and English may express an idea.

Paolo è il mio amico europeo.
Paul is my European friend.

Ti presento Caterina, mia cugina americana.
Let me introduce you to Kathryn, my American cousin.

Anna è una ragazza europea; viene dalla Francia.
Ann is a European girl; she is from France.

Mia mamma è una donna italiana; e quindi lei cucina cibo delizioso ogni sera.
My mother is an Italian woman; and therefore she cooks delicious food every night.

Mio nonno Carmelo è un uomo italiano ma gli piace molto la sua casa in America.
My grandfather Carl is an Italian man but he really likes his house in America.

*******************************************

Italian Adjectives for Colors
After the Noun

Writers and conversationalists alike often use color as a descriptor to enliven the discussion for the listener. Below is a list of adjectives to describe the colors (i colori) in Italian. Some of these adjectives have endings that change to agree with the gender and number of the nouns they describe. In this case, all forms are given. Others are invariable (the endings will not change). Notice the spelling changes for bianchi/bianche, which are made so the endings of the plural adjectives stay true to the “c” sound in the singular.

Adjectives denoting color
always follow the noun they modify.

bianco/bianca	bianchi/bianche*	white
nero/nera	neri/nere	black
grigio/grigia	grigi/grigie	gray
giallo/gialla	gialli/gialle	yellow
rosso/rossa*	rossi/rosse	red
azzurro/azzurra	azzurri/azzurre	light blue / sky blue
verde	verdi	green
arancione		orange
marrone		brown
beige		beige
rosa*		pink
blu		blue
lilla		lilac/light purple
viola		violet /purple

Colors are used frequently in Italian as a reference to other things or as a part of idiomatic expressions. Some examples from literature:

romanzo giallo = mystery/detective/crime novel (these Italian novels often have yellow covers)
romanzo rosa = romance novel

cronaca nera = crime news
cronaca rosa = gossip column/gossip magazine/tabloid
stampa rosa = tabloid

Italian idiomatic expressions (some but not all) that reference color are given below. Notice how similar the Italian and English sensibilities are regarding the positive and negative characteristics that color can hold!

vedere rosa = to be optimistic (literally to “see pink”)
vedere tutto rosa = to be overly optimistic / to be naive

al verde = to be broke
essere al verde = to be flat broke
essere verde dalla bile = to be green with envy
pollice verde = green thumb

principe azzurro = prince charming

andare in rosso = to get in debt
(essere) in rosso = to be in the red (debt)
vedere rosso = to be angry (literally to “see red”)
vedere tutto rosso = to be furious

andare in bianco = to fail, to be turned down (in a relationship)
(in) bianco e nero = clearly one thing or another, like the English saying, “black and white”
fare nero il bianco e bianco il nero = to represent something falsely
non distinguere il bianco dal nero = can’t tell white from black (English black from white)
notte in bianco = sleeplessness night
mangiare in bianco = to eat bland food
pasta in bianco = plain pasta, with only butter or oil
pesce in bianco = steamed fish
prove in bianco = dry runs (without practicing)

*A note about the Italian adjectives rosa and rossa.

The Italian word rosa is used as both an adjective and a noun. When used as an adjective, rosa means pink, and the ending is invariable, as noted above.

When used as a noun, rosa means “the rose plant” or “the rose flower.” In this case, the ending will change. One rose flower is “una rosa” but two (or more) roses are “due rose.”

Also, notice that the Italian adjective for red, when used with the singular, feminine ending, is rossa, which is very similar to the Italian adjective for pink, which is rosa. Remember that this distinction comes across in spoken Italian as well as in written Italian. Italian nouns with a double consonant are pronounced differently from nouns with a single consonant and have different meanings as well. Double consonants are emphasized in Italian, almost as if there were an accent above the letters. Therefore, the “double s” in rossa is emphasized when speaking. The different pronunciation between rossa and rosa serves to distinguish the adjective that means red from the noun that means rose.

Given the fact that rose flowers are most often pink or red in color, the similarity of the Italian adjectives rosa and rossa and the Italian noun rosa gives rise to many phrases that are a bit of a tongue-twister for the Italian student! Roses come up often in Italian conversation as they are often used to express feelings of close friendship or romantic love. Try out the examples below so you are able to describe these beautiful flowers if you should receive them from someone special!

rosa rosa = rose flower (pink)
rose rosa = rose flowers (pink)

rosa rossa = rose flower (red)
rose rosse = rose flowers (red)

*******************************************

Color is used to describe so many places and things… Let’s use our original four examples and add a sentence using one of the colors in Italian to build a story around each character we have created. The nouns and their adjectives with the matching or invariable endings are underlined. How many more sentences using color can you think of? Create your own short sentences and practice changing the endings of each color when required!

Paolo è il mio amico europeo. A lui piacciono i vestiti neri e di moda.
Paul is my European friend. He favors black clothing that is designer-made.

Ti presento Caterina, mia cugina americana. Lei è venuta a trovarmi in una macchina rossa!
Let me introduce you to Kathryn, my American cousin. She came to visit me in a red car!

Anna è una ragazza europea; viene dalla Francia. Abita in campagna e dalla sua casa e d’estate può vedere i fiori gialli, viola, e lilla.

Ann is a European girl; she is from France. She lives in the country, and in the summer from her house she can see yellow, violet, and light purple flowers.

Mia mamma è una donna italiana; e quindi lei cucina cibo delizioso ogni sera. Stasera mangiamo un arrosto e verdure verdi del giardino.

My mother is an Italian woman; and therefore she cooks delicious food every night. Tonight we will eat a roast with green vegetables from the garden.

Mio nonno Carmelo è un uomo italiano ma gli piace molto la sua casa in America. Lui ha dipinto la sua casa blu, come il mare italiano.

My grandfather Carl is an Italian man but he really likes his house in America. He painted his house blue, like the sea around Italy.

*******************************************

Italian Adjectives Before the Noun
Buono, Bello and Personal Characteristics

In the first two sections of this blog, we discussed how adjectives of nationality and color commonly follow the nouns they modify. Most other Italian adjectives will follow the noun as well. Did you notice the phrase “cibo delizioso” in one of our examples from the last section? The adjective delizioso follows the noun cibo in this example!

However, many Italian adjectives are commonly placed before Italian nouns.

Adjectives of size, personality characteristics
(good/bad, young/old, pretty/ugly), and terms of endearment
usually precede the noun.

Buono and bello are adjectives that mean “good” and “beautiful/nice” and can be placed either before or after a noun. These adjectives were discussed in a previous blog. If you need a refresher, visit: Bello means it’s nice! and Buono means it’s good!

See the table below for a summary of the most important Italian adjectives that commonly precede nouns, with their definitions and their endings for gender and number agreement.

Italian Adjectives that Commonly Precede Nouns

	Definition	Singular Forms	Plural Forms
grande	big, large	grande	grandi
piccolo	small	piccolo/piccola	piccoli/piccole
stesso	same	stesso/stessa	stessi/stesse

buono*	good (behavior)	buon/buono/buona/buon’	buoni/buone
bravo	good (talented)	bravo/brava	bravi/brave
cattivo	bad, mean	cattivo/cattiva	cattivi/cattive

giovane	young	giovane	giovani
anziano	elderly	anziano/anziana	anziani/anziane

nuovo	new	nuovo/nuova	nuovi/nuove
vecchio	old	vecchio/vecchia	vecchi/vecchie

caro	dear/expensive	caro/cara	cari/care
vero	true	vero/vera	veri/vere

bello*	beautiful, handsome	bel/bello/bella/bell’	bei/begli/belle
brutto	ugly	brutto/brutta	brutti/brutte

*Remember that the endings for buono and bello when placed after the noun will follow the usual rules for gender and number endings: (singular: o,a) (plural: i,e)!

How can we use this list of adjectives that commonly precede nouns? Well, in some cases placing an adjective before a noun — for instance when describing a person — lends a poetic meaning to the phrase or implies a special feeling for the person. On the other hand, placing that same adjective after the same noun, whether a person or thing, renders a literal meaning.

In the case of vecchio, for instance, “un amico vecchio” is a friend who is old in years, while “un vecchio amico” refers to “an old friend,” or someone who has been one’s friend for a long time.* It is understood that this “old friend” has been a good friend to the speaker and is someone to whom the speaker feels a genuine warmth and attachment.

You will no doubt recognize our old friends buono and bello in this list! In the examples below, notice the change in meaning with a change in the placement of buono and bello as well. And remember that when using the verb essere as a linking verb, the subject and adjective that follows essere must have endings that agree; the subject and its descriptor are one and the same!

un amico vecchio a friend who is old

un vecchio amico a long-time friend

un pilota buono a pilot who is good

un buon pilota a good (skilled) pilot

un uomo cattivo a man who is bad (not helpful/not nice)

un cattivo uomo a mean man

una macchina nuova a (brand) new car

una nuova macchina a different car

Michele è diventato grande. Michael has grown up. (lit. become big)

Pietro è un grande uomo. Peter is a great man.

*To describe a person it is more polite to use anziano (elderly) after the noun, rather than vecchio, since vecchio carries a negative connotation. One who ages well is anziano or anziana!

*********************

Let’s take our original 4 example sentences, and add an additional descriptive sentence for each, using one of the adjectives in the list above. In so doing, we will create a short vignette about each character. Notice how the additional information provided by adjectives bring us closer to understanding the person and the situation we’ve created.

Once again, the English translations will not correspond “word for word” to the Italian, given that adjective placement and description is often different for each language. Use these lines as a starting point and create a longer story about each character in Italian if you want!

Paolo è il mio vecchio amico europeo. A lui piacciono i vestiti neri e di moda. Lui è un buon pilota e viaggia intorno al mondo.
Paul is my long-time European friend. He favors black clothing that is designer-made. He is a skilled pilot and travels all around the world.

Ti presento Caterina, mia cugina americana. Lei è venuta a trovarmi in una macchina rossa nuova!
Il suo papà ha comprato la macchina per lei perché è una brava studentessa.
Let me introduce you to Kathryn, my American cousin. She came to visit me in a brand-new red car!
Her father bought the car for her because she is a talented student (does very well at school).

Anna è una ragazza europea; viene dalla Francia. Abita in campagna e dalla sua casa e d’estate può vedere i fiori gialli, viola, e lilla. Anna è diventata grande in campagna e spera di sposarsi e fare crescere i figli là.
Ann is a European girl; she is from France. She lives in the country, and in the summer from her house she can see yellow, violet, and light purple flowers. She has grown up in the country and hopes to marry and raise children there.

Mia mamma è una donna italiana; e quindi lei cucina cibo delizioso ogni sera. Stasera mangiamo un arrosto e verdure verdi del giardino. La sua amica anziana ha ottanta anni e viene a cena con noi ogni tanto.
My mother is an Italian woman; and therefore she cooks delicious food every night. Tonight we will eat a roast with green vegetables from the garden. Her 80 year-old elderly friend comes to dinner with us every now and then.

Mio nonno Carmelo è un uomo italiano ma gli piace molto la sua casa in America. Lui ha dipinto la sua casa blu, come il mare italiano. Secondo me, lui è un grand’ uomo.
My grandfather Carl is an Italian man but he really likes his house in America. He painted his house blue, like the sea around Italy. According to me, he is a great man.

Remember how to use Italian adjectives
and I guarantee you will be able to create
colorful Italian phrases every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® When to Use “In” and “Nel” for Italian Regions and the United States

April 5, 2023July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to introduce an object, or to describe direction, location or time. We do this naturally in our own language with prepositions — short words like of, to, at/in/from, and by. All languages use prepositions but the choice of preposition in a given situation will differ from one language to another. This is the case for English and Italian; English and Italian often use prepositions in a different way. Also, in some situations Italian sentence structure may require a preposition when English does not!

Let’s continue our series on Italian prepositions and learn how to use the Italian preposition “in” and when to combine in with the Italian definite article for “nel” or “nello” to describe a region in Italy or a state in the United States of America. For a small island or a group of small islands in both countries, the preposition “a” will be important.

As we’ve seen in our first blog on this topic, Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! Italian Preposition “A” or “In”? the Italian “a” can be translated as both “to” or “in” in English. The Italian “in” is translated the same as in English — “in”! If we learn how to use the Italian prepositions “a” and “in,” when describing an Italian region, a state in the United States, or an island, we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 66th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the prepositions “in” and “a”

to describe a region in Italy,
a state in the United States of America
or islands.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Use the Italian “in”
for Italian Regions

As mentioned in the introduction, both Italian prepositions “a” and “in” can be used to describe where someone is going, as well as their destination when they arrive. The Italian “a” can be translated as both “to” or “in” in English. The Italian “in” is translated the same as in English — “in”! In simple terms, Italian prepositions are linked to the place that they describe.

We’ve already learned the basics of how to use the Italian prepositions a and in in our first blog on this topic, Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! Italian Preposition “A” or “In”? The general rule, stated again, from our previous blog is:

In Italian the type of place is linked to the preposition used; there is no distinction made in Italian between traveling “to” a place or being “in” the place itself.

Italians travel directly into (in) a country, region, or large island,
but to (a) a city, town, or small island.

Following this rule, when Italians speak about their plan to visit a region, such as Tuscany, they would say, “Vado in…” For example, “Vado in Toscana,” or “Vado in Abruzzo.” The preposition in is used without a definite article (il, lo, l’, la…) prior to mentioning the region. Sicily and Sardinia are large islands, and also regions, so one would use the same rule and say, “Vado in Sicilia,” and “Vado in Sardegna.”

There are 20 regions in Italy, and each region has a capital city. Interestingly, although most of the self-governing regions on the Italian peninsula were officially united as the “Kingdom of Italy” in 1861, the Italy we know today that encompasses the entirety of the peninsula and the adjacent region to the north had not yet been established. Venice was not annexed from Austria until 1866. Rome, along with the Papal states, was the last city to join the union, only after the French occupation ended in 1870. Rome was quickly made the capital of Italy that same year.

The Italian Constitution was not written until the last century and dates back to 1948. The Italian regions have, of course, been a part of Italian culture for centuries but the regions as we know them today were only officially created until 1970. Changes to regional powers were made during the constitutional reform of Italy in 2001. Today, each region in Italy has a type of constitution for governing, called a “statute.” Fifteen of the 20 Italian regions have “ordinary statutes” and 5 have “special statutes” (with the islands Sicily and Sardinia included in the “special status” group). A region’s “special status” grants extended autonomy from Italian national rule. Each region has a capital city, and is further divided into provinces. Italian regions are each headed by a president and governed by a parliament, whose members are elected directly by the residents of the region.

The regions of Italy and their capital cities are listed below:

Italian Region	Capital City
Abruzzo	L’Aquila
Aosta Valley	Aosta
Basilicata	Potenza
Calabria	Catanzaro
Campania	Napoli
Emilia Romagna	Bologna
Friui Venezia Giulia	Trieste
Lazio	Roma
Liguria	Genova
Lombardia	Milano
Marche	Ancona
Molise	Campobasso
Piemonte	Torino
Puglia	Bari
Sardegna	Cagliari
Sicilia	Palermo
Trentino Alto Adige	Trento
Toscana	Firenze
Umbria	Perugia
Veneto	Venezia

Getting back to linguistics, the official rule that requires the Italian in to be used alone to preface an Italian region has only two exceptions. For instance, the preposition in is combined with the definite article le to make, “Vado nelle Marche.”

Could this linguistic exception have anything to do with the long history of Italian regional autonomy before the unification of Italy? According to Italyheritage.com, the name of the region of Marche, “comes from the establishment by the Franks of ‘Marche,’ that is Marquisdoms, such as Camerino, Fermo and Ancona.” In effect, then, the name of Marche itself was originally plural in Italian, creating a situation where the singular “in” would not be appropriate; instead, in proper Italian, there is the need to combine “in” with the definite article, as if to say, “in the kingdoms of.”

The region of Lazio provides a second exception. To speak about going to the region of Lazio, perhaps to describe a visit to its famous capital, Rome, one must combine the Italian in with the definite article il to create the sentence, “Vado nel Lazio.”

This use of the definite article to describe an important place has precedent; famous or important people are often spoken of including a definite article before their name. Could Lazio’s history as the home of the hills that comprise Rome and gave birth to the all-important Roman empire have to do with how Italians reference the region today? Or perhaps Lazio’s linguistic exception originated from the fact that Emperor Augustus reorganized the Roman Empire into regions and determined that Lazio and Campania together would be called “the Prima Regio.” Of course, this is speculation! But a story, whether verified or not, often helps us to remember the exception to a rule.

Interestingly, when speaking in generalities of the well-known divide of northern and southern Italy, one must use “nel.”

Vado nel Sud Italia. I go to Southern Italy. (in the south of Italy)
Vado nel Nord Italia. I go to Northern Italy. (in the North of Italy)

How to Use
the Italian “in” and “nel”
for the United States of America

As it can be imagined, when one must apply the Italian way of thinking to the “regions” of the United States of America, called “states,” variations abound to the general rule of using the Italian in to describe large territories. Of course, it would be a difficult (and boring) task to memorize all the prepositions for all 50 of the United States. But it is an interesting exercise to try to list each state and and attempt to discover the logic behind the linguistic differences. Of course, the important take-away from such an exercise for the Italian student is just to learn the correct way to refer to where you live or are planning to travel to… if you want to speak about these topics with your Italian friends!

We’ve already hinted at the variations to be encountered when talking in Italian about the states that comprise the United States of America.

From our last blog on this topic,

Let’s see how an Italian would answer the polite question, “Dove va per il suo viaggio?” “Where are you going on your trip?” The answer in Italian for someone taking a trip to America, depending on how specific they would like to be, is as follows: “Vado in America, in Illinois, e a Chicago.” “I am going to America, to Illinois, and to Chicago.” Notice that the English prepositions are the same, although the Italian prepositions change, depending on the size of the place that the preposition is linked to.

Also, what we call “states” in America are treated the same as “regions” in Italy when assigning a preposition in Italian. It would seem simple enough to use the Italian preposition in to describe an American state, given that most states in America are fairly large. Notice that “in Illinois” is given in the example above.

But… of course there are variations, and not all states in the United States take the Italian preposition in when speaking about them in Italian. There are enough differences in how an Italian would refer to a state in the United States, in fact, that this will be the subject of a future blog!

To follow is a full discussion about how to refer to all of the states in the United States of America and its territories in Italian

First, the general rule for states in the United States is slightly different than for regions in Italy, and is as given below:

For all the states in the United States, one may use “in” alone
or “in” combined with the Italian definite article.

The question then becomes: how do we choose between the Italian “in” alone or [“in + definite article”]? Technically, there is really no reason to choose if both are correct. And yet, if one searches Italian translation sites online, it becomes apparent that some states in the United States typically take “in” and others [“in” + definite article”]. Let’s go through the different United States to see their most common titles.

The Basics for the United States of America:

Use in for most states in the US.

Vado in Illinois
Vado in California.
Vado in Florida.
Vado in Connecticut.
Vado in Pennsylvania.
Vado in Virginia.
Vado in Carolina del Nord.
Vado in Carolina del Sud.
Vado in Georgia.

In some cases, Italians may use the preposition “a” when speaking about Rhode Island, perhaps because it is the smallest state in the union or because it is so small that they confuse it with a city. Or, maybe the reason for the confusion is because the name of the state includes the word “Island” and an Italian may not be familiar with the details of a map of the United States. If one queries an online translation service, the state of Rhode Island may appear to be a true exception to the rule of using “in,” since the preposition “a” appears before its name. In the case of online software, the confusion may arise because there are four cities in the United States named Rhode Island or, again, that the name includes the word “island.” This brings up the difficulty with translation software; often mistakes are made because the software does not understand the context of a phrase! For purposes of this blog, we will include Rhode Island in the section to follow that describes the use of “nel” for the original 13 colonies.
In some cases, combine in with the definite article for the state.

Some states have the same name as a city in that state. In this case, for clarity, it is best to use “in the state of” by combining [in + definite article lo]. Lo is needed, of course, when one applies the rule of [s + consonant] for Italian masculine nouns to the English word state. For District of Columbia, you are going in “the District of Columbia,” so [in+ definite article il] is used. (If you need a refresher on the rules governing definite articles and their combination with prepositions, see the reference book Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Grammar.“) Notice that the English translation uses “going to,” as one would say in a typical conversation, while the Italian uses the simple present tense. Remember that there is no “going to” to Italian; this same idea is expressed in Italian with the simple present tense!

In the two examples below, the translation in English reflects the typical American way of referring to New York state, New York City, Washington state, and Washington D.C. Although, of course, there are no hard-and-fast rules. If the speaker wants to emphasize that he or she is going to New York for a retreat in the country, the word “state” may be added as part of the place name. If, on the other hand, the speaker frequently visits or has a strong connection to New York City, he or she would probably only mention “New York” when in conversation with a friend.

The same applies to Washington and Washington D.C. Americans almost never use the official name, “District of Columbia” in conversation. Although, if mentioning the District of Columbia in Italian, one must include the Italian definite article. The Italian preposition in is combined with the definite article il to make nel. We will discuss this concept in more detail for the original colonies in the US in the next section.

Vado nello stato di New York.
I am going to New York (state).

Vado a New York. (New York City understood from preposition a)
I am going to New York City.

Vado nello stato di Washington.
I am going to Washington (state).

Vado a Washington. (Capitol of the US; District of Columbia)
I am going to Washington D. C.

Vado nel Distretto di Columbia.
I am going to Washington D.C.

As a corollary, to say you are from a state, or the city of the same name in that state, use vengo (to come) with [da + definite article]. For the city, simply use da (from).

Vengo dallo stato di New York.
I am from (come from) New York (state).

Vengo da New York.
I am from New York City.

Vengo dallo stato di Washington.
I am from (come from) Washington (state).

Vengo dal Washington. (Capitol of the US; District of Columbia)
I come from Washington D.C.

Vengo dal Distretto di Columbia.
I come from Washington D.C.

*************************************

When to use nel for states in the United States and the possible origins of this variation:

All of the current 50 states in the United States have a history of being a territory, initially of another country or later of the United States. For instance, some of the original 13 colonies (Delaware, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, and Rhode Island) commonly take the definite article along with the Italian in, possibly due to their political standing at the time their Italian name was assigned. Two northeastern states, Vermont and Maine, also take the definite article (Vermont was originally a colony and Maine was considered a district of Massachusetts). Finally, the definite article is still in use for the prior US territories of Wyoming and Utah.

The US states below were probably given original Italian names that included the idea of “in the commonwealth” of or “in the district of” with [in + definite article]. Although the states listed below are now full states, the [in + definite article] is still used in Italian. See below for the full list of states that still carry this designation.

Vado nel Delaware. (Originally ruled by the Dutch and Swedes and called “New Netherland,” then “New Sweden,” as the territory changed hands. Finally ruled as a British colony, with different portions governed by the colonies of New York and Pennsylvania and declared itself a separate state in 1776 as one of the original 13 colonies to revolt against British rule.

Vado nel Maine. (A district of the US state of Massachusetts from 10/23/1780 -3/13/1820)

Vado nel Maryland. (Originally a charter colony, with charter granted by King Charles I of England in 1632, as a haven for Catholics.)

Vado nel Massachusetts. (English settlers embarked from Holland in a boat called the Mayflower and landed on Cape Cod on November 21, 1620. The explorer John Smith had formerly named the area Plymouth. The settlement became known as “Plymouth Colony” or “The Old Colony.” The original Pilgrims were not granted a royal charter but instead governed according to “The Mayflower Compact,” which was signed by 41 men on the ship prior to arrival in the new world. In 1630, a separate colony of Puritans from England was established in the Boston area, governed by a charter from King Charles I and called “The Massachusetts Bay Colony.” The company charter was revoked in 1684, and replaced in 1691 by a British royal colony under the name “Massachusetts.” At that time, Massachusetts included the original two former colonies of Plymouth, along with Maine and the islands of Nantucket and Martha’s Vineyard.

Vado nel New Hampshire. (Province of New Hampshire est. 1629, named after the English County of Hampshire)

Vado nel New Jersey. (British colony named in 1664 after the island of Jersey on the English Channel)

Vado nel Rhode Island. (Self-governing colony called Providence Plantations founded by the Puritan Roger Williams (from the Massachusetts Bay Colony) in 1636 on land deeded to him from the Narragansett Indian chief Canonicus. Additional settlements in the area and the original settlement were granted a Royal Charter from Great Britain in 1663 and again in 1688. Rhode Island declared independence as one of the original 13 colonies in 1776.)

Vado nello Utah. (US Territory and then a state)

Vado nel Vermont. (Known as “The Vermont Republic,” Vermont was an independently functioning state when it declared its independence from the British colonies of Quebec, New Hampshire and New York, from 1/15/1777 to 3/4/1791, after which it was accepted into the newly established US as the 14h state.)

Vado nel Wyoming. (US Territory and then a state)

***********************************************

How to Use
the Italian “a”
for the Islands of United States of America

Use a for the small, individual islands that are a part of the United states, and alle or all’ when referring to a group of islands. Alle is short for “Alle isole di…” Drop the “e” at the end of “alle” if a vowel follows.

Vado a Long Island, New York.
Vado a Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts.
Vado a Mackinac Island, Michigan.

Vado a Puerto Rico. (Unincorporated Territory of the US)
Vado a Guam. (Unincorporated Territory of the US)
Vado a Wake Island, Howland Island, Baker Island (Unorganized and Unincorporated Territories of the US)

Vado alle (isole di) Hawaii. (all the islands that make up the archipelago of Hawaii)
Vado all’isola di Hawaii. (the largest island of Hawaii; the “Big Island” of Hawaii)
Vado a Maui, Oahu, Kauai, Molokai.

Vado alle (isole di) Florida Keys.
Vado a Key West.

Vado alle Isole Vergini. (Unincorporated Territory of the US)
Vado all’Atol di Midway. (Unincorporated Territory of the US)

Finally, when speaking in generalities of the well-known divide of north, south, and Midwest in the United States, one must use “nel.”

Vado nel sud-est (degli Stati Uniti).	I am going to the Southeast of the United States.
Vado nel nord-est.	I am going to the Northeast.
Vado nel midwest.	I am going to the Midwest.
Vado nel sud-ovest.	I am going to the Southwest.
Vado nel nord-ovest.	I am going to the Northwest.

Remember when to use the Italian prepositions
“in” and “nel” or “a”
to describe locations in Italy and the US
and I guarantee you will use these Italian phrases every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Italian Travelers – Use “Vorrei” to say, “I would like…”

March 1, 2023February 14, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Have you been trying to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

Many Italian verbs have a similar meaning to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. This blog will focus on the Italian verb volere, which means “to want” or “to desire.” Volere is used to make a request so others know what we need and therefore it is especially useful to know when traveling in Italy.

For instance, different present tense forms of volere can be used to express a wish or an intention. Volere can be used alone in the first conjugation in the singular and plural tenses to say, “Voglio…” or “Vogliamo…” which mean, “I want…” or “We want…” When traveling, it is also helpful to remember the first person conditional tense of volere in the singular and plural as a polite way to relay desires to hotel staff, waiters and taxi drivers. “Vorrei…” or “Vorremmo…” mean, “I would like…” and “We would like…” Italian travelers — just remember how to use the conditional tense of volere and you can ask politely for whatever you need while in Italy!

With the simple examples above, one can easily imagine how the conditional conjugation of volere, and especially the verb vorrei, is essential knowledge for one traveling in Italy. Read on for a simple method that will ensure the Italian traveler who “wants to” create a polite sentence in Italian knows how to describe their “desire” using the verbs vorrei and vorremmo.

This method is an integral part of our Conversational Italian for Travelers series of books. After reading this blog, try our pocket travel book, “Just the Important Phrases,” which summarizes this method and provides essential Italian phrases using vorrei and vorremmo. Many of these phrases have been reprinted here. Use this method to create your own phrases in Italian!

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” with the Italian verb volere, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language and ask for whatever we need politely!

This post is the 65th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the conditional forms of
Volere,

Vorrei and Vorremmo

in order to describe politely
what one needs.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

The Italian Verb Volere

Volere means “to want” or “to desire,” and is classified as a modal, or helping verb. This means that volere provides information about one’s wish or intention to complete the main action described in a sentence. When used in this way, volere is conjugated to reflect the speaker and the action verb follows directly after in its infinitive form — that is, the action verb is not conjugated! (Remember that Italian verbs are categorized into three infinitive forms by the following endings: -are, -ere, and -ire, and that English infinitive verbs are preceded by “to,” as in, “to go” “to stay,” etc.)

One can imagine the infinite number of uses for the helping verb volere. This blog will focus the use of volere in the conditional tense as a verb of politeness, with emphasis on how to use the first person singular, io (I) ,and first person plural, noi (we), conjugations, which are vorrei and vorremmo. Vorrei translates as “I would like” and vorremmo as “we would like.” Of course, polite communication is essential to show respect for others in any language and it is especially important when traveling in Italy to make a good impression, or fare una bella figura!

One simple way to use volere while traveling in Italy is to connect the conditional first person singular and plural forms of volere, which are “vorrei” and “vorremmo,” with an action verb in the infinitive.

This will enable travelers to ask for whatever they need with the polite phrases, “I would like…” and “We would like…”

The beauty of this method, which uses [vorrei/vorremmo + infinitive verb] is that it is easy to describe an action you wish for without conjugating.

If you want something — such as food or drink at an Italian cafe, or to buy an article of clothing or souvenir at a stylish Italian shop, just follow vorrei or vorremmo with a definite article and the noun for the object you desire.

The traveler only needs to remember the helping verbs vorrei and vorremmo and the meaning of the action verb or the noun that is the object of their desire.
There is essentially no need to conjugate using this method!

In the following sections, we will discuss how Italian travelers can purchase tickets at the train station, make reservations at a hotel, speak to an associate over the phone, or order at a restaurant simply by using [vorrei + infinitive verb or noun]. We will also discuss how to use the first person plural conditional vorremmo when making requests at a restaurant for the entire table.

Vorrei is an important verb of politeness to remember when asking for what you need at a friend’s house as well.

Finally, if you do not want to do something, simply place the Italian adverb non before the verb voglio, which is the present tense conjugation of volere, in order to make your wish known in the strongest manner possible.

Of course, the phrases given in the example sections can be extrapolated to include many different situations!

How to Conjugate Volere

Volere is an irregular -ere verb in the present tense. As noted in the first section, this verb is essential to commit to memory!

In general, people tend to express their own desires (I want…) or the needs of a group (we want…) if traveling with family or a group or friends. The complete present tense conjugation of volere is below, with the commonly used conjugations printed in green: io (I) and noi (we).

io	voglio
tu	vuoi
Lei/lei/lui	vuole
noi	vogliamo
voi	volete
loro	vogliono

The conditional form of volere is especially important for travelers to remember, as it is considered more polite in Italy to use vorrei, which means “I would like…” rather than the more demanding voglio, for “I want…” In general, politeness is appreciated by the people in a host country and usually returned with the same.

The Italian conditional tense is often taught at the intermediate or advanced level, along with the construction of compound sentences that use the subjunctive mood. However, for the traveler, it is not necessary to understand all the complexities of how to use volere in the conditional tense. Instead, just remember the conjugated forms in green given below to ask politely for what you or your family and friends need. Follow the conjugated verb in the conditional tense with an infinitive verb or the item you desire.

The complete present tense conjugation of volere is below, with the important conjugations of politeness that are the focus of this blog in green: io (I) and noi (we).

io	vorrei
tu	vorresti
Lei/lei/lui	vorrebbe
noi	vorremmo
voi	vorreste
loro	vorrebbero

Knowing how to conjugate volere is only the first step needed to express what we need. After “I want,” we often must add another verb to express what we want to do — to go, to return, to buy, etc. Here is how this is done:

First conjugate the verb volere into voglio or vorrei. Then simply add the infinitive form of an action verb directly after the conjugated form of volere. This is the same as we would do in English! The verb volere is known as a helping verb for the way that it modifies, or adds to, the meaning of the main verb in the sentence.

Notice that the subject pronoun io is not included in the Italian example sentences below that use volere, since subject pronouns are almost always left out of Italian sentences. For this reason, “I” is given in parenthesis in the English translation.

Voglio andare in Italia.	(I) want to go to Italy.
Voglio tornare lunedì.	(I) want to return Monday.
Vorrei comprare un biglietto.	(I) would like to buy a ticket.

Vorrei — I Would Like!

1. Use voglio or vorrei at the train station to purchase a ticket.

Use either voglio or vorrei when speaking with the attendant at the train station to purchase a ticket.
Although one could use voglio for “I want,” as noted in the earlier sections of this blog, when making a request, it is considered more polite to use vorrei instead, which means, “I would like.”
Notice in the examples below that Italians say they want a ticket for a certain place, with the word per, rather than the more usual English to.
The Italian verb desiderare (to want /to desire/to crave) can be used as an alternative to the verb volere. Desiderare is commonly used by clerks or shopkeepers as a polite way to ask what the client wants with the question, “Desidera?” Desiderare and can also be used to reply, “Desidero…” “I want/desire…”
The last example uses the pronominal verb volerci to ask, “how much time” is available to make the connection between trains. If you need a refresher on how to use volerci, visit our blog, For Italians: How Much Time Will it Take?
Of course, one does not have to purchase a train ticket in person now-a-days. It is also possible to purchase tickets for the national train system, Trenitalia, from the automatic ticket dispensing machines found at most stations. Tickets can also be purchased online by using the Trenitalia website. For the fastest, most luxurious way to make a connection between the major Italian cities, look under the tab Le Frecce on the Trenitalia website for the high speed trains Frecciarossa, Frecciargento, and Frecciabianca. Chapters 4 and 5 in the textbook Conversational Italian for Travelers, with, “All the Italian you need to know to enjoy your trip to Italy,” are devoted to Italian train travel, with cultural notes about the Italian train system and important phrases to know when taking a train in Italy.

Desidera? Desidero un biglietto per Milano.	What do you want/need? (polite) I want a ticket for Milan.
Vorrei un biglietto per Milano.	I would like a ticket for Milan.
Vorrei un biglietto di andata e ritorno.	I would like a round trip ticket. (lit. a ticket of going and returning)

Vorrei il diretto.	I would like a direct train (non-stop train).
Voglio prendere il treno diretto.	I want to take the direct train (non-stop train).
Voglio prendere il treno diretto per Milano.	I want to take the direct train for Milan.
Devo pagare il supplemento?	Must (I) pay an extra fee (for fast trains)?
Vorrei il locale.	I would like the local (many stops on the route).

Cambio/Cambi treno a…	I/You change train(s) at…
Non vorrei cambiare treno.	I don’t want to change train(s).
Devo cambiare treno?	Must I change trains?
Quanto ci vuole per la coincidenza?	How much time is needed for the connection?

2. Use vorrei when making reservations at a hotel or restaurant

Combine vorrei with various Italian infinitive verbs to make, cancel, change, check, or confirm a reservation. One can also call room service to order breakfast or dinner.
Desidero is also appropriate to use in these situations.

Vorrei/Desidero…	I would like/I want to…
…fare una prenotazione.	…make a reservation.
…annullare una prenotazione.	…cancel a reservation.
…cambiare una prenotazione.	…change a reservation.
…controllare una prenotazione.	…check a reservation.
…confermare una prenotazione.	…confirm a reservation.
…ordinare il servizio in camera. …ordinare la prima colazione. …ordinare la cena.	…order room service. …order breakfast. …ordinare dinner.

3. Use vorrei as a polite way to ask to speak with a business associate during a telephone conversation.

A typical business telephone conversation using the Italian polite (pol.) Lei conjugation might go something like this:

Pronto. Sono il signor Rossi.	Ready (for hello). I am Mr. Rossi.
Vorrei parlare con la signora Manzini.	I would like to speak with Mrs. Manzini.
Mi può passare il direttore, per piacere?	Can you put me through to (give me) the director? (pol.)
Me lo/la può passare?	Can you put him/her through to me? (pol.)

4. Use vorrei as a polite way to leave a message on a voicemail.

A typical formal voicemail might go something like this:

Sono la signora Manzini.	I am Mrs. Manzini.
Vorrei parlare di…	I would like to talk about…
Oggi è lunedì tre agosto, alle dieci.	Today is Monday, August third, at ten o’clock.
Il mio numero di telefono è…	My telephone number is…

5. Use vorrei to order at a restaurant

When ordering a meal at a restaurant, the io (I) and noi (we) forms of the verb volere are both used frequently, since requests are usually made for oneself or for the entire table.
To order your own dish, use vorrei for “I would like…”
To order food or drink to be shared by all seated at the table, such as bread, a bottle of water, or a bottle of wine, use vorremmo for “We would like…”
There is usually a small charge for the bread served with a meal in Italy, called the “pane e coperto” (bread and cover charge), and an additional charge if more bread is ordered. This charge is usually posted by the cash register or listed in the menu.
When ordering water, it is necessary to specify if you would like still or sparkling water. Also, it should be noted that one does not usually find ice in the cold drinks served in Italy; either because the restaurant does not have space for an ice machine or more simply because Italians often believe that very cold drinks are not good for one’s health!
By convention, Italians say they would like “some wine” rather than just “wine” or “the wine.” To make the Italian adjective that corresponds to the English “some,” the Italian preposition di must be combined with the definite article for the noun that follows. So for “some wine” combine [di + il] to make “del vino.” (The full explanation of this rule can be found in the Conversational Italian for Travelers text book and Just the Grammar books.)
Italian menus are arranged in the order that each course is served. Selections start with the appetizer course (l’antipasto) and progresses to the first course (il primo), second course (il secondo), and dessert (la dolce). Don’t forget to look under the list for i contorni (side dishes) if you would like to order a vegetable with your main course. Vegetables are generally served separate from, but along with, the second course!

Below is an example of a how to order for a formal dinner at an Italian restaurant. You will find an entire section on the delicious Italian food and unique drinks that can be ordered in Italy in the Conversational Italian for Travelers pocket book “Just the Important Phrases.” Carry this small, lightweight book with you into an Italian restaurant to read short descriptions about the various types of pasta, main courses, and desserts to discover in Italy!

Che cosa ha scelto/avete scelto?	What have you/you all chosen?
Vorrei…	I would like…
…per antipasto, l’insalata mista.	…for the antipasto, mixed salad.
…per primo, le tagliatelle alla bolognese.	…for the first course, tagliatelle pasta with Bolognese meat sauce.
…per secondo, l’osso bucco.	…for the second course, braised veal shank.
…per dolce, solamente frutta.	…for dessert, only fruit.
Vorremmo una bottiglia d’acqua naturale. Vorremmo una bottiglia d’acqua gassata. Vorremmo una bottiglia d’acqua minerale.	We would like a bottle of still water. We would like a bottle of sparkling water. We would like a bottle of mineral water.
Vorremmo una bottiglia del vino della casa. Vorremmo del vino rosso. Vorremmo del vino bianco.	We would like a bottle of the house wine. We would like (some) red wine. We would like (some) white wine.

6. Use vorrei at breakfast after staying overnight as a guest in another’s home.

Even in someone’s home, vorrei is always a good verb to remember in order to be polite to describe what you would like.
The present tense “familiar you” of volere, which is vuoi, is used in the example conversation below to ask a house guest what they need. In a hotel, it is more likely that the “polite you” form, vuole, would be used. Of course, at a hotel one is also likely to hear a simple, “Desidera?” which is the “polite you” form of desiderare.
Finally, a colloquial way to ask if a guest needs something uses the Italian verb servire, with the phrase, “Ti serve (qualcosa)? for “Do you need (something)?” Replace “something” with the Italian definite article and its noun for an essential item, such as a plate, cup, or spoon necessary for enjoying a meal. For example. “Ti serve un cucchiaino per il caffé?” means, “Do you need a teaspoon for the coffee?” If you need a refresher on how the Italian verb servire works, visit our blog in this series entitled, How to Say “I need…” with “Ho bisogno di” “Mi serve” and “Averne voglia.”

A typical morning conversation might go something like this:

Buon giorno. Hai dormito bene?	Good morning. (Did) you sleep well? (lit. Have you slept well?)

Si, molto bene, grazie.	Yes, very well, thank you.
Si, ho dormito molto bene, grazie.	Yes, (I) slept very well, thank you.
Vuoi un caffè?	(Do) (you) want a (cup of ) coffee?
Si, vorrei un caffé.	Yes, (I) would like a coffee.
Si, vorrei una tazza di caffè.	Yes, (I) would like a cup of coffee.
Si, vorrei del caffè.	Yes, (I) would like some coffee.
Vuoi del tè?	(Do) (you) want some tea?
Si, vorrei un tè.	Yes, (I) would like a (cup of) tea.
No, vorrei un bicchiere di…	No, (I) would like a glass of...
…acqua.	…water.
…succo d’arancia.	…orange juice.
Vorrei un biscotto.	(I)would like a cookie. (usually with coffee)
Vorrei dei biscotti.	(I) would like some cookies. (usually with coffee)

7. Many common expressions use vorrei as a polite way to make a request.

Vogliamo sederci?	Shall we sit down?
Non vuole accomodarsi?	Won’t you make yourself comfortable/sit down?
Vuoi chiudere la porta?	Would you mind closing the door?
Prendi quello che vuoi.	Help yourself./Take as much (of it) as you like.
Ne vuoi ancora?	Would you like some more (of it)?

8. Use non voglio to express what you don’t want to do.

Use voglio with the Italian negative non to express what you don’t want to do. “Non voglio…” means, “I don’t want…” Follow non voglio with the infinitive verb for what you don’t want to do or the definite article and noun for something you don’t want. Follow the infinitive verb with the Italian prepositions “a” or “di” that typically follow certain verbs. (For a list of these verbs, visit previous blogs in this series: How to Use the Preposition ‘Di’ in Italian and Italian Preposition “A” or “In”?
One could also use the less forceful non vorrei for “I would not like…”
Of course, there are many situations in which one may want to say, “I don’t want to…” How many more can you think of?

Non volgio andare a scuola.	(I) don’t want to go to school.
Non voglio venire a casa presto.	(I) don’t want to come home early.
Non voglio uscire stasera.	(I) don’t want to go out tonight.
Non voglio uscire per cena stasera.	(I) don’t want to go out for dinner tonight.
Non voglio uscire con Francesca.	(I) don’t want to go out with Francesca.

Remember how to use
the Italian verb vorrei and I guarantee
you can ask politely for what you need every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Famous Love Poems in Italian for Valentines Day

January 31, 2023July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 3 Comments

Have you been trying to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to express feelings. And what feeling could be more profound and important than romantic love? The love that we feel for that “special someone” in our lives or for someone we hope to play a major part in our life? Sooner or later, we are all touched by that romantic feeling called “love.” But, when we have fallen in love, or as the Italians would say, ci siamo innamorati, it may not come naturally to express this love, even in our native language.

Over the centuries, writers have pondered the question, “Che cos’è l’amore?” “What is love?” And while exploring this theme, poets have not only given expression to their own feelings of love, but have enabled others communicate eloquently about love as well. Let’s take a brief survey of famous love poems, or poesie d’amore and create Italian phrases for our own true loves on Valentine’s Day!

This post is the 64nd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
about love are from well known
love poems.
Check them out in Italian for
Valentines Day.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Over the centuries, writers have pondered the question, “Che cos’è l’amore?” “What is love?” And since the Italian poet Petrarch expressed his great love for Laura in the 14th century, love poems have often taken the form of he used — the sonetto, or sonnet. These “little songs” are 14 lines long and follow a specific rhythm and rhyme scheme. When Shakespeare took up the sonnet in the 16th Century, he changed Petrarch’s form and made it his own; Shakespeare used the sonnet to write some of the most famous lines about love in existence today. Shakespeare’s contemporaries and many poets who have followed still write about love using the sonnet form, and those lines that ring true have been translated into many languages.

Let’s take a brief survey of famous poesie d’amore
and create Italian phrases for our own true loves on Valentine’s Day!

William Shakespeare
Sonnet 116

William Shakespeare is a well-known playwright who lived from 1564-1616. His sonnets were his last non-dramatic work to be published in complete form in the early 1600s. Since that time, Shakespeare’s sonnets, and in particular his Sonnet 116, have become well-known meditations on the meaning of true love. For Shakespeare, true love is the love between “true minds,” that will not be altered by any circumstance. In the first lines he states, “Love is not love/Which alters when it alteration finds/Or bends with the remover to remove.”

Take a few lines from Shakespeare’s examples of the steadfastness of true love, here translated into Italian, to tell your true love that you will always be there for them. Note: The last line, “ma sarà per sempre” has been substituted for Shakespeare’s final, more dramatic line, “But bears it out even to the edge of doom.”

Il mio amore per te…
è come un faro sempre fisso, che non vacilla mai.

non è soggetto al Tempo,
non cambia in poche ore o settimane
ma sarà per sempre.

My love for you…
is like a beacon, always fixed, that never falters.

is not subject to Time,
will not change in a few hours or weeks,
but will be forever.

********************

Pablo Neruda
One Hundred Love Sonnets: 17

Pablo Neruda was a Chilean poet and diplomat (1094-1973) and is famous in Italy and around the world for his poems about love. Sonnet XVII is one of the most famous of his One Hundred Love Sonnets, and is known by it’s first line, “I don’t love you as if you were rose salt or topaz…” In this poem, Neruda says most elegantly that love for another cannot be defined or explained but only exist.

Below are a few lines taken from this Sonnet, translated from Spanish into Italian and English. Anyone to whom these lines are spoken is sure to fall in love!

T’amo senza sapere come, né quando, né da dove,
T’amo simplicemente senza problemi né orgoglio:
Così ti amo perché non so amare diversamente.

I love you, without knowing how, nor when, nor from where,
I love you simply, without problems or pride.
I love you so because I don’t know how to love any other way.

********************

e. e. cummings
i carry your heart with me(i carry it in)

The American poet, author and playwright Edward Estlin Cummings published works under the pen name e. e. cummings and lived from 1984-1962. He wrote more than 2,500 poems. He favored the use of lower-case letters in his poetry and stretched the bounds of traditional poetic forms.

Cummings’ line, “I carry your heart with me,” translated into Italian as, “Porto il tuo cuore con me,” and is a lovely romantic reference from the first line of his poem. Notice the unusual use of capitalization and punctuation that cummings is known for in this poem, which seems to make one thought rush directly into the next.

i carry your heart with me(i carry it in

my heart)i am never without it(anywhere

i go you go, my dear;and whatever is done

by only me is your doing, my darling)

i fear

no fate(for you are my fate, my sweet)…

********************

Elizabeth Barrett Browning
How Do I Love Thee? (Sonnet 43)

Most everyone knows the first lines to this sonnet, one of the 44 poems of Sonnets from the Portuguese written by Elizabeth Barrett Browning (1806-1861). In the first line, Barrett-Browning asks, “How do I love thee? Let me count the ways.” Then she continues to answer the question by expressing her devotion to the love of her life as the poem continues.

Sonnet 43 is a tribute to Elizabeth Barrett’s future husband, who she loves so deeply that it “consumes (her) soul and permeates every moment of every day.” The last two lines, which talk about how her love fulfills her “most quiet need,” are lovely enough to be translated into Italian for anyone who is in love today.

Ti amo fino al punto del bisogno di ogni giorno più tranquill,
al sole e alla luce della candela.

I love thee to the level of every day’s
Most quiet need, by sun and candle-light.

********************

John Keats
I Cannot Exist Without You

Perhaps the ode to love that best expresses the Italian sensibility was written by the Romantic poet John Keats (1795-1821) in a letter to Fanny Brawne in 1918.* The second line of this poetic exhortation is, “Non posso esistere senza di te,” translated literally as, “I cannot exist without you.” In recent time, this phrase has become part of the refrain for many Italian songs as, “Non posso vivere senza di te,” or “I cannot live without you.” The idea of two lives so intertwined that one person cannot live without the other is a common theme in Italian culture, and maybe that is why these lines translate so easily into Italian.

There are so many lines to choose from in this poem, I have reprinted most of what Keats wrote to his dear love, with the Italian translation for several lines that can be used to express one’s true love on Valentine’s Day.

My love has made me selfish. I cannot exist without you – I am forgetful of every thing but seeing you again – my Life seems to stop there – I see no further. You have absorb’d me. I have a sensation at the present moment as though I was dissolving – I should be exquisitely miserable without the hope of soon seeing you. I should be afraid to separate myself far from you. My sweet Fanny, will your heart never change? My love, will it? I have no limit now to my love –…
My Love is selfish – I cannot breathe without you. – John Keats *

Non posso esistere senza di te.
I cannot exist without you

Non posso vivere senza di te.
I cannot live without you

Ora non ho limiti al mio amore.
I have no limit now to my love.

Non posso respirare senza di te.
I can’t breathe without you.

*Hanson, Marilee. “John Keats Love Letter To Fanny Brawne – 13 October 1819” https://englishhistory.net/keats/letters/love-letter-to-fanny-brawne-13-october-1819/, February 4, 2015.

********************

Buon San Valentino!

Remember a few phrases of love
in Italian from the great poets
for your true love on Valentine’s Day!

********************

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to Make Comparisons in Italian with “Come” and “Tanto…Quanto”

January 1, 2023July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2023?

Why not set a goal to learn Italian, starting today, for the year 2023? I will try to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to make comparisons. Every day, we all compare the characteristics of one person, place or thing to another — and many times these characteristics are similar or the same. The Italian language uses precise sentence structures and specific adverbs when making equivalent comparisons, similar to what is done in English.

In a prior blog in this series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! – How to Make Comparisons in Italian with “Di,” we learned how to make comparisons between two nouns when one thing is liked more or is better or worse than the other. In this blog, we will discuss how to make comparisons nouns with equivalent characteristics. For instance, in Italy there are so many places are beautiful, one may be as beautiful as another! Or one place in Italy may have as many important sites of interest as another. In these cases, to make a comparison we must use the Italian adverbs come and tanto/quanto in the correct sequence to relay the meanings “as,” “as well as,” and “as much as.”

Let’s continue to learn how to make comparisons in Italian using the Italian adverbs come, tanto/quanto to learn how to express ourlseves like a native Italian!

This post is the 63rd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the adverbs
come
and
tanto… quanto
to make comparisons

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar*

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*The material in this blog has been adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and the reference book “Just the Grammar.”

****************************************

Use “Come” and “Quanto”
to Compare Italian Nouns

Every day, we all compare the characteristics of one person, place or thing to another — and many times these characteristics are similar or the same. For instance, there are so many places in Italy that are beautiful, and one may be as beautiful as another! Or one place in Italy may have as many important sites of interest as another. In these cases, to make a comparison we must use the Italian adverbs come and tanto…quanto to relay the meanings “as,” “as well as,” and “as much as.”

When comparing two different nouns — people, places, or things — using the same adjective or adverb, the effect will be a statement that their description is equivalent. It is as if you are saying one person, place or thing is “just like” the other.

Use the following Italian adverbs in the table below when you want to make a comparative statement of equality:

Comparison of Two Nouns with Equivalent Descriptors

come così come	as, like, just like is as
tanto…. quanto	as…as, like, just like, as well as

It should be noted that the definitions of the adverb come encompass those of many English adverbs and adverbial phrases, such as: “as,” “same as,” “like,” or “just like.” In effect, then, the single adverb come can relay all of these meanings when comparing two nouns. The combination “così come” is used specifically to say someone or something “is as” expected. And remember that when così is used alone, without making a comparison between one noun and another, the meaning is “so.”

The alternate method of comparing two is nouns with equivalent adjectives is to use tanto…. quanto.

In the tables below, we start with an example that uses così to make a general statement. Then, examples of how to use the adverbs come and tanto… quanto as comparatives of equity are listed. Two examples using così come are also provided. Notice that the comparisons made are between nouns — two persons, places, or things.

Comparison of two persons with the same adjective (equivalent characteristics):

Francesca è così bella.	Frances is so beautiful.
Francesca è bella come Anna.	Frances is beautiful, (just) like Ann.
Francesca è tanto bella quanto Anna.	Frances is as beautiful as Ann.
Francesca è così come te l’ho descritta.	Frances is as I have described to you.

Marco è così intelligente.	Mark is so smart.
Marco è intelligente come Franco.	Mark is smart, (just) like Frank.
Marco è tanto intelligente quanto Franco.	Mark is as smart as Frank.
Marco è così come lo immaginavo.	Marco is as I had expected.

Comparison of two places with the same adjective (equivalent characteristics):

Milano è così rumorosa.	Milan is so noisy.
Milano è rumorosa come Roma.	Milan is noisy, (just) like Rome.
Milano è tanto rumorosa quanto Roma.	Milan is as noisy as Rome.

Il Colloseo a Roma è così importante.
The Colosseum in Rome is so important.

Il Colloseo a Roma è importante come il Duomo a Firenze.
The Colosseum in Rome is important, like the Cathedral in Florence.

Il Collosseo a Roma è tanto importante, quanto il Duomo a Firenze.
The Colosseum in Rome is as important as the Cathedral in Florence.

Comparison of two things with the same adjective (equivalent characteristics):

La mia sedia preferita è così comoda.
My favorite chair is so comfortable.

La mia sedia è comoda come le sedie fatto in America.
My chair is comfortable, (just) like the chairs made in America.

La mia sedia è tanto comoda quanto le sedie fatto in America.
My chair is as comfortable as the chairs made in America.

Use tanto… quanto to compare nouns with equivalent adverbs. For instance, to say one machine works as well as another similar machine. In this case, quanto can stand alone to represent the full meaning, “as well as.“

La mia Camaro va tanto bene quanto la tua Ferrari.

My Camaro runs as well as your Ferrari.

– or-

La mia Camaro va bene quanto la tua Ferrari.

**********************************************************

Use “Tanto… Quanto”
Equivalent Italian Comparisons

Use tanto… quanto to describe two characteristics of a single individual, in order to say someone is as (much) one way as he/she is another way. As an example, if someone is both smart and handsome, one might want to emphasize the special nature of this individual by putting both characteristics in one statement. In this case, the verb essere is used for the comparison to “link” both characteristics to the subject. This works for places and things as well. Note that tanto cannot be omitted in this situation.

Two Equivalent Characteristics
for a single individual, place, or thing

tanto… quanto

as… as

Marco è tanto intelligente quanto bello.	Mark is as smart as handsome.
Il film era tanto lungo quanto noioso.	The film was as long as it was boring.
Roma è tanto rumorosa quanto grande.	Rome is as noisy as it is large.

When comparing the quantity of things two people have, to state that different individuals have an equivalent quantity, use the adverbs tanto…quanto. Note that in this situation tanto must always be used with quanto and tanto must agree in gender and number with the noun that it modifies.

Comparison of Two Equivalent Quantities

tanto(a,i,e)…. quanto

as many… as
as much…as

This adverbial phrase will usually appear with the verb avere to describe in general how much or how many things someone has. Since we are now speaking of quantities, we need to include the pronoun ne, which means, “of it,” “of this,” or “of that” in this situation, and ne will appear before the conjugated form of avere in the second phrase.

Caterina ha tante amiche quanto ne ha Anna.	Kathy has as many friends as Ann.
Pietro ha tanti parenti quanto ne ha Caterina.	Peter has as many relatives as Kathy.
Le persone a Milano hanno tanti soldi quanto ne ha la gente a Roma.	The people in Milan have as much money as the people in Rome.

**********************************************************

“Come”
in Italian Sayings

Along with the frequent use of the adverb come to make comparisons daily life, Italians often pepper their conversations with well-known sayings that use come. Many Italian sayings, or figures of speech that describe one thing by comparing it to another, have been passed down for generations and are still in use throughout Italy today. Therefore, learning about the adverb come will help us to understand both the Italian language and Italian culture!

With a figure of speech that describes one thing being “like” or “as” another using come, Italians are able to express their point in a creative and often humorous way. In other cases, a comparison can add emotion or depth to a statement. In grammatical terms, a figure of speech that uses like, or its Italian equivalent come, is called a simile. A short statement that uses a simile is often called a saying. The descriptor “saying” is often used in interchangeably with “proverb,” although proverbs tend to make a more strong association between two points, using a metaphor with the verb “is” to create a universal statement.

Let’s see how Italians use the adverb come with the meaning of “like” or “as” to make a simile and underscore a point that is important to the speaker.

Probably the most common simile used in Italy today is, “Buono come il pane.” The literal meaning is, “Good like the bread.” An outsider may wonder why a person is being compared to bread. What point could this make? Similes, like proverbs, do not always make sense when translated word for word. In this case, bread is alluded to because of the central place bread has had in sustaining life in Italy throughout the ages. An English an equivalent saying might be, “Heart of gold,” or “Good of heart,” to describe someone who is particularly caring and understanding and supportive of another’s needs.

A few more well-known Italian sayings are listed below. You’ll notice that the similes used in these sayings also compare a particular type of person to a particular type of food. Do you know any other situations in which Italians compare people to food to make a point? If you’d like, leave any I have not included in the comments below so we all can enjoy the Italian sensibility!

Ognun dà pane ma non come mamma.

Translation: Everyone gives bread but none does it like a mother.
Meaning: A mother’s love is special.

Sono pieno come un uovo.

Translation: I’m full like an egg.
Meaning: I am stuffed! I ate a lot and now am as full as can I can be. An egg is a good comparison because the thin shell is completely filled with the yolk and white; no space is left for anything else.

Sei come il prezzemolo!

Translation: You are like parsley!
Meaning: You turn up everywhere! I seem to encounter you everywhere I go! Parsley is a well-known herb in Italy, both for its ability to grow everywhere and also because a little parsley is used here and there in many Italian dishes.

Spuntare come funghi.

Translation: Sprouting up like mushrooms.
English: How did you get here already? To show up or emerge from somewhere quickly. Mushrooms are known for their ability to sprout quickly after a period of rain — so quickly that it seems like one day there is nothing and the next day there are clumps of fully grown mushrooms everywhere.

Remember how to make comparisons with
come and tanto/quanto and I guarantee you will use these
Italian phrases and Italian sayings every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® What We Like about Christmas in Italy… and how to use “Piacere” with Italian disjunctive pronouns

Small Christmas tree with ornaments and star on top, presents in boxes underneath and the Conversational Italian for Travelers book Just the Grammar standing beside it.

November 28, 2022January 13, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 4 Comments

Have you been trying to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

I hope that I have helped you this year and you have reached your goal! I have been by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

The end of the year is upon us, bringing with it yet another Christmas season in Italy. No matter if you are a child or an adult, there are so many things to like about how this special season is celebrated in Italy — the lights and decorations, the household preparations that have been passed down for generations, and finally, the much anticipated gathering of family on Christmas Eve and Christmas Day. What better time is there than Christmas to review how Italians use the verb piacere, which means “to like”?

While many Italian families celebrate Christmas by following traditions passed down through the generations, other families have adopted festivities from neighboring countries. This leaves us with an important conversational point. It is possible to describe what one person likes as it relates to what someone else likes using piacere and the Italian disjunctive pronouns. There are also many Italian verbs that one needs to be familiar with to talk about current Christmas traditions in Italy, many of which have taken on a new importance now that new traditions have been adopted.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” with the Italian verb piacere, both with and without disjunctive pronouns, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language and ask for whatever we need politely!

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verb

Piacere
to describe what one likes and compare this
with what another likes using
Italian disjunctive pronouns.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

How to Use the Italian Verb Piacere to Say…

“Mi Piace Natale!”

In a previous blog on this topic, Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! Piacere: How Italians Say, “I like it!,”

we learned:

The Italian verb piacere literally means “to be pleasing.” Italians use this verb when they want to express the idea that they like something. It is how Italians say, “I like it!”

It should first be noted that piacere has an irregular conjugation. Then, it is important to understand that the verb piacere works differently than most other Italian verbs that have an -ere ending. In effect, the subject of the sentence that uses the verb piacere will be the thing or things that are liked. Therefore, to agree with the subject, the conjugated forms of piacere will usually be the singular or plural third person.

The singular third person form of piacere is piace and the plural is piacciono.

Rather than conjugating the verb piacere in its entirety, for now we will focus on the two most important conjugations of piacere listed above — piace if one thing is liked and piacciono if many things are liked.

Italians then put one of the indirect object pronouns – mi, ti, Le, le, gli, ci, vi, or gli –before the verb, at the beginning of the sentence, to denote to whom the thing is pleasing.

As a refresher, here is the meaning of the indirect object pronouns we will need to use with piacere. Notice that the context of the conversation will be important to determine if gli refers to him or to them.

Italian Indirect Object Pronouns

mi	to me
ti	to you (familiar)
Le	to you (polite)
le	to her (to Maria)
gli	to him (to Mario)

ci	to us
vi	to you all
gli	to them

If someone likes doing something, follow the indirect object and the verb piacere in the third person singular — piace — with an infinitive verb!

In short, just follow the basic formulas below to describe what things you like in Italian:

Indirect object pronoun + piace + object or activity
Indirect object pronoun + piacciono + objects

Let’s put all this together to describe the things that are pleasing to us — that is, the things that we like — about the Christmas season in Italy. In the examples for the following sections, the Italian way of thinking is given in English in gray, the true English translation is in black, and the noun or verb that is the subject of the Italian sentence has been underlined.

Also, notice from the examples that Italians use “mi piace molto” to refer to things they really like, where Americans tend to say, “I love.” to express a strong liking for both things and people.

(If you need a more detailed explanation of how piacere works, please see the previous blog about piacere.)

A Traditional Christmas in Italy…

The Catholic religion is the official religion of Italy. The Italian Christmas season (periodo di Natale) begins on December 8th with the Catholic holiday of L’Immacolata (Feast of the Immaculate Conception of Mary) and ends on January 6th with L’Epifania (the day the “Three Kings” visit the baby Jesus).

During the Christmas season, lights adorn every town in Italy, and many Italian towns are famous for depictions of Christmas scenes in larger than life light displays. The largest nativity scene in the world, for instance, is on the side of a mountain in the town of Manarola in the famous Cinque Terre region along the northwestern coast of Italy. This display of lighted homes and figures that is used to create a larger-than-life nativity scene is even included in the Guinness book of world records. Music adds to the special feeling of Christmas in Italy, and Christmas songs from around the world have been translated into Italian. Visit a prior Christmas blog for a link to listen to the most famous Italian Christmas carol, “Tu Scendi dalle Stelle.”

The nativity scene, in Italian called the presepe or presepio, is the center of the religious celebration in Italy. The city of Naples is famous for artisans who produce the manger, figures, animals, and even the surrounding countryside that makes up the nativity scene, in life-like detail. Larger nativity scenes can be found in churches and piazzas, while Italian families often set up a smaller nativity scene at home. Many towns also recruit local volunteers to dress in period costumes and sit in a manger specially constructed for the occasion to create a living nativity scene.

The important family celebration in Italy occurs on Christmas Eve (la Vigilia di Natale). There is a well-known Italian saying that describes the importance of being with family during Christmas: “Natale con i tuoi, Pasqua con chi vuoi,” which means, “Christmas with your (family), Easter with whom you want.”

Christmas Eve is celebrated with a large fish dinner (cenone) followed by midnight mass at church. There is another family dinner on Christmas day, and afterwards Italians spend the time between Christmas and the New Year making the rounds to visit family and friends. Presents are exchanged on L’Epifania as a finale to the holiday season. The children are told the story of a friendly witch, La Befana, who long ago missed her chance to greet the baby Jesus with the wise men, and now flies on her broom every year in search of him. While on her journey, she drops presents down the chimney into the homes of the Italian children.

Let’s talk about how much we all like these Italian Christmas traditions using the Italian verb piacere!

Mi piace il periodo di Natale!
[To me the Christmas season is pleasing.]
I like the Christmas season!

Mi piacciono le decorazioni di Natale, specialmente le luci in piazza.
[To me, the Christmas decorations are pleasing.]
I like the Christmas decorations, especially the lights in the piazza.

Mi piace molto cantare le canzoni di Natale.
[To me, singing Christmas songs is pleasing, very much.]
I love to sing Christmas songs.

Le piace sistemare il presepe in casa.
[To her setting up the nativity scene at home is pleasing.]
She likes setting up the nativity scene at home.

Gli piace il presepe con persone vere in chiesa.
[To him, the living nativity scene at church is pleasing.]
He likes the living nativity scene at church.

Ci piace il cenone della Vigilia di Natale.
[To us, the big dinner on Christmas Eve is pleasing.]
We like the big dinner on Christmas Eve.

Gli piace l’arrivo della Befana di notte.
[To him / To them the arrival of La Befana at night is pleasing.]
He likes / They like the arrival of La Befana at night.

Gli piacciono molto le feste di Natale in Italia!
[To him / To them the Christmas holidays in Italy are really pleasing!]
He loves / They love the Christmas holidays!

Christmas in Italy Today…

It is also interesting to note that Christmas celebrations in Italy have become more varied. While many Italian families celebrate Christmas by following traditions passed down through the generations, other families have adopted festivities from neighboring countries.

This is most evident in the replacement of the household nativity scene with a Christmas tree. Italy boasts the largest lighted Christmas tree display in the world, which is along a mountain that overlooks the town of Gubbio in Umbria. Santa Claus (Babbo Natale) has also been added to or replaced the Italian tradition of La Befana. While some families in Italy favor one type of celebration, others favor another.

This leaves us with an important conversational point.
It is possible to describe what one person likes
as it relates to what someone else likes
using disjunctive pronouns in Italian.

The disjunctive pronouns serve to stress that a person likes something with the “a” for “to”. Notice the similarity of the disjunctive pronouns to the indirect object pronouns and subject pronouns we have already learned.

If you want to be specific and use someone’s name, just put the preposition “a” before their name. This is an especially helpful in the third person; instead of the indirect object pronoun gli, which means both “to him” and “to them,” one can use the more specific disjunctive pronouns. For general groups, you will need [a + Italian definite article].

Italian Disjunctive Pronouns and Equivalents

a me	to me
a te	to you (familiar)
a Lei	to you (polite)
a lei / a Maria	to her / to Maria
a lui / a Marco	to him /to Mario

a noi	to us
a voi	to you all
a loro ai bambini agli italiani	to them to the children to the Italians

Three of our examples from the last section are below, changed slightly to reflect some new additions to the Italian Christmas celebration. This time the Italian disjunctive pronouns or a person or group’s name is used to describe to whom the traditions are pleasing. The Italian sentence structure and English translation is the same.

A Maria piace sistemare l’albero d’Natale in casa.
[To Maria setting up the Christmas tree at home is pleasing.]
Mary likes setting up the Christmas tree at home.

Ai bambini piace l’arrivo di Babbo Natale di notte.
[To the children the arrival of Santa Claus at night is pleasing.]
The children like the arrival of Santa Claus at night.

A tutti gli Italiani piacciono molto le feste di Natale!
[To all the Italians the Christmas holidays are really pleasing!]
All the Italians love the Christmas holidays!

It is important to realize that piace is most commonly used as given in the first section that describes the traditional Italian Christmas — that is, with indirect object pronouns. The disjunctive pronouns are used mainly when one wants to stress a point — when a person likes something that one wouldn’t expect him or her to like, or when someone likes something that is different than the norm. Disjunctive pronouns are also important when comparing the preference of one person with another.

For instance, maybe I like the traditional Italian nativity scene, but Maria does not. I could say,

A me piace sistimare il presepe, ma a Maria no. Maria preferisce l’albero di Natale.
[Meaning: I like to set up the nativity scene, but Mary doesn’t.]
(Implied: Even though Mary is Italian, for some unknown reason, she has taken on the tradition of others and Mary prefers to set up a Christmas tree.)
I like setting up the nativity scene, but Mary doesn’t. Mary prefers a Christmas tree.

Or perhaps most of the children in a family like the arrival of Santa Claus, but unexpectedly one child in the family wants to wait for La Befana:

More Christmas holiday fun…

Below are example sentences for a few more important activities that both Italians and Americans enjoy — in Italian of course!

Let’s get the house decorated and deck ourselves out as well!

Mi piace addobbare la casa per Natale.
I like decorating/decking out the house for Christmas.

Mi piace anche molto addobbarsi mia bambina per le feste.
Also I love dressing up my baby for the holidays.

And send Christmas wishes to those we care about by snail mail or email…

Nella prima settimana di dicembre, noi mandiamo i bilglietti Natalizi per posta.
In the first week of December, we mail out the Christmas cards.

Negli anni recenti, ho spedito tanti auguri di buon Natale per email.
I recent years, I have sent many Christmas wishes by email.

Wrap presents for Santa or La Befana to deliver for the children…

Ci vuole molto tempo a impacchettare tutti i regali di Natale.
It takes a lot of time to wrap all the Christmas presents.

Lego un fiocco regalo su ogni scatola.
I tie a ribbon around every box.

Exchange and finally unwrap presents!

Alla nostra famiglia piace scambiarsi i regali di Natale dal Natale all’Epifania.
Our family likes to exchange presents with each other from Christmas Day through to the Epiphany.

Ai bambini piace molto scartare i regali!
The children love unwrapping the presents!

When the Christmas holiday is over…

Italians have a saying — “L’epifania tutte le feste porta via!” This means that the arrival of Epiphany signals the end of the holiday season, or, in the Italian way of thinking, “Epiphany takes away the holiday season.”

The end of the Christmas holidays is, of course, a disappointment. How would we say that we do not like when the holiday season ends in Italian? Just use non as follows: when using the more common sentence structure with indirect object pronouns, simply place non at the beginning of the sentence. Otherwise, to if you want to use a disjunctive pronoun to emphasize how much you do not when the holidays end, be sure to put non after the disjunctive pronoun, right before piacere.

Non gli piace quando finiscono le feste di Natale!
[To them, it is not pleasing when the Christmas holidays end!]
They don’t like when the Christmas holidays end!

Agli italiani non piace quando finiscono le feste di Natale!
[To the Italians, it is not pleasing when the Christmas holidays end!]
The Italians don’t like when the Christmas holidays end!

Buone Feste a tutti e Buon Anno Nuovo!

Happy Holidays to all and Happy New Year!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to Use the Preposition “Da” in Italian

November 1, 2022February 21, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Have you been trying to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Let’s continue our series about Italian prepositions with the essential Italian preposition “da.” The Italian preposition “da” can be translated into the English prepositions “from” and “by.” Da serves as an essential link between Italian nouns, is used in Italian phrases that describe time in a complex way, and is also integral to many common expressions. If we learn how to use the Italian preposition “da,” we will truly sound like a native Italian!

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the preposition “da”

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Use “Da” to Say
Where You are From

One of the most frequent questions asked during polite conversation is, “Where are you from?” We learned how to use the preposition di to ask and answer this question in an earlier blog in this series, “How to Express ‘Di’ in Italian.” You will remember that phrases with the preposition di are used to inquire about one’s place of birth, with the understanding that this place is often the same town the person is still living in. The examples from our previous blog:

Di dov’è Lei?	Where are you (polite) from?
Di dove sei?	Where are you (familiar) from?
Sono di Chicago.	(I) am from Chicago.

The second way to ask, “Where are you from?” in Italian uses the preposition da and the formula below:

Da + dove + venire

from + where + to come

The phrase created with the preposition da uses the action verb venire and may come up in conversation when someone is visiting or has moved to a new place. The reply will most often use the io form of venire, which is vengo (I come) and da (from), followed by a city, town, region/state, or country. Once again, the question may be asked politely or in a familiar way.

Da dove viene?	Where are you (polite) from?
Da dove vieni?	Where are you (familiar) from?
Vengo da Chicago.	(I) am from Chicago.

Remember that when speaking of a region, state, or country, the Italian definite article (il, lo, la, l’, gli. le) must be used. The preposition da is then combined with the definite article to make dal, dallo, dalla, dall’, dagli or dalle, which all mean “from the.” (Note: not all definite articles and combinations have been listed here, and the rules for combining the Italian definite articles are beyond the scope of this blog, but can be found in Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Grammnar” book.) For now, just look up and remember the correct way to describe the region, state, or country in which you are living.

If you are from the United States of America, the most common reply when conversing in Italian is even easier — “Sono americano!” for males. Of course, following the usual gender rules, females will have to say, “Sono americana.” Another possible reply, “Vengo dall’America,” is grammatically correct but probably sounds a bit awkward to the Italian ear. “Vengo dagli Stati Uniti,” would be considered a better choice if one wants to precisely state their origin in North America rather than South America.

Those of Italian descent may want to mention their family’s origin in Italy and therefore that they are “italo-americano(a).” This comment can be prefaced with the sentence, “La mia famiglia viene dall’Italia,” in this case conjugating venire according to the third person singular used for the collective noun famiglia.

Some examples:

Sono americano. Sono americana.	(I) am American. (male speaker) (I) am American. (female speaker)
Sono italo-americano. Sono italo-americana. La mia famiglia viene dall’Italia.	(I) am Italian-American. (male speaker) (I) am Italian-American. (female speaker) My family comes from (originates in) Italy.
Vengo dagli Stati Uniti.	(I) come from the United States.
Vengo dall’Illinois.	(I) come from Illinois.
Vengo dalla California.	(I) come from California.
Vengo dal New Jersey.	(I) come from New Jersey.
Vengo dalle (isole dell’) Hawaii.	(I) come from (the islands of) Hawaii.

Finally, the simplest way of all an Italian may use to say where they are from is, “Sono da città,” such as, “Sono da Roma.”

By the way, have you noticed that nationalities are not capitalized in Italian, although the names of countries are?

Use “Da” or “A” to Describe
Visiting an Office or Home

We have just seen that the verb venire requires the preposition da to describe where an individual “comes from,” or lives, in the first section of this blog. This idea can be expanded to include people one visits during daily life.

Da is also used to describe going to visit a person if that person is associated with a particular place. For instance, the dentist, doctor, and lawyer are professionals who hold consultations in an office. Therefore, the verb andare is followed by [da + definite article + professional].

Odio andare dal dentista!
I hate going to the dentist!

Domani devo andare dal dottore.
Tomorrow I have to go to the doctor.

Vado dall’avvocato spesso per discutere sui problemi del mio divorzio.
I go to the lawyer often to discuss the problems of my divorce.

Some examples regarding one’s home:

To work from home is “lavorare da casa.”
To “drop in for a minute/few minutes” is “passare un attimo da casa.”

A causa di COVID, io devo lavorare da casa questa settimana.
Due to COVID, I have to work from home this morning.

Domani, passo un attmo da casa.
Tomorrow, I (will) drop in for a few minutes.

An abbreviated way to tell someone you are going to your friend Mary’s house use, “Vado da Maria,” for “I am going to Mary’s house,” or, as we sometimes say in America, “I am going to Mary’s place.” This follows the logic above, since Mary is, of course, intimately associated with the house she lives in!

And a colloquial way to ask someone you know if they’d like to come to your home in Italy is simply, “Vieni da me stasera?” for “Come by my place tonight?”

—But…—

The formal way to talk about visiting someone in their home, uses the preposition “a” for “a casa.” This construction also works for family, friends or acquaintances you plan to visit at their home.

Remember that “to go to visit a person” is “andare a trovare una persona” and “to come to visit a person” is “venire a trovare una persona.” Visitare is only used when one visits a place. See below for how this works:

Oggi, vado a trovare mia mamma a casa sua.
Today, I will go to visit my mother at her house.

Pietro, posso andare a trovarti a casa tua?
Peter, can I visit you at your house?

Certo! Puoi venire a trovarmi a casa mia Domenica!
Certainly! You can come to visit me at my house Sunday.

Expressing Purpose with “Da”

In Italian, unlike in English, two nouns cannot be linked together in a phrase without a preposition to clarify their relationship. Take the English word “sunglasses,” for instance. The noun “sun” in this case acts as an adjective that modifies the noun “glasses.” In English, we think nothing of stringing nouns together to create new words that give a descriptive name to a particular entity. But in Italian, this is never the case. When one noun is used as an adjective to describe the purpose of another, the two nouns must be linked by the preposition da. It makes sense, then, that the Italian translation of the English sunglasses is occhiali da sole!

Listed below are a few Italian noun combinations that are used to give a descriptive name to things like common household items, rooms in a home, clothing, and clocks. This construction is also used frequently in Italian to describe different types of tickets or cards, beach items, and items that have to do with sports. Most of the items listed below, but not all, use da to connect two nouns, as will be discussed below. The original noun has been listed along with its modifications for some of the items. Some of these descriptive names are written as one word in English, while others are written as two separate words. How many more examples can you think of?

spazzolino da denti	toothbrush
crema da barbara	shaving cream

piatto	plate
piattino da dessert	dessert plate

bicchiere	glass for drinking
bicchiere da vino	wine glass
bicciere per l’acqua	water glass

cucchiaio	spoon
cucchiaio da minestra	soup spoon
cucchiaio da caffè	coffee spoon

fork	forchetta
forchetta da tavola	dinner fork
forchettone per insalata	salad fork
forchetta da dolce	dessert fork

coltello	knife
coltello da tavola	dinner knife
coltello da scalco	carving knife

camera da letto	bedroom
sala da pranzo	dining room

vestito	dress
vestito da sera	evening dress
vestito da sposa	wedding dress

camicia	shirt
camicia da notte	nightgown
camicia da uomo	man’s shirt

orologio	watch
orologio da polso	wrist watch
orologio a pendolo	grandfather clock

scarpe	shoes
scarpe da ginnastica scarpe da corsa	sneakers running shoes
scarpa da neve	snow shoes
scarponi da trekking	hiking boots
scarponi da sci	ski boots
tuta da sci	ski suit

biglietto	ticket/note/paper money
biglietto da visita	business card
biglietto di auguri di compleanno	birthday card

carta d’imbarco	boarding pass (plane)
carta d’identità	identification card
carta di credtio/debito	credit/debit card
carte da gioco	playing cards

occhiali da sole	sunglasses
costume da bagno	bathing suit
telo da spiaggia	beach towel
ombrellone da spiaggia	beach umbrella

barca a vela	sail boat

giacca da sci	ski jacket
pantaloni da sci	ski pants
bastoncini da sci	ski poles

campo	field
campo da calcio/ tennis/golf/basket	soccer field/ tennis/golf basketball field
pallone da calcio	soccer ball
pallone da rugby	soccer/rugby ball
racchetta da tennis	tennis racket
mazza da golf	golf club
mazza da baseball	baseball bat

Macchina da corsa	race car
Pista da corsa	race track
Cavallo da corsa	race horse

Did you notice the use of prepositions other than da to link nouns in the list above? The Italian name for a dessert fork is forchettone per insalata and for a water glass is a bicchiere per l’acqua. In these two cases, the Italian preposition per, which means for, is used to create a name that describes the purpose of these items.

In the previous blog, “How to Express ‘Di’ in Italian,” we discussed briefly how to use di with camicia di seta and castello di sabbia. It was noted that some of Italian noun combinations must be linked with di if the descriptive term represents what the main item is made of. We have several additional examples for when di is used to link a descriptive noun with another noun in the lists above.

The Italian name for grandfather clock, orologio a pendolo, is a name that describes the means by which the clock functions. The pendulum swings in order to keep time. Therefore, the preposition a is used to link pendolo to orologio, since Italian uses the preposition a to describe what makes something run. And a sailboat is a “boat that runs on the wind” — barca a vela. Remember from our blog in this series “Italian Preposition ‘A’ or ‘In’? that the preposition a is used to describe how other, more common items function, such as by battery, by solar energy, etc.

To summarize…

Italian is a very precise language,
and the Italian use of prepositions
is a paramount example of this precision!

Use the Italian “Da”
in Reference to Time

When Italians reference a point in time, several prepositions may be used, including da, which in this case means “from” or “since.”

In a previous blog in this series, “How to Use ‘Di’ in Italian, we discussed that the preposition di is used to refer to the general time of day with the phrases di mattina, di pomeriggio, di sera, and di notte.

We also mentioned in the same blog that both di and in are used to refer to the seasons: d’estate, d’inverno, in primavera, in autunno.

The Italian prepositions a and in also have a role to play when describing units of time, which was discussed in another blog in this series, “Italian Preposition ‘A’ or ‘In’?” . When referring to the month a particular event takes place, either a or in can be used. The Italian a or in replaces te English in. Also, the preposition a is used to refer to a precise time with the formula [alle + time] which corresponds to the English [at +time].

In contrast to the prepositions di and a,
which are linked to a distinct period of time,

da is used to make generalizations about time
as it relates to one’s life experiences.

Da is a more difficult Italian preposition for the English speaker to learn how to use than di or a because its meaning of “from” or “since” makes reference to a period of time that started in the past and continues in the present. Although the idea behind these phrases is “from or “since,” the English translation most commonly uses the preposition “for” to start these phrases. But the real difficulty comes in the choice of verbs; the Italian choice is to link da with present tense verbs for a period of time that refers back to the past and does not translate directly into English!

Let’s go through this Italian way of thinking step by step…

Phrases that use da in reference to a period of time can be specific, such as, “Da lunedì a venerdì,” which means, “From Monday to Friday.”

Phrases that use da in reference to a period of time can also be non-specific, such as, “da anni” (for years), “da molti anni” (for many years), or mention an exact period of time, such as “da uno, due, tre… settimane, mese, anni… etc.” These phrases translate into English as “for many years,” or “for one, two, three weeks months, years, etc.,” although in Italian they really mean, “Since/From many years ago and continuing into the present…”

[Da + period of time] can begin an Italian sentence, or be placed in the middle or the end, along with the phrase that describes what has been happening during this time. Since the action linked to these phrases is considered ongoing, Italian uses the present tense for all phrases in the sentence. English, instead uses the continuous past tense for the phrase that describes the beginning of the action that extends into the present and the present tense for the main action.

In the examples below, the phrase with da has been underlined, the present tense verbs are green, and the past tense verbs are brown. Notice how sperare is linked to another verb with di and riuscire with a, as discussed in previous blogs.

Studio l’italiano da tanti anni, ma non riesco a capire i film italiani molto bene.
I have been studying Italian for many years, but I can’t understand Italian films very well.
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

Da tre settimane non fumo e spero di riuscire a smettere completamente.
I haven’t been smoking for three weeks and I hope to be able to stop completely.
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

If you need a refresher on how to use any of these prepositions in reference to time, you can also review our Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook or the “Just the Verbs” and “Just the Grammar” reference books.

Use the Italian “da quanto”
in Reference to Time

The adjective “quanto,” which means “how much” or “how many” is commonly used to refer to a period of time, and is always preceded by da, as in the formula;

Da + quanto + tempo

for + how much + time

The formula [da + quanto + tempo] can be used to ask a question about “how much time” an activity has been taking. Or, the noun tempo (time) can be replaced with a unit of time, such as days, months, or years. As in the preceding section, use of da in this formula implies that the action has started in the past and is still going on in the present. Therefore, whenever a question is asked regarding “how much time” with “da quanto tempo,” Italian uses a present tense verb for all phrases in the sentence. English, instead, uses the continuous past tense.

See examples below from a dialogue taken from the Conversational Italian for Travelers story, “Caterina Travels to Italy” and note the different ways Italian and English express this idea of time.

Elena asks:
Da quanto tempo stai viaggiando in Italia?
For how much time (how long) have you been traveling in Italy?
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

Caterina replies:
Sto viaggiando in Italia da un mese.
I have been traveling in Italy for a month.
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

The same rules described above for “da quanto tempo” apply to the phrase “da quando,” which means, “since when.” To answer the question “Since when?” for “Since… ” use [da + the specific date] and remember to combine da with the definite article il when stating the date.

Example: In order to say the date in Italian, one must say, “Il sedici agosto.” Therefore, the translation for, “since the 16th of August” is “dal sedici agosto.” Again, from the dialogue from “Caterina Travels to Italy”:

Elena asks:
Da quando sei a Stresa?
Since when have you been staying in Stresa?
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

Caterina replies:
Sono a Stresa dal sedici agosto.
I have been staying in Stresa since August 16th.
[Note: Verb tenses in Italian and English differ.]

Use the Italian preposition “Per”
for a Completed Action

In contrast to the use of the preposition da in reference to time, the use of the preposition per is straightforward. Per means for and is used with the passato prossimo form of the past tense to describe a past action that has been completed. The description of time may be general, such as “for many years,” or specific, the same as with da. The past tense verbs are again brown in the examples below.

Ho vissuto per molti anni a Roma.
I lived for many years in Rome.

Ieri ho lavorato in casa per tre ore.
Yesterday, I worked at home for three hours.

Use the Italian Prepositions “Per, Fra, Tra”
for Future Events

Per can replace the English preposition by when describing a task that must be completed in the future.

Marco, dobbiamo finire questo progetto per domani!
Mark, we must finish this project by tomorrow!

To describe other actions that will take place in the future, Italian uses either fra or tra. These two prepositions are interchangeable, although native Italian speakers may intuitively favor one preposition over the other to keep the language flowing smoothly. The English translation will be the preposition in. Remember that the present tense often substitutes for the near future in Italian, so the future tense is not a requirement when using fra or tra.

Il treno parte fra cinque minuti.
The train will leave/leaves in 5 minutes.

Andrò in Italia fra un mese.
I will go to Italy in one month.

General Uses for “Da”

1. Use the preposition da to express an attribute of a person, to say he or she is acting in a certain way or like a character.

In some cases, the preposition da substitutes for a longer introductory phrase. For instance, the common phrase “da giovane” means, “as a child,” and it is understood to mean that general period of time “when I was young.” This also works for other Italian descriptors of the phrases of life, such as da bambino(a), da ragazzo(a), da piccolo(a) or da adulto(a), da grande (grown up).

To say someone is “acting like…” use da. A common characteristic combined with da is stupido, as in “da stupido” for when one is “acting like a stupid person.”

If a man is living well, he is living as “da gran signore,” or like royalty or like God or da re, like a king.

If one dresses like a particular character in a fable, book or movie, or is pretending to be a professional, they can be referred to with da, such as da Pinocchio, da Cenerentola (Cinderella), da cowboy, or da dottore.

Another personal attribute connected with da is matti, for crazy, as in the exclamation, “Roba da matti!” which loosely translated means, “Stuff for crazy people!” and refers to a crazy or unbelievable situation.

“Da morire” when used alone or in a sentence describing someone or something is an expression that describes a feeling of extreme liking, similar to the English expression, “It’s to die for!” Or, this expression can be used to take a negative feeling to the extreme, as in, “Sono annioato(a) da morire!” for “I am bored to death!”

Some examples:

Da giovane, ho vissuto in campagna.
When I was young, I lived in the countryside.

Non comportarti da stupido!
Don’t act like an idiot!

Per lo spettacolo, Maria si veste da Cenerentola.
For the show, Mary is dressed as Cinderella.

Ti è piaciuto quel film? Si, da morire!
Did you like that film? Yes, It was to die for!

2. To describe the cause of an action or feeling. Some common examples might include why you are tired, hot, cold, or nervous. Da translates into from and [da + definite article] translates into “from the.”

Sono stanco morto dal lavoro.
I am dead tired from work.

Ho sudato dal caldo inferno durante tutto agosto.
I sweated from the infernal heat during all of August.

Sono nervosa dal pensiero che forse tu non tornerai mai.
I am nervous from the thought that maybe you will not ever return.

But be careful to use the preposition di to connect one verb to another to express feelings that are related to an action — not da! The many phrases that take di as the connecting preposition were discussed in the first blog in this series. The idea in the first example above can also be stated as follows:

Sono stanco morto di lavorare questa settimana.
I am dead tired from working this week.

3. To describe the distance from one place to another, use da, which translates as from.
To describe distance in general or numerical terms, or when giving the directions from a compass, use the preposition a. The preposition a is used in English when describing distance in general terms, but not before a number or for directions from a compass (north, south, east, west, etc.)

L’ufficio postatale è a pochi isolati da casa mia.
The post office is a few blocks from my house.

La scuola si trova a cinque chilometri da Roma centrale.
The school is five kilometers from central Rome.

Canada è a nord degli Stati Uniti.
Canada is north of the United States.

Common Expressions with “Da”

Other important phrases that refer to time:

da allora	since then
da allora in poi	from then on from that time thenceforth
da ora in poi	from now on
da quel momento da quel momento in poi	since that moment from that moment on
da qui in poi	from here on henceforth
da domani	starting tomorrow
da subito	starting now immediately
da sempre	always
da un pezzo	since a while ago for a while now

2. Phrases that begin with “C’è… or “Non c’è…” end with [da + infinitive verb]. In these phrases, da is translated as “to,” in the same way that “to” is used to create an English infinite verb (to speak, to do, etc.). “About it” is often implied in the Italian phrases that refer to speaking or doing, but often stated in English.

C’è poco da dire. Non c’è niente da dire.	There’s not much to say (about it). There’s nothing to say (about it).
C’è poco da fare. Non c’è niente da fare.	There’s not much to do (about it). There’s nothing to do (about it).
C’è poco da stare allegri. Non c’è tempo da perdere.	There’s little to rejoice about. There’s no time to lose.

3. Miscellaneous phrases with da:

da niente	of little or no importance
da quattro soldi	cheap
da zero	(to start) from scratch
da favola	like a fairy tale
da sogno	like a dream/very nice/wonderful
vacanza da sogno	dream vacation
da incubo	nightmarish/very unpleasant
dare da mangiare	to feed
dare da mangiare al cane	to feed the dog
tempo da ladri	bad weather
tempo da lupi	bad weather
da solo/ da sola	to be all alone, by yourself
va da sé	it goes without saying
vita da cane	a dog’s life

Remember how to use
the Italian preposition “da” in conversation
and I guarantee you will use the Italian “da” every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Italian Travelers – Use “Può” to ask for what you need!

October 4, 2022April 16, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Have you been trying to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. This blog will focus on the Italian verb potere, which means “to can” or “to be able to.” I like to call this verb the “Italian verb of politeness” since it is used to make polite requests, and therefore it is especially useful to know when traveling in Italy.

For instance, different present tense forms of potere can be used to ask a question politely. Potere can be used alone in the first conjugation in the singular and plural to ask the questions, “Posso?” or “Possiamo?” which mean, “May I?” or “May we?” Combine the third person, “polite you” Lei conjugation of potere, which is “può,” with an action verb to create a polite question in Italian that asks, “Can/Could you…?” Italian travelers: just remember how to use può and you can ask for whatever you need while in Italy!

With the simple examples above, one can easily imagine how the present tense conjugation of potere, and especially the verb può, is essential knowledge for one traveling in Italy. Read on for a simple method that will ensure the Italian traveler “can” create a polite sentence in Italian and “will be able to” relay what they need using the verbs posso, possiamo, and especially può.

This method is an integral part of our Conversational Italian for Travelers series of books. After reading this blog, try our pocket travel book, “Just the Important Phrases,” which summarizes this method and provides essential Italian phrases using può. Many of these phrases have been reprinted here. Use this method to create your own phrases in Italian!

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” with the Italian verb può, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language and ask for whatever we need politely!

This post is the 61st in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verbs

Posso, Possiamo,
and especially Può

in order to ask politely
for what one needs.
See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

The Italian Verb Potere

Potere means “to can” or “to be able to,” and is classified as a modal, or helping verb. This means that potere provides information about the ability of the speaker to “be able to” complete the main action described in a sentence. When used in this way, potere is conjugated to reflect the speaker and the action verb follows directly after in its infinitive form — that is, the action verb is not conjugated! (Remember that Italian verbs are categorized into three infinitive forms by the following endings: -are, -ere, and -ire, and that English infinitive verbs are preceded by “to,” as in, “to go” “to stay,” etc.)

One can imagine the infinite number of uses for a helping verb with the meanings of potere. This blog will focus the use of potere as a verb of politeness, with emphasis on how to use the third person, or Lei (polite you) conjugation, which is può. Può translates literally as “he/she can” and “you (polite) can.” For purposes of this blog, in order to demonstrate the use of può to mean “polite you” in a question, the translation will be given as the softer English “could.”

One simple way to use potere while traveling in Italy is to connect the “polite you” conjugation of potere, which is “può” with an action verb in the infinitive.

This will enable travelers to ask for whatever they need with the polite phrase, “Could you…?”

Of course, polite communication is essential to show respect for others in any language and it is especially important when traveling in Italy to make a good impression, or fare una bella figura!

The beauty of this method, which uses [può + infinitive verb] to pose a question, is that it is easy to ask for assistance during the course of a typical day. For instance, one were to direct another to act in a specific manner with a statement in Italian (instead of using a question formulated with può) the polite Italian command form would be required. And the polite command form in Italian is relayed with a verb conjugated in the subjunctive mood — a complex form covered in advanced Italian. However, when the request is made with a question that starts with può, the subjunctive conjugation is no longer necessary! Even knowledge of the complete conjugation of potere is not required!

The traveler only needs to remember the helping verb può and the meaning of the action verb for what they need.
There is essentially no need to conjugate using this method!

Italian travelers can ask for help understanding fluent Italian, with the many simple transactions of daily life, with directions and transportation needs, and while dining at a restaurant simply by using [può + infinitive verb]. Further discussion of how to use può as a traveler is given below for several different situations, after the present tense conjuration.

Finally, we will also discuss how to use the first person singular and plural conjugations of potere, which are posso and possiamo to ask for what one needs at an Italian restaurant.

Of course, the phrases given will serve as examples and this method can be extrapolated to many different situations!

How to Conjugate Potere

Potere is an irregular -ere verb in the present tense. As noted above, for many reasons, and especially to be polite in Italian, this verb is essential to commit to memory!

The complete present tense conjugation of potere is below, with the important conjugations of politeness that are the focus of this blog in green: io (I), “Lei” (polite you) and noi (we).

io	posso
tu	puoi
Lei/lei/lui	può
noi	possiamo
voi	potete
loro	possono

Use Può to Ask for What You Need!

1. Use può if you are having difficulty understanding fluent Italian.

Può is an important conjugation of potere for the beginning student of Italian to remember for when he or she needs help conversing with a fluent speaker.
[Può + parlare + adverb] is a polite way to direct someone to speak Italian in way that is helpful to you. Start a sentence with può and then add the infinitive verb parlare and an adverb requesting another to speak more slowly or loudly, for instance. To be even more polite, start your request with, “Per favore…” or “Per piacere…” for “Please…”
Notice from the examples below how the Italian adverb “più,” which means “more,” is also helpful in this situation.
[Può + ripetere] can be used in a simple phrase to ask someone to repeat what they’ve just said. You can also start a sentence with [può + ripetere] and build your Italian sentence one phrase at a time to describe what you’d like in more detail, as with the last examples in the table below.

Per favore, Può…	Please, Could you…
…parlare più lentamente?	…speak more slowly?
…parlare più piano?	…speak more slowly?
…parlare più forte?	…speak more loudly?
…parlare in inglese?	…speak in English?

Può ripetere?	Could you repeat (that)?
Può ripetere…	Could you repeat…
…che ha detto lui?*	…what he said?
…che ha detto lei?*	…what she said?
…che hanno detto loro?*	…what they said?
…le direzioni? …le direzioni per il duomo?	…the directions? …the directions to the cathedral?
…l’informazione? …l’informazione sullo spettacolo?	…the information? …the information about the show? (one piece of information)
…le informazioni? …le informazioni per la riunione di domani?	…the information? …the information for the meeting tomorrow? (more than one piece of information)

*When a sentence or question starts with che, the subject pronoun is given at the end if one wants to emphasize or clarify who the subject is. Otherwise, the verb ending corresponds to the speaker, as usual.

2. Use può at the service station to ask for assistance with your car

For those brave enough to rent a car in Italy, assistance from a service station may be necessary. Some useful infinitive verbs to remember that can be used after the polite request is made with può are given below.
In some places in Italy, it may still be possible to ask for assistance filling a car with gasoline with the phrase “fare il pieno.” Or, at least, one may still see the gas station attendant conversing with a customer in Italian movies from the 1950s and 60s. Although a polite sentence can be made with può in this case, “Può fare il pieno?” “Can you fill it up?” a shortened phrase is usually used, such as, “Il pieno, per favore!” for “Fill it up, please!”

Può…	Could you…
…caricare la batteria?	…charge the battery?
…controllare l’olio?	…check the oil?
…controllare l’acqua?	…check the water?
…controllare le gomme?	…check the tires?
…cambiare la gomma?	…change the tire?
…aggiustare la gomma che è a terra?	fix the flat tire?
…riparare la gomma che è a terra?	…fix the flat tire?

3. Use “Mi può… ” for every day, simple interactions

A simple question to ask if you are paying in cash and need change uses [mi può + portare] for “Can you bring me…?” Remember that in Italian the pronoun “mi” for “me” comes before the conjugated verb, while in English the pronoun is placed after the verb.
The Italian pronoun Lei, for “polite you” is left out of the sentence, which, along with the word order can complicate things a bit. But, just remember that in this case we are using a method that specifies può means “polite you.” And, with this method, we don’t have to worry about the conjugating an Italian verb! With this method we can ask for change s follows:
Mi può portare il resto, per favore? Could you bring me the change, please?

Of course, the verb portare can also be used to refer to a person, such as when a taxi is needed to transfer someone from one location to another. In this case, just give the address after the phrase “Mi puo portare…” For a proper Italian sentence, remember to use the correct preposition and to put the street number for the address after the street name!
Mi può portare in via Verde? Could you bring me to Green Street?
Mi può portare a via Melzo 10? Could you bring me 10 Melzo Street?

To ask the concierge at a hotel to call you a taxi, use [mi può + chiamare] for “Can/Could you call me…” In this case, the Italian “mi” serves as the indirect object pronoun “for me.”
Mi può chiamare un taxi? Can you call a taxi for me?

To ask a shopkeeper to show you an article of clothing or other item of interest, use [mi può + mostrare] for “Can/Could you show me…”
Mi può mostrare una camicia bianca? Can you show me a white shirt?

4. Use [Mi può + dire…] to ask for assistance with directions

When visiting an unfamiliar city, it may be necessary to ask a stranger for help. In Italy, it is customary to begin this type of conversation with “mi scusi” for “excuse me” (polite command).
Then, an easy way to politely phrase any question you may have is to use the phrase, “Mi può,” which means, “Could you (polite)… me.” To complete the sentence, add the infinitive verb for what you need after this Italian phrase – once again, there is no need to conjugate with this method! If we add dire to the phrase, for instance, we get, “Mi può dire…” for “Could you (polite) tell me…”
Examples below use “Dov’è…?” for “Where is…?” and allow one to ask for directions to place of interest. If the answer to any of these questions involves a particular street, you will hear the phrase in… via, for the English on… street.
La banca è in via Verde. The bank is on Green Street.
Of course, with this method, one has to be ready to hear the directions in Italian! Examples of useful phrases one might hear in reply are given in the Conversational Italian for Travelers books.

Mi scusi,	Excuse me,
mi può dire	could (you pol.) tell me
dov’è…	where is…
…l’albergo?	…the hotel?
…il ristorante?	…the restaurant?
…la metro/metropolitana?	…the subway?
…la fermata dell’autobus?	…the bus stop?
…la stazione dei treni?	…the train station?
…la banca?	…the bank?
…l’ufficio postale?	…the post office?
…il museo?	…the museum?

5. Use [Mi può + dire…] to ask about Italian schedules

Use “Mi puo…” to ask about a schedule for public transportation or when a place of interest opens or closes.
Quando means when and can be added after the phrase, “Mi può dire…” to find out when transportation will arrive (arriva) or depart (parte).
Use quando to ask when a museum, shop, restaurant or other place of interest will open (apre) or will close (chiude). Notice from the literal translation in the table below, which follows the abbreviation “lit.” that the word order to ask these questions is slightly different in Italian and English.

Mi può dire	Could you (pol.) tell me
quando…	when…
…arriva il treno?	…the train arrives? (lit. arrives the train)
…arriva l’autobus?	…the bus arrives? (lit. arrives the bus)
…parte il treno?	…the train leaves? (lit. leaves the train)
…parte l’autobus?	…the bus leaves? (lit. leaves the bus)
…apre il museo?	…the museum opens? (lit. opens the museum)
…chiude il museo?	…the museum closes? (lit. closes the museum)

6. Use [Mi può + portare] or [Ci può + portare] at the restaurant

While dining at a restaurant, it is often necessary to ask the waiter to bring something to your table. Perhaps you need additional silverware or another napkin. Or maybe another drink or cup of espresso. Just ask the waiter to bring these things to you with the phrase [mi può + portare]. Of course, it will be necessary to remember the Italian for which part of the table setting or which drink you need, as in the examples below. (If you need a refresher on how to use the Italian indefinite article (a, an) or how to create the word “some” in Italian, check out Conversational Italian for Travlers “Just the Grammar.

Cultural note: Italian restaurants do not usually serve water or soft drinks with ice (ghiaccio). The reason is often simple — there usually is no ice maker on the premises. Also, many Italians still believe that a very cold drink is not good for one’s health. In short, if you’d like to ask for ice while traveling in Italy, it is possible to do so by asking, “Mi può portare del ghiaccio,” for “Can you bring me some ice?” but don’t be disappointed if there is none available!
An additional bottle of water or wine, or perhaps an additional basket of bread might be needed for all the guests dining at a table. In this case, one can make a request for the entire table simply by changing the “mi” for “me” in the original phrase to “ci” for “us.”

Mi può portare…	Could you bring me…
Ci può portare…	Could you bring us…
…dell’acqua naturale?	…some still water (natural water)?
…dell’acqua con gas/frizzante?	…some sparkling water?
…del pane/più pane?	…some bread/more bread?
…del sale e pepe?	…some salt and pepper?
…un cucchiaio, un coltello, una forchetta?	…a spoon, a knife, a fork?
…un tovagliolo?	…a napkin?

Cultural note: remember that there is a charge in Italy for any bread served, whether it is brought to you by request or not! This charge is listed on the bill as the “pane e coperto” or “bread and cover charge,” and, as the name suggests, also serves to reserve the table for as long as the guests would like to stay. An additional charge will be added for any additional bread requested, so don’t be surprised to see this charge on the bill as well. Luckily, the pane e coperto at the time of this writing is usually only 1-3 euros, although more may be charged in an upscale restaurant. It is best to check the notice that should be listed in the menu if you are on a budget.
A simple question to use if you’d like a receipt at a restaurant replaces portare with dare (to give) in the formula; [mi può + dare] means, “Can you give me…?” Remember to ask for the receipt when dining in Italy, as there is no limit for the amount of time one can linger and enjoy food and friends and the waiter will not want to interrupt your time together! Use, “Mi può dare la ricevuta, per favore?” for “Could you give me a receipt, please?

7. Use [Posso + infinitive verb] or [Possiamo + infinitive verb] at the restaurant

In the table below are some expressions commonly used when dining in a restaurant. The io (I) and noi (we) forms of the verb potere are important to know in this situation, since requests are usually made for oneself or for the entire table.
We expand the polite use of potere with, “Posso?” for “May I…?” and “Possiamo?” for “May we…?”
Use the reflexive pronoun mi (myself) with [posso + sedersi] when asking to be seated in Italian. Use the reflexive pronoun ci (ourselves) with [possiamo + sedersi] when requesting a group be seated. You will notice from the phrases below that the reflexive pronouns mi and ci are attached to the infinitive action verb sedersi after removing the -si ending. This is the rule for all [helping verb + reflexive verb] combinations.
Sitting is not reflexive in English, so you will not find a reflexive pronoun in the translations in the table below. Instead, English simply uses the verb “sit” alone or sometimes adds the adverb “down” to personalize the meaning of the verb sit.
Cultural note: It is not usually necessary to ask for the menu in an Italian restaurant; the waiter will generally bring menus to the table once everyone is seated. But, if for some reason you need to see the menu again, it is customary to make this request in Italian with the verb avere (to have) rather than the American verb “to see.”
Language note: In Italian, the word for table has both masculine and feminine endings. The masculine, “il tavolo” refers to any type of table — a table one will be eating on or working on, for instance. When the table is full of food, it becomes feminine, as in “la tavola.” Therefore, if one is simply asking for a table at a certain place in a restaurant (before the food has arrived), the masculine ending applies.

Posso…	May I…
…sedermi vicino alla finestra? …sedermi fuori? … sedermi a un tavolo fuori?	…sit by the window? …sit outside? …sit at an outside table?
…sedermi a un’altro tavolo?	…sit at another table?
…avere il menù?	…see (have) the menu?

Possiamo…	May we…
…sederci vicino alla finestra? …sederci fuori? …sederci a un tavolo fuori?	…sit by the window? …sit outside? …sederci a una tavola fuori?
…sederci a un’altro tavolo?	…sit at another table?
…avere il menù?	…see (have) the menu?

Finally, if you have food allergies or special requests, use posso to describe what you can… or cannot do!

Non posso mangiare niente…	I cannot eat anything…
…fatto con noci/arachidi.	…made with nuts/peanuts.
…molto piccante.	…very spicy.

Simply follow the method detailed in this blog
to use potere to ask for what you need politely
and “fare una bella figura” while in Italy!

I guarantee you will use può every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s Combine the Imperfetto and Passato Prossimo

September 7, 2022July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Why not set a goal to learn Italian, starting today, for the year 2022? I will try to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

If we learn how to combine “commonly used phrases” with the imperfetto and the passato prossimo, we will be able to speak about events in the recent past, just as we do in our native language!

In our most recent blog, Speaking About the Past: Imperfetto or Passato Prossimo? we discussed in detail adverbs and phrases of frequency used to signal when to use the imperfetto and when to use the passato prossimo. At the end of the previous blog is a short summary of how to combine the imperfetto and the passato prossimo in a two phrase sentence using the adverbs mentre and quando. This blog will build on the previous information we have learned about the imperfetto and the passato prossimo and demonstrate a step-by-step process that can be used to create compound sentences with two or more phrases that contain both past tenses.

This post is the 60th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian

signal the intent of the speaker to use both

the imperfetto and the passato prossimo.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*The imperfetto is not only used with the passato prossimo. In fact, the imperfetto is the only past tense form that can be used in combination with every other Italian past tense — whether speaking about the recent past or the remote past.

************************************************

Choosing an Italian Past Tense

Let’s start our blog about how to combine the imperfetto and the passato prossimo by reviewing some general rules of Italian grammar. We learned in our last blog, on this topic, that the circumstances surrounding the event will determine which Italian past tense to use. Luckily, imbedded in many Italian sentences about past events are certain words and phrases that will indicate whether the imperfetto or the passato prossimo is needed. The intent of the speaker will be signaled by these phrases, which will then trigger use of the correct Italian past tense.

To describe a past event in a complex way — in Italian as well as in our native language — we must create a compound sentence. Compound sentences contain more than one phrase separated by commas or conjunctions, such as: and, while, when, but, or. In Italian, to create a compound sentence about a recent past event, we will have to decide which verb tense to use — the imperfetto or passato prossimo.

Of course, when speaking about an event of interest that happened in the recent past, a compound sentence can be created using only the imperfetto or only the passato prossimo, as noted in our last blog. Our focus in this blog will be on the situations that require both the imperfetto and the passato prossimo.

Combine the Imperfetto and Passato Prossimo
with Mentre and Quando

One of the most common reasons to combine the imperfetto and the passato prossimo is to give background information for an action under discussion. In this case, the imperfetto is the past tense of choice to describe the setting and the completed action is relayed with the passato prossimo.

What Italian words or phrases can I use to introduce the setting for a past event?

As every actor knows, the setting is defined as the time and place in which an action occurs. Since the imperfetto is used to describe the setting for a past event in Italian, expressions of time in the past are important triggers for the imperfetto.

Some common expressions of past time are given in the tables below using ieri (yesterday),scorso(a) (last), and the preposition da (for). (Note: There are, of course, other meanings for the preposition da. Also, these expressions can also be used with the passato prossimo, but generally additional, more specific information is required, as discussed in our last blog.)

Expressions of Time in the Past with Ieri

stamattina	this morning
ieri	yesterday
l’altro ieri	the day before yesterday
ieri mattina ieri pomeriggio ieri sera	yesterday morning yesterday afternoon yesterday evening

Expressions of Time in the Past with Scorso

scorso(a)	last
la notte scorsa	last night
la settimana scorsa	last week
il mese scorso	last month
l’anno scorso	last year

lunedì scorso	last Monday
martedì scorso	last Tuesday
mercoledì scorso	last Wednesday
giovedì scorso	last Thursday
venerdì scorso	last Friday
sabato scorso	last Saturday
domenica scorsa	last Sunday

Use of “da…” in Italian

da tempo	for some time
da un’ora da due ore ecc.	for one hour for two hours etc.
da un mese da due mesi ecc.	for one month for two months etc.
da un anno da due anni ecc.	for one year for two years etc.

The description of the place in which an action occurred can include general interior or exterior surroundings, the weather, or even a prior event. Luckily, language students generally learn the vocabulary to describe various locations early on in their studies, which is also an important first step to learn about any culture. The larger cities and regions in Italy are important to commit to memory. Some common local places where events may take place include at home, at school, at work, or in one of the many shops in the piazza!

How else can I start a phrase to talk about the setting of a past event with the imperfetto?

Mentre, which means “while” in Italian, is a specific sign that a setting or background action is to be relayed in a phrase. Mentre is not required in compound sentences that use both the imperfetto and passato prossimo, but when used it is very helpful. This is because mentre is only used with the imperfetto!

How can use of the imperfetto affect the meaning of a descriptive phrase in Italian?

It is also important to remember that the imperfetto can be translated into English in three ways: the simple past tense, “used to,” or “was/were-ing.” The translation “used to” refers to a habitual action in the the past that is no longer being done. The translation “was/were-ing” is used to describe an action that started in the past but may or may not have been completed.

Just as the Italian present tense can be translated as “I go” or “I am going,” in the past tense, the imperfetto can be translated as, “I went” or “I was going.” For emphasis, one could use stare in both situations to create a compound verb with sto andando (I am going) or stavo andando (I was going). But it is so much easier and so much more common in Italian to use both the simple present tense or the imperfetto past tense without creating a compound verb!

Once I know the setting, about mentre, and about how to relay information using the imperfetto, am I ready to create a compound sentence about the past in Italian?

With all of this in mind… the easiest way to create a compound sentence about the past in Italian is…

Start the first phrase with mentre and give the setting with a verb in the impefetto. Or, just refer to the general time, the weather, or to an action without giving a specific time frame. Note: the descriptive phrase with the imperfetto is often, but not always, the first phrase.

There are, of course, innumerable examples of introductory phrases one can create. Four examples are given below to get us started, with the imperfetto verb underlined.

Mentre leggevo il giornale stamattina… While I was reading the newspaper this morning…
Mentre visitavo Firenze l’anno scorso… While I was visiting Florence last year…
Lunedì scorso, pioveva… Last Monday, it was raining…
Da due anni abitavo con mia zia… For two years I lived with my aunt…

Now, let’s add a phrase with a completed action to each example above. The passato prossimo is required for this second phrase. See the previous blog on this topic for a short list of Italian verbs that are often used to describe completed actions.

If mentre is not used in the introductory phrase, use quando (when) with the phrase in the passato prossimo. However, quando is not a specific trigger for the passato prossimo phrase, as quando can be used with either the imperfetto or the passato prossimo phrase. The completed action is often, but not always, the second phrase.

Let’s complete the first two examples that start with mentre. The passato prossimo verb used in the completed phrase is in green.

1. Mentre leggevo il giornale stamatina, la cameriera è arrivato.
While I was reading the newspaper this morning, the maid arrived.
2. Mentre visitavo Firenze l’anno scorso, ho incontrato Maria per caso al Ristorante Paoli.
While I was visiting Florence last year, I happened to meet Maria at Ristorante Paoli.

Below is our third example that omits mentre in the imperfetto phrase. Notice how quando is used in the passato prossimo phrase that completes the sentence.

3. Lunedì scorso, pioveva quando sono andato a trovare mia mamma.
Last Monday, it was raining when I went to visit my mother.

An alternate rendition of the same phrase that uses quando with the imperfetto phrase:

Quando pioveva lunedì scorso, sono andato a trovare mia mamma.
When it was raining last Monday, I went to visit my mother.

Our final example in a completed sentence:

4. Da due anni, abitavo con mia zia quando ho trovato un appartamento perfecto per me.
For two years, I was living with my aunt when I found an apartment perfect for me.

This last example implies the speaker has not yet moved into her new apartment. Remember from our last blog on this topic that if those two years had been completed and the speaker was already in the new apartment, we would need to use the preposition per with the passato prossimo! The introductory phrases would read: “Per due anni, ho abitato con mia zia…” In short, the imperfetto was chosen to give the circumstances of the situation, so the speaker does not have to give the details of where he or she is currently living; this extra information is included with the use of the imperfetto!

Can I put the imperfetto phrase second and the passato prossimo phrase first in a compound sentence?

All four of the example sentences given above work with the phrases reversed. We have already done this with the third example. The first example sentence is reprinted here. Try the rest on your own if you like!

Mentre leggevo il giornale stamatina, la cameriera è arrivato.
While I was reading the newspaper this morning, the maid arrived.

-or-

La cameriera è arrivato mentre leggevo il giornale stamattina.
The maid arrived while I was reading the newspaper this morning.

How do I create a compound sentence about the past in Italian using three phrases?

Of course, it is possible in Italian to create a compound sentence in the past tense with more than two phrases, as the case in English (and most every other language). For Italian, just continue to follow the Italian grammar we have learned for the imperfetto and passato prossimo for each phrase in your sentence!

Remember that the imperfetto is also used to describe a state of being and it is common to describe how one feels about a situation that has occurred in the past. In fact, if the speaker has chosen to use the imperfetto in combination with the passato prossimo, this implies that the past event still affects their emotions or their life in some way. So in some cases, a sentence may start with the imperfetto, the second phrase use the passato prossimo, and the third phrase again use the imperfetto!

In short, any combination of phrases that use the imperfetto and passato prossimo is possible,
as long as the verb in each phrase follows the rules for each.

The circumstances surrounding each event and intent of the speaker
will determine which rules apply.

Let’s provide even more detail about the past situation in our original four examples above by adding a second completed or a description of how the speaker felt at the time.

1. Mentre leggevo il giornale stamatina, la cameriera è arrivato e ha pulito tutta la casa.
While I was reading the newspaper this morning, the maid arrived and cleaned the entire house.

2. Mentre visitavo Firenze l’anno scorso, ho incontrato Maria per caso al Ristorante Paoli ma non abbiamo avuto tempo per cenare insieme.
While I was visiting Florence last year, I happened to meet Maria at Ristorante Paoli but we didn’t have time to dine together.

3. Lunedì scorso, pioveva quando sono andato a trovare mia mamma e mi sono bagnata molto!
Last Monday, it was raining when I went to visit my mother and I got very wet!

4. Da due anni, abitavo con mia zia quando ho trovato un appartamento perfecto per me e dopo ero molto contento.
For two years, I was living with my aunt when I found an apartment perfect for me and afterwards I felt very happy.

In summary:

Mentre is only used with the imperfetto phrase!

Quando can be used with either the imperfetto or the passato prossimo phrase.

When creating a compound sentence in Italian,
simply remember the rules for the imperfetto and the passato prossimo.

Combine Imperfetto and Passato Prossimo
with Perché and Poiché

Another important reason to combine the imperfetto and the passato prossimo is to describe the cause behind a past event. In this case, the element mentioned in the imperfetto phrase (the cause) is the reason behind the action/result (the effect) given in the passato prossimo phrase. This makes intrinsic sense, since the imperfetto is used for descriptive purposes and the passato prossimo is used to relate a completed event.

Cause/effect phrases that combine the imperfetto and passato prossimo often start with the effect in the first phrase (with the passato prossimo) and then give the cause behind the past event in the second phrase (with the imperfetto). The two phrases are usually linked with the conjunction perché, In this case, perché means because/since/so that.

However, an Italian sentence can also start with the cause for a completed event (effect) that will be mentioned in a second phrase. In this case the most common conjunction to use is poiché, which is translated as “considering that” or “because/since.” Even when poiché is translated as because/since, the meaning underlying poiché is “considering that” — the issue has been taken into consideration prior to the response.

Although, to the outsider, this change in conjunctions to describe cause and effect may seem minor, it actually originates with an important rule of Italian grammar that determines how to use perché. Perché is used to start a sentence when one wants to ask the reason why. Perché also means because when linking phrases. Perhaps to avoid confusion between these two definitions, perché can only be used at the beginning of a sentence with the meaning of because in direct answer to a question that starts with perché (why) or come mai (how come). In this case, the subject of the sentence is understood, and to repeat it would be unnecessary; this understanding effectively “bumps” perché from its usual role as a conjunction between to phrases to the beginning of the sentence!

An example of how perché can change its meaning with simple question/answer sentences:

Perché sei andato a Roma?
Why did you go to Rome?

(Sono andato a Roma) Perché avevo un meeting lì.
(I went to Rome) Because I had a meeting there.

In short, other Italian conjunctions besides perché are required to start a sentence with a causation phrase, including when one combines the imperfetto and the passato prossimo. Poiché (considering that/seeing as how/because/since) is the most common conjunction used in conversation. Other options include: “per quale regione” (for that reason/because), and in a more formal situation or writing: siccome (given that/seeing as how/because), dato che (seeing as/since), visto che (given that/considering that/seeing that), dal momento che (seeing as/since).

Now that we know some basic rules about Italian conjunctions used to describe causation, let’s finally combine the imperfetto and the passato prossimo to talk about the past. In the examples below, the cause behind a past event with the imperfetto is given in blue, the conjunction is in red, and the effect/completed event given in the passato prossimo is green. Notice how the imperfetto and the passato prossimo verbs (which are underlined) are linked to the cause and effect phrases.

Example 1:

Sono rimasto a casa ieri perché avevo la febbre alta.
I remained at home yesterday because I had a high fever.

-or-

Poiché avevo la febbre alta, sono rimasto a casa ieri.
Because I had a high fever, I remained at home yesterday.

Example 2:

Maria ha comprato quel vestito nero ieri perché era in saldo.
Maria bought that dress because it was on sale.

-or-

Poiché era in saldo, Maria ha comprato quel vestito nero ieri.
Because it was on sale. Maria bought that dress yesterday.

An example in our last blog on this topic also combines the imperfetto and the passato prossimo in a sentence to describe causation, although this fact was not mentioned in the blog. Below is the scenario again, with the second sentence that begins with “subito dopo” serving as the cause/effect example.

Notice in the cause/effect example below that the passato prossimo is used in phrases both before and after the imperfetto phrase. In this example, we have combined three phrases that describe the past in one sentence!

The words “subito dopo” emphasize the short duration of the action in the first phrase. In the second phrase. the imperfetto sets up the action for the third phrase; the cause is listed first with poiché. Of course, act of opening a door described in the third phrase is normally an event of short duration and so uses the passato prossimo.

Maria si è arrabbiata con Marco ed è andata a casa.
Mary became angry with Mark and Mary went home.

Subito dopo, Marco è andato a casa di Maria e poiché bussava alla porta
continuamente, Maria ha aperto.
Shortly after, Mark went to Mary’s house and seeing as how he was knocking on the door continuously, Maria opened it.

Remember how combine imperfetto and the passato prossimo
and I guarantee
you will use these Italian past tenses every day!

Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Verbs”

Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Speaking About the Past: Imperfetto or Passato Prossimo?

August 3, 2022July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” in the past tense with the imperfetto and the passato prossimo in our conversations, we will be able to speak about an event in the past in Italian, just as we do in our native language!

Previous blogs in this series have discussed the basics of how to conjugate and use the imperfetto and the passato prossimo to speak about the recent past.* As we’ve mentioned before, the conjugation of these verb forms is fairly straightforward; the tricky part is knowing which past tense to choose to describe a particular event.

To make matters more complex, a compound sentence can be created using only the imperfetto, only the passato prossimo, or a combination of both. And in many situations, the same event can be described in Italian using either the imperfetto or the passato prossimo! Given this complexity, how is a non-native speaker to know how to create Italian sentences to describe what has happened the past?

As a general rule, the circumstances surrounding the event will determine which past tense to use. Luckily, imbedded in many Italian sentences about past events are certain words and phrases that will indicate whether the imperfetto or the passato prossimo are necessary. The intent of the speaker will be signaled by these phrases, which will then trigger use of the correct Italian past tense.

This post is the 59th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian

signal the intent of the speaker to use

the imperfetto or the passato prossimo.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*The imperfetto is not used only with the passato prossimo. In fact, the imperfetto is the only past tense form that can be used in combination with every other Italian past tense — whether speaking about the recent past or the remote past.

************************************************

Imperfetto
Adverbs and Phrases of Frequency

In a previous blog in this series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! – Past Tense Imperfetto,“ we discussed that to make general statements about the past in Italian, or to describe a general state of being, one needs to master the imperfetto past tense. If you need a refresher on how to conjugate the imperfetto past tense, please visit the prior blog. In this section, we will focus on phrases that trigger the use of the imperfetto past tense.

Italians often use the imperfetto to express an action that was done habitually in the past but is no longer being done. Can you think of some things that might take place every day? For instance, reading the paper, going to school, going to work, and eating breakfast, lunch and dinner? If you want to talk about how you’ve done these things in the past, use the imperfetto!

Sentences that use the imperfetto in this way are translated either into the simple present tense or as “used to” and often include an adverb of frequency. Several adverbs of frequency are listed in the following table, with examples to follow:

Italian Adverbs of Frequency

di solito	usually/often times
spesso	very often
quasi sempre	almost always
sempre	always

Di solito, io finivo la lezione all’una il lunedì.
Usually, I used to finish/finished the class at one o’clock on Mondays.

Quando ero piccolo, andavo a casa di mia nonna molto spesso.
When I was small, I went to my grandmother’s house very often.

Quasi sempre mi sentivo male quando viaggiavo in barca.
I almost always felt sick when I traveled by boat.

In short, if an adverb of frequency is part of an introductory phrase, this gives the sense of repetition about an event in the past. Therefore, the speaker is preparing the listener for the imperfetto! Notice that in the last two examples, the second verb in the sentence follows the intention of the first, and also uses the imperfetto. To sound like a native Italian, incorporate adverbs of frequency into your sentences with the imperfetto!

********************

Introductory Phrases for Repetitive Actions

There are, of course, many introductory phrases that give the same idea of repetition as the adverbs of frequency, and Italians make good use of these phrases. Describe any general time of day, month, or year, and use the imperfetto!

If one had a particular habit during the morning, he or she could say, “Di mattina…” Similarly, if a habitual action was done at night, the phrase, “Di notte…” can be used. Other repetitive actions might happen, “Tutte le mattine…” or Tutte le notti…” for “every morning” and “every night.” Or perhaps, according to the season: d’ inverno, in primavera, d’estate, in autunno.

“Negli anni Settanta…” means, “In the seventies…” or any nonspecific period of time during the years between 1970 and 1979. If one uses introductory phrases of this type, it is his or her intention to state that something was done habitually but during a nonspecific period of time. Of course, the word “habit” is left out of both the Italian sentence and the usual English translation but is be translated using “used to,” as noted above for the adverbs of frequency, to give this idea. The intention of the speaker is understood by his or her use of the imperfetto!

For example:

Di mattina/Tutte le mattine… aiutavo mia mamma a preparare la prima colazione.
In the mornings/Every morning… I helped/used to help my mother prepare breakfast.

Di notte/ Tutte le notti… facevo la doccia.
At night/Every night… I took/used to take a shower.

Or, perhaps one previously went to church every week. Introduce this fact with, “La domenica…” Remember that when Italians place a definite article before any day of the week, it is their way of describing a recurring event on that day. “On Sundays…” means every week on Sunday. You can even add an adverb of frequency for additional emphasis.

La domenica, andavo in chiesa spesso.
On Sundays, I used to go to church often.

Two often used introductory phrases, “Quando ero piccolo…” and “C’era una volta…” serve as a reminder that the imperfetto is the past tense of choice for description and narration.

“Quando ero piccolo…” “When I was young…” was used in the first group of example sentences in this blog. This phrase is usually followed by another verb in the imperfetto, as already noted, to follow the circumstances surrounding the event have been set up initially. This phrase also reinforces the idea that the imperfetto is used to describe a general state of being.

“C’era una volta…” translates as the nonspecific, “Once upon a time…” This phrase is a good way to remember the function of the imperfetto to recount imaginary tales, whether codified as a fairy tale or fable, a “tall tale” one has made up to impress others, or a dream one has had at night. Since they are imaginary, of course these happenings don’t have a specific time frame in which to occur!

You will notice a common thread in the reasoning behind when to use the imperfetto:
use the imperfetto when making generalizations about the past.

Passato Prossimo
Specific Periods of Time

The passato prossimo is used to describe past events that have been completed within a specific time frame, including multiple events in succession. For multiple completed actions in succession, the most remote event is listed first, and then the events that follow are stated according to the time line in which they occurred.

Helpful words or phrases that introduce the passato prossimo often emphasize a specific time frame by giving the actual time period using dalle… alle… (from… to…) or implying an action of short duration, such as subito (right away), subito dopo (right after), or al improvviso (suddenly).

Certain verbs that describe actions of short duration, usually with a precise starting and ending point, are more commonly used with the passato prossimo than the imperfetto. Below is a list of several commonly used verbs of this type.

Verbs of movement from one place to another: andare (to go), venire (to come), entrare (to enter), partire (to leave), etc.
Verbs of beginning and ending: cominciare/iniziare (to start), finire (to finish), etc.
Verbs that describe actions known to usually be of short duration: bussare (to knock, such as on the door), chiamare (to call), etc.
Verbs of communication: chiedere/domandare (to ask), rispondere (to answer), etc.
Changing emotions from one state to another: arrabbiarsi (to get angry), etc.

Let’s create a compound sentence using these verbs in the passato prossimo to describe a series of completed events in a sequence.

Marco è andato alla festa con Maria, dove loro hanno bevuto birra e mangiato una pizza, e dopo hanno ballato la loro canzone preferita.

Mark went to the party with Maria, where they drank beer and ate a pizza and after danced to their favorite song.

Note, however, that the list of verbs above is a general list and all of the verbs in this list can also be used with the imperfetto, depending on the circumstances and the intention of the speaker! Take bussare, for instance. Most times, a person would knock on the door once and wait for the door to be opened. This one time event, started and completed in a short time, would be described with the passato prossimo. For instance, we can imagine what happened in our last example when Mark went to pick up Mary prior to the party:

Marco ha bussato alla porta e Maria è venuta subito ad aprire.
Mark knocked on the door and Mary came quickly to open (it).

Let’s create different circumstances for our story with Mark and Mary. Perhaps instead of having fun, Mark and Mary had an argument at the party and Mary left early. Mark decided to apologize and comes to Mary’s house and knocks continuously on the door to get her to open it. In this situation, remember the translation of the imperfetto as “was/were-ing” to describe and action that started in the past and continued for a nonspecific amount of time.

Below are example sentences from our hypothetical story that use the imperfetto to emphasize that Mark knocked on the door for an unusually long, but nonspecific period of time. Note the addition of the adverb continuamente in this example sentence to reinforce the idea that the event took longer than usual.

Also the words “subito dopo” alert one to use the passato prossimo in the first phrase. The actions of becoming angry, going home, and opening a door are normally of short duration.

Maria si è arrabbiata con Marco e Maria è andata a casa.
Mary became angry with Mark and Mary went home.

Subito dopo, Marco è andato a casa di Maria e poiché bussava alla porta
continuamente, Maria ha aperto.

Shortly after, Mark went to Mary’s house and seeing as how he was knocking on the door continuously, Maria opened it.

Now let’s look at the verb chiamare. If we called someone once, we can use the passato prossimo. But if we called that person habitually, on a certain day or at a certain time, we need to use the imperfetto! Again, circumstances will determine the use of this verb. And by the use of the past tense, we in turn understand the intent of the speaker!

Ho chiamato mia mamma ieri sera. I called my mother last night.
– but –
Chiamavo mia mamma ogni sera. I used to call my mother every night.

********************

When Tutto Means “the Whole”

Another important point: Don’t be confused by the use of tutto!

When used with nouns that refer to the days of the week, such as “tutti i giorni” the meaning of tutti is usually “every,” which implies repetition, and the imperfetto is the past tense of choice.

But tutto also means “the whole.” When the intent is to say “the whole” of a particular time period, we have given the time period a beginning and an end and then we need to use the passato prossimo!

Again, the circumstances the speaker is describing will determine the type of Italian past tense to use. Often specific details about a time or place will be given to signal the intent to use tutto to mean “the whole” with the passato prossimo.

Tutte le mattine d’estate, andava al mare per fare il bagno.
Every morning during the summer, I used to go to the sea to swim.

– but –

Ho passato tutto la mattina, dalle nove a mezzogiorno a fare il bagno al mare.
I spent all morning, from 9 AM until noon, swimming at the seashore.

In fact, if we take any of the introductory phrases for repetitive actions given in the first section and change them to refer to a specific period of time, then we will need to use the passato prossimo! Let’s change “negli anni settanta” to make this phrase more specific:

Negli anni settanta portavo i jeans con il “bel bottoms.”
In the 1970s, I wore jeans with “bell bottoms.”

– but –

Per tutti gli anni settanta, ho portato i jeans con il “bel bottoms.”
For all of the 1970s, I wore jeans with “bell bottoms.”

Durante gli anni settanta, dal 1970 al 1974, sono andato all’Università.
During the 1970s, from 1970 to 1974, I went to college.

You will notice a common thread in the reasoning behind when to use the passato prossimo:
use the passato prossimo for a specific, time-limited activity.

Expressions of Time in the Past

The expressions of time in the past listed below add valuable information to a sentence. For instance, the adverb ieri can be used to modify a verb in the imperfetto to give a general reference about when an event occurred. “Sometime yesterday” is implied when the speaker chooses to pair ieri with the imperfetto.

Ieri can also be used with the passato prossimo, but in this case, a specific time of day is usually included in the sentence, given that the passato prossimo requires events to have taken place within a defined period of time. It is possible to use ieri alone with the passato prossimo, with the understanding that the defined period of time is “the entire day.”

The table below lists some common expressions of past time that use ieri (yesterday). Notice that ieri is invariable (the ending does not change) when modifying different times during the day.

Expressions of Time in the Past with Ieri

stamattina	this morning
ieri	yesterday
l’altro ieri	the day before yesterday
ieri mattina ieri pomeriggio ieri sera	yesterday morning yesterday afternoon yesterday evening

The next table lists some common expressions of past time that use scorso (last). The ending for scorso changes to match the gender and number of the noun it modifies. Remember that the days of the week are not capitalized in Italian.

Expressions of Time in the Past with Scorso

scorso(a)	last
la notte scorsa	last night
la settimana scorsa	last week
il mese scorso	last month
l’anno scorso	last year

lunedì scorso	last Monday
martedì scorso	last Tuesday
mercoledì scorso	last Wednesday
giovedì scorso	last Thursday
venerdì scorso	last Friday
sabato scorso	last Saturday
domenica scorsa	last Sunday

Expressions such as “da tempo,” “da un’ora, “da due mesi,” “da un anno,” etc. are used mainly with the imperfetto to indicate the beginning of an ongoing activity that started in the past. The definition of the imperfetto in this case is was/were-ing. The passato prossimo can also be used with these expressions if the intent is to say that the activity has begun and also concluded during that period of time. However, the preposition per is more commonly used with the passato prossimo for an event that has concluded. See the examples below.

L’insegnante parlava da due ore e gli studenti erano stanchi.
The teacher was speaking for two hours and the students were tired.

L’insegnante ha parlato per due ore e finalmente ha permesso agli studenti di andare via.
The teacher spoke for two hours and finally let the students leave.

Era or È Stato?

Students of Italian commonly have difficulty deciding when to use the imperfetto and passato prossimo forms of essere. However, this is really not very complicated; the rule for choosing the correct form of essere is the same as for any other Italian verb! If the state of being described is not qualified with a specific time frame, use the imperfetto; if a specific time frame is referred to in the phrase, use the passato prossimo.

The imperfetto conjugation is: ero, eri, era, eravamo, eravate, erano.

The passato prossimo conjugation is sono stato(a), sei stato(a), è stato(a), siamo stati(e), siete stati(e) and sono stati(e).

Some examples are below.

In the first example below, it is the intention of the speaker only to describe a state of happiness in the past — not when or for how long. This calls for the imperfetto form of essere. In the second example a time-limited reason is given, which is the speaker’s birthday, and the exact date is even listed. Of course, the specific date requires the speaker to use the passato prossimo.

Ero molto contento.
I was very happy.

– but –

Sono stato molto contento per il mio compleanno il 25 maggio scorso.
I was very happy on my birthday last May 25th.

Let’s look at two more similar situations rendered in two different ways in Italian with the imperfetto and the passato prossimo. In the first example below, the imperfetto is used to mean that generally, sometime during the day, the weather was nice. Perhaps the speaker was just trying to relay some general information. Or possibly, the conversation would continue after giving this setting with the imperfetto and the speaker would describe a particular event or how the day made him or her feel. In the second example, it is understood that the speaker is talking about a fixed time that occurred during the day while he or she was attending a party. And, during that period of time, the speaker really enjoyed him/herself, as stated with the passato prossimo!

Era un bel giorno.
It was a beautiful day.

– but –

È stata una bella festa; mi sono molto divertito.
It was a wonderful party; I really enjoyed myself.

Imperfetto and Passato Prossimo
Combined

In the first two sections of this bog, we discussed phrases that signal when to use the imperfetto and when to use the passato prossimo. We’ve also learned the rules to create a compound sentence with each past tense individually . Finally, it should also be noted that situations will arise that require the use of both the imperfetto and the passato prossimo in one sentence. But don’t worry, there are general rules to follow to build these Italian sentences and the phrases themselves will also contain clues as to how to do this!

Below is a summary of this concept,
which will be discussed in more detail in the next blog in this series.

As a general rule, when creating a compound sentence in Italian, use the imperfetto to describe the setting. Start the imperfetto phrase with mentre (while) if you like, or just refer to the general time or the weather, or to an action without giving a specific time frame. This is often, but not always, the first phrase.

Then, describe the completed action with the passato prossimo. See the second section of this blog for a short list of verbs often used to describe completed actions. If mentre is not used in the introductory phrase, use quando (when) with the phrase in the passato prossimo. This is often, but not always, the second phrase.

Important note:

Mentre is always used with the imperfetto!

Therefore, when you start a phrase with mentre, you must use the imperfetto for the verb in that phrase!

Quando can be used with either the imperfetto or the passato prossimo phrase. Quando often introduces the passato prossimo phrase in a compound sentence when mentre is omitted.

Three examples that combine the imperfetto and passato prossimo in one sentence are below.

Mentre io ero in vacanza in Italia,
il mio capo di lavoro mi ha telefonato per parlare di un problema importante.

While I was on vacation in Italy,
my boss telephoned to talk about an important problem.

Mentre guardavo il mio programma preferito in TV, mia mamma ha finito di prepare la cena.
While I was watching my favorite program on TV, my mother finished preparing dinner.

C’era sole quando Maria è venuta a trovarci a Roma.
It was sunny when Mary came to visit us in Rome.

As a final note: we have already combined the imperfetto and passato prossimo in several examples in the first two sections. Can you find these examples?

******************************

Remember how to talk about the past using
the Italian imperfetto and the passato prossimo
and I guarantee
you will use the Italian past tense every day!

Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Italian Preposition “A” or “In”?

July 7, 2022November 12, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 4 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Let’s continue our series on Italian prepositions with the Italian prepositions “a” and “in.” Both prepositions can be used to describe where someone is going and where a person or thing is located. The Italian “a” can be translated as both “to” or “in” in English. The Italian “in” is translated the same as in English — “in”! If we learn how to use the Italian prepositions “a” and “in,” we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 58th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the prepositions “a” and “in.”

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Use the Italian “a” or “in”
for a Country, Region, or City

Americans and Italians use the prepositions that mean to and in differently. For instance, when Americans travel, they travel to a place – to Italy, to Tuscany, to Florence. American English speakers always use to as the preposition, whether they mention that they are traveling to a general region or a specific town. Of course, when an American reaches their destination, he or she will be located in that place and then say, “I am in Italy, in Tuscany, or in Rome,” meaning that he or she can be found there.

In Italian, however, the type of place is linked to the preposition used; there is no distinction made in Italian between traveling “to” a place or being “in” the place itself.

Italians travel directly into (in) a country, region, or large island,
but to (a) a city, town, or small island.

Once an Italian has arrived at a certain place, the same preposition that was used to describe traveling to that place applies. Or, if one is living in a place, the prepositions “a” and “in” will be used according to the size of the place, as described in the rule in quotes above. Again, the Italian prepositions “a” and “in” are linked to the place that is being described.

But… of course there are some exceptions, and not all states in the United States take the Italian preposition in when speaking about them in Italian. There are enough exceptions, in fact, that this will be the subject of a future blog! For now, we’ll talk about one important exception: New York State. The reason for the exception for New York State is that the Italian focus tends to be on New York City, rather than the rural areas that make up most of in New York State. As in America, the word “city” is left out of ordinary conversation. “Vado a New York,” means, “I am going to New York City.” To emphasize that one is traveling to the state of New York, i.e. somewhere outside of New York City, by convention the phrase would be, “Vado allo stato di New York,” for “I am going to the state of New York.” In this case, the preposition a is combined with the definite article lo to make “allo,“ according to the usual rule [a+lo = allo].

The polite question, “Dove abita?” for “Where do you live?” when answered uses the same prepositions for each location as described above. Here is an answer someone who lives in Italy might give, with the different options: “Abito in Italia, in Toscana, e a Firenze.” “I live in Italy, in Tuscany, and in Florence.” Notice that the Italian prepositions have not changed compared with our example in the last paragraph!

Islands have their own special preposition rules in Italian. One travels “into” the large islands — in Sicilia or in Sardegna — but “to” the smaller islands using “a.” For instance, to go to the small Italian island of Capri one would say, “a Capri.” When traveling to a group of islands, such as Hawaii, the convention is to use [alle + island], leaving out the plural noun isole that alle modifies. Example: “ Vado alle (isole di) Hawaii.” “I am going to Hawaii.” Of course, the same prepositions apply if one is living on the islands mentioned. Notice again that with alle we have combined our preposition with a definite article. A detailed explanation of the procedure used for all prepositions is found in the textbook Conversational Italian for Travelers and the reference book of the same series, “Just the Grammar.”

Check out the table for a summary of the examples above. Of course, where someone is traveling to or is located at during a particular time comes up often in conversation, and there are many variations on these questions! The answers will, of course, follow the rules for Italian prepositions outlined above.

Dove va per il suo viaggio?	Where are you going on your trip?
Vado in America.	I am going to America.
Vado in Illinois/ allo stato di New York.	I am going to Illinois/ the state of New York.
Vado a Chicago/ a New York.	I am going to Chicago/ New York City.

Dove abita?	Where do you live?
Abito in Italia.	I live in Italy.
Abito in Toscana.	I live in Tuscany.
Abito a Firenze.	I live in Florence.
Abito in Sicilia.	I live in Sicily.
Abito in Sardegna.	I live in Sardinia.
Abito a Capri.	I live on Capri.
Abito alle Hawaii.	I live on (the islands of) Hawaii.

Italian Definite Article
with Countries

By convention, the definite article (the) (il, la, or l’) is used to refer to countries, except when talking about traveling directly into them! So if someone should ask politely, “Da dove viene?” “Where are you from?” an Italian would answer, “L’Italia,” and an American would say, “L’America” or “Gli Stati Uniti.”

Below is a table that lists many of the countries in the world and the Italian definite article that applies to each, along with the Italian names for several capital cities. To remember this important point, gather some friends and sit around a table in front of a map of the world. Take turns asking a question about each country’s location, such as, “Dov’è l’America?” A friend can answer, “Ecco l’America!” while pointing to America on the map. This exercise will also reinforce the idea that the word “ecco” for “here is/here are” is used to point out something in plain site.

Of course, there is no need to memorize this entire table. Just remember the correct definite article for where you and your family and friends are from for easy conversation!

Europe	l’Europa	Africa	l’Africa
Austria	l’Austria	Asia	l’Asia
Belgium	il Belgio	Central America	l’America Centrale
*Brussels*	*Bruxelles*	Europe	l’Europa
Denmark	la Danimarca	Middle East	il Medio Oriente
England	l’Inghilterra	North America	l’America del nord
*London*	*Londra*	South America	l’America del sud
France	la Francia	Australia	l’Australia
*Paris*	*Parigi*
Germany	la Germania	Argentina	l’Argentina
*Berlin*	*Berlino*	Brazil	il Brasile
Greece	la Grecia	Canada	il Canada*
*Athens*	*Atene*	Chile	il Cile
Holland	l’Olanda	China	la Cina
*Amsterdam*	*Amsterdam*	Egypt	l’Egitto
Ireland	l’Irlanda	*Cairo*	il Cairo**
*Dublin*	*Dublino*	India	l’India
Italy	l’Italia	Indonesia	l’Indonesia
*Rome*	*Roma*	Japan	il Giappone
Norway	la Norvegia	Korea	la Corea
Poland	la Polonia	Mexico	il Messico
Portugal	il Portogallo	Pakistan	il Pakistan
*Lisbon*	*Lisbona*	Russia	la Russia
Scandanavia	la Scandanavia	*Moscow*	*Mosca*
Spain	la Spagna	Turkey	la Turchia
*Madrid*	*Madrid*	United States	gli Stati Uniti
Sweden	la Svezia	Viet Nam	il Vietnam
Switzerland	la Svizzera

*Il Canada uses the masculine definite article.

**In this case, il Cairo is the name of the city, rather than the noun Cairo alone, by convention.

Use the Italian “a” or “in”
for Places Around Town

As mentioned in the first section, in the Italian language, every place is linked to its own preposition, which describes both going to and being located in the place — either “a” or “in.” Remember, there is no distinction made in Italian between traveling “to” a place or being “in” the place itself. This rule is important when inviting someone to join you for activities around town. In Italian, you’ll need to ask someone if they want to go to a certain place, with “a,” or in a certain place, with “in.”

When using the Italian preposition “a,” the preposition a must be combined with the Italian definite article (il, lo, la, l’) that precedes the noun for the name of the place. The only exceptions to this rule are the Italian words for theater and house or home, which do not take a definite article. For all other nouns of place, the best way to remember the Italian preposition and definite article is to memorize both when learning the meaning of the noun.

It is tempting to try to find a pattern for preposition use for Italian stores and other venues around the piazza. But there is no grammatical rule to fall back on in this instance.

It should also be noted that many verbs of going and returning, such as andare and venire, are automatically followed by the Italian preposition a when linked to another verb (see the next section).

Use the common phrases below to invite a friend out for a good time in order to remember which preposition to use! They have been reprinted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers “Important Phrases” Section of Chapter 11, entitled “Making Friends.” Included are several helpful introductory lines that can be used prior to the invitation. As you can see, knowing your Italian prepositions can even help to build a closer friendship!

Perché non ci vediamo?	Let’s get together. (lit. Why don’t we get together/see each other?)

Hai tempo domani?	Do you have time tomorrow?
Posso rivederti domani?	May I see you again tomorrow?
Sei libera(o) domani,	Are you free (to female/male) tomorrow,
domani sera,	tomorrow night,
la settimana prossima?	next week?

Posso invitarla/ti a cena?	May I invite you (pol.)/(fam.) to dinner?
al bar?	to a (coffee) bar?
al caffé?	to a cafe?
in pizzeria?	to a pizzeria?
a casa mia?	to my house?

Ti piacerebbe/Vuoi…	Would you like to/Do you want to…
andare in piazza?	go to the piazza?
andare in chiesa?	go to church?
andare al cinema? andare a teatro?	go to the movies? go to the theater?
andare al concerto?	go to the concert?
andare allo spettacolo?	go to the show (performance)?
andare alla mostra?	go to the show (exhibit)?
andare al museo?	go to the museum?
andare a ballare?	go dancing?
andare in ufficio?	go to the office?

Ti piacerebbe/Vuoi …	Would you like to/Do you want to…
venire con noi…	come with us…
in spiaggia / al mare?	to the beach / to the sea?
in montagna?	to the mountains?
in campagna?	to the countryside?

When to use “a”
to Link Italian Verbs

There are some Italian action verbs that need to be followed by the preposition a before an infinitive verb is added to complete the sentence. This may seem a little redundant to the English speaker, since in English infinitive verbs already include the word “to.” For instance, the translation of the Italian infinitive verb andare is “to go.” To the Italian speaker, though, it is natural to insert the preposition a between certain conjugated verbs and an infinitive verb — Italian phrases just sound correct this way!

As examples, remember the important phrases “andare a trovare” and “venire a trovare” that mean “to go to visit” and “to come to visit.” These phrases are used to describe visiting people; to visit a place, use visitare. Riuscire is also used on a daily basis to describe the effort one has been putting into a specific action. Try to listen for the “a” when you hear the verbs in the list below and soon it will become natural for you, also, to combine these verbs correctly.

aiutare	to help
Aiuto mia mamma a.…cucinare la cena. I help my mother to cook (the) dinner.
andare	to go
Mamma va a.…fare la spesa ogni mattina. Mother goes grocery shopping every morning.
cominciare	to start
Comincio a.…cucinare la cena. I start (am starting) to cook (the) dinner.
divertirsi	to enjoy onself
Mi diverto a…suonare il violino. I enjoy playing the violin.
imparare	to learn
Tutti imparano a.…parlare italiano. Everyone learns to speak Italian.
insegnare	to teach
Lei insegna a.…scrivere la lingua francese. She teaches (how to) write French.
invitare	to invite
Lui mi invita a…mangiare al ristorante. He invites (is inviting) me to eat at the restaurant.
mandare	to send
Io mando Pietro a…prendere una pizza. I send Peter to get a pizza.
prepararsi	to get ready
Mi preparo ad…andare in Italia. I am getting ready to go to Italy.
riuscire	to be able to/manage
Non riesco a… trovare le chiavi. I can’t manage to find the keys.
venire	to come
Caterina viene a… trovare i suoi cugini. Kathy comes to visit her cousins.

Use the Italian “a” or “in”
in Reference to Time

We also mentioned in the same blog that both di and in are used to refer to the seasons: d’estate, d’inverno, in primavera, in autunno.

The Italian prepositions a and in also have a role to play when describing units of time.

When referring to the month that something is going to happen, either a or in can be used. English always uses in.

Andiamo a Roma a giugno / in giugno.
We will go to Rome in June.

The question, “A che ora succede (qualcosa)?” “At what hour does (something) happen?” is answered with the phrase [alle + number]. In this case, the Italian “a” means “at.” If you need a refresher on how to tell time in both the present and the past, visit the numbers section of our Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook or the “Just the Verbs” and “Just the Grammar” reference books.

Andiamo alle sei e trenta. / Andiamo alle sei e mezzo.
Let’s go at 6:30.

When “a” Means “By”

Sometimes the Italian preposition “a” is translated into “by” in English. For instance, we say that an article of clothing is made “by hand” to refer to human, rather than machine labor. In Italian, the phrase is “a mano.” A similar phrase is “fatto a casa” for “homemade.”

To learn something “by heart” is to “imparare a memoria.”

Also use “a” in Italian to describe what type of energy something “runs by/on.”

Quest’orologio funziona a batteria.
This watch runs by battery.

Other types of combustible energy a machine can run on include: a energia solare, a benzina, a gas, a legno forby… solar energy, benzine, gas, wood.

One can also run on “people energy” when walking by foot (a piedi) or take advantage of an animal’s energy when riding a horse (a cavallo).

Note: electric energy does not require a preposition! L’elettricità = the electricity and una macchina elettrico = an electric machine.

When “in” Means “Made of”

In the previous blog, “How to Use ‘Di’ in Italian, we discussed how to use the preposition di to describe what something is composed of, as well as the exception with materials that require “in” as the preposition. To repeat, by convention, for all metals that are not gold (oro) and for the cloth velvet (veluto) use the Italian preposition in prior to mentioning the material.

Questa è una scultura in bronzo.
This is a sculpture made of bronze.

La vecchia poltrona è stata rivestita in velluto.
The old chair was restored with velevet cloth.

Using “a” to Refer to Age

In a previous blog in this series, “How to Use ‘Di’ in Italian, we discussed that the preposition di is used to state the age of an acquaintance or even a bottle of wine; Use di as part of a phrase before the number of years as in “una signora di 82 anni.”

One can also simply say, “at [number of] years,” in Italian, just like in English, by using the preposition “a” for “at.”

Pietro si è laureato all’Università a ventidue anni.
Peter graduated from college at 22 years.

Mi sono sposata a venticinque anni.
I got married at 25 years old.

Remember when saying the specific phrase, “at your age” that Italian requires the “a” for “at” to be combined with the definite article to make the possessive “your.”

Per favore, nonna, alla tua età, non lavorare più!
Please, grandma, at your age, don’t work any more!

Getting “in” and “out”
of Transportation

Note that different prepositions are used for cars vs. other forms of transportation when using the Italian verb salire to describe getting in. Salire has an irregular conjugation, with two forms given below. Note also and how the preposition su (on) is combined with the different forms of the (il, la, l’).

Salgo in macchina. I get into the car.
Sali in macchina! Get into the car! (fam. command)

Salgo su… I get on/I board/I go aboard…

Salgo… sull’autobus, sul treno, sulla motocicletta, sulla bicicletta, sull’areo.

I get onto… the bus, the train, the motorcycle, the bicycle, the airplane.

Remember how to make comparisons with
the Italian preposition “di” in conversation
and I guarantee you will use the Italian “di” every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s talk about… Making reservations in Italian

June 1, 2022April 2, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

I hope you are on your way to meet this goal! I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” ® With these blogs, I describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

As of this writing, it is easier to travel to Europe than it has been for the last two years. But of course, even if travel becomes restricted again, it is never to early to start to learn Italian travel phrases. In fact, the earlier the better! So for this blog I focus on Italian phrases for making reservations at a restaurant or hotel in Italy.

Prior to beginning the lesson for this blog, I acknowledge that in the larger cities in Italy it is not usually necessary to make reservations completely in Italian; the Italian staff usually speak basic English and often the languages of their European neighbors — French, Spanish or German. Also, most times reservations can now be made over the internet on one’s computer or smart phone, without any human interaction at all! But I’ve found that a few phrases in Italian are always warmly welcomed by Italian servers and hotel receptionists, even in the larger cities, and can serve to put the traveler at ease in their new surroundings. In the smaller Italian towns, basic Italian expressions can still be essential when relating one’s needs in family-run restaurants and hotels.

In short, if we learn the few phrases needed when making reservations in Italian, we will feel more comfortable during our stay in the “bel paese.”

This post is the 57th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
describe

making reservations in Italian

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Talk About… Making Reservations in Italian

La prenotazione means “the reservation.” The Italian verbs prenotare and riservare translate into English as: “to make/book a reservation.” The use of these Italian verbs varies with the situation.

Most commonly, when asking to make a reservation at a restaurant or a hotel, Italians use the noun prenotazione with the verb fare and “make a reservation,” which is “fare una prenotazione.”

It is customary to start a request with either vorrei (I would like) or desidero (I desire/want/wish). Notice that vorrei is the conditional form of volere (to want). It is also possible to use the first person present tense form volgio (I want) but vorrei is considered more polite and is the preferred conjugation to use. The phrase “ho bisogno di” for “I need” is yet another way to introduce any request made in Italian.

Some example sentences to get us started making a reservation:

Vorrei fare una prenotazione.	I would like to make a reservation.
Desidero fare una prenotazione.	I desire/want/wish to make a reservation.
Ho bisogno di fare una prenotazione.	I need to make a reservation.

Once we have stated our desire to make a reservation, three important pieces of information will need to be relayed to the receptionist: the number of people, the date and the time.

Generally, the receptionist will ask: “Per quante persone?” “For how many people?”

For a restaurant reservation, it will be important to state how many adults (adulti) as well as how many children (bambini) will be dining. A simple answer for a family of two adults and two children would be: “Due adulti e due bambini.” The receptionist may ask if a child seat (una sedia speciale) is needed. A table will be chosen next to other families dining in the restaurant; this ensures that adults who are without children and want a more intimate dinner will not be disturbed.

An interesting note about children and Italian culture: a child is considered a bambino or bambina (baby/ child) in Italy until about 14, when he or she can then be called a ragazzo or ragazza (young man/young woman). The appellation ragazzo(a) lasts into the 20s. The usual Italian masculine and feminine endings need to be applied to these nouns; the “o” ending signifies a male child and the “a” ending a female child. For the plural, the usual “i” ending is used for a group of all males or a mixed group and “e” for an all female group.

Remember also that the Italian number “one” changes when modifying a noun. So a family may have un bambino or una bambina.

To make a reservation in an Italian restaurant, it is not necessary to differentiate the bambini from the ragazzi. But Italian hotels do differentiate between children of different ages when booking a room. Most Italian hotels have a room rate that will vary depending on the number of adults who occupy the room. Families traveling with children between the ages of 12-14 (and even up to16 years of age) may be able to receive a family discount (uno sconto famiglia).

In short, it is helpful to memorize the correct Italian for the children in your family when making reservations at a restaurant and hotel to be comfortable and to be sure you are not overpaying for accommodations!

Some variations on the simple conversation we have created so far:

Vorrei fare una prenotazione.	I would like to make a reservation.
Per quante persone?	For how many people?
Un‘adulto/Due adulti	One adult/Two adults
Un bambino/Una bambina Un ragazzo/ Una ragazza	One baby or young child (male/female) One young man/ One young woman
Due bambini/ Due bambine	Two children (group of males or males+females/ group of all females)
Due ragazzi/ Due ragazze	Two boys or [1 boy + 1 girl]/ Two girls

By the way, if you need to cancel a reservation, use the same sentence structure as when you have made the reservation. However, use the verb annullare, and say, “Vorrei annullare una prenotazione,” for “I would like to cancel a reservation.”

Or, if a reservation needs to be changed, use the verb cambiare, as in, “Vorrei cambiare una prenotazione.”

Stating the date in Italian:

To state the date and time of a reservation, we will need to know how to say numbers in Italian up to 31 (assuming reservation is in the present year). If you still need to learn how to count in Italian, purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook or download the PDF for tips on how to remember Italian numbers into the billions.

Below is the sentence structure needed to state the date.

definite article + number + di +month

This is actually a lot easier than it may look! Below are a few examples. You will notice that in English we say, “January second,” for “January 2,” while in Italian the phrasing and word order reads: “the two of January.”

The exception to the above rule is the first day of the month. In this case, the word primo, which means first, must always be used, instead of uno (one).

When writing the date, remember the order of the day and the month are reversed in Italy (as in Europe): dd/mm/yyyy. The days of the week and the months of the year are not capitalized in Italian.

Oggi è il due di gennaio.	Today is January 2.
Domani è il tre di gennaio.	Tomorrow is January 3.
Dopodomani è il quattro di gennaio.	The day after tomorrow is January 4.
Oggi è il primo di agosto.	Today is August 1.

Finally, in everyday conversation, to say, “On Mondays…” referring to something that happens every Monday, just use the definite article il (the) at the beginning of the sentence for all the masculine weekdays ending in ì and la for the feminine Sunday (domenica).

Il lunedì vado al lavoro. / La domenica vado in chiesa.
On Mondays, I go to work. / On Sundays, I go to church.

Stating the time when making a reservation in Italian:

Expressions used to tell time in Italian are given below up to 12 o’clock. For a more detailed explanation of the Italian sentence structure used when telling time, purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook or download the PDF. Note: there is no “o’clock” in Italian. Simply state the hour “it is” for one o’clock or the number of hours “there are” from two o’clock onward. You will need to learn Italian numbers up to 24 to understand the time tables for Italian trains, buses and airlines, which are given in “military time” with the 24 hour clock. Italian museums and theaters also operate based on the 24 hour clock.

È l’una. (It is) one. (1 o’clock)

Sono le due. (They are) two. (2 o’clock)

Sono le tre. (They are) three. (3 o’clock)

Sono le quattro. (They are) four. (4 o’clock)

Sono le cinque. (They are) five. (5 o’clock)

Sono le sei. (They are) six. (6 o’clock)

Sono le sette. (They are) seven. (7 o’clock)

Sono le otto. (They are) eight. (8 o’clock)

Sono le nove. (They are) nine. (9 o’clock)

Sono le dieci. (They are) ten. (10 o’clock)

Sono le undici. (They are) eleven. (11 o’clock)

Sono le dodici. (They are) twelve. (12 o’clock)

One can emphasize the time of day, such as morning, afternoon, evening, or night, by adding the following expressions after the numerical time: di mattina, di pomeriggio, di sera, or di notte, as below.

1,00 (AM) È l’una di mattina. It is one in the morning.

1,00 (PM) È l’una di pomeriggio. It is one in the afternoon.

6,00 (PM) Sono le sei di sera. It is six in the evening.

10,00 (PM) Sono le dieci di notte. It is ten at night.

When the receptionist at a restaurant asks what hour you wish to dine, the question will usually be phrased as such:
A che ora…? (At) what time…?

The response to the question will also use the word at, which will be attached to the definite article (the). Use (l’) for one o’clock and (le) for all other hours to agree with the number of hours in the answer.

A mezzogiorno At noon

A mezzanotte At midnight

All’una. At one o’clock.

Alle sette. At seven o’clock.

All’una e cinque. At 1:05 AM.

Alle sette e mezzo. At 7:30 AM.

Making a Reservation in Italian: Restaurants and Hotels

Now that we know an introductory sentence and how to tell the receptionist at a restaurant or hotel the date and time of our appointment, we can summarize this information in the short conversation below:

Vorrei fare una prenotazione.	I would like to make a reservation.
Per quante persone?	For how many people?
Quattro. Due adulti e due bambini.	Four. Two adults and two children.
Data e ora/orario?	Date and time?
Ristorante: Il cinque di giugno alle otto di sera.	Restaurant: July 5th at 8 PM.
Hotel: Dal cinque al sette di giugno.	Hotel: From the 5th through the 7^th of June.

Restaurants in Italy normally open for dinner at 7 PM and most Italians go out to eat at 8 PM or later. After making a reservation, when one enters the restaurant, all the information the receptionist needs to know can be conveyed in two easy lines:

Buona sera.
Good evening.

Abbiamo una prenotazione per quattro persone alle otto di sera.
We have a reservation for four people for 8 PM.

In colloquial Italian, it is also considered correct to say:
Abbiamo una prenotazione per quattro persone per le otto di sera.
We have a reservation for four people for 8 PM.

For just one person, the following is fine:
Ho una prenotazione alle otto/ per le otto.
I have a reservation for 8 PM

Additional requests may need to be made for hotel reservations. When asking a question of the receptionist, use the “you all” form of avere, which is avete, since you are asking the representative of the hotel if they have what you need. The receptionist will answer in the noi form, and mention “we have” or “we don’t have” what you are requesting.

Example:

Avete una camera singola?
Do you all have a room with a single bed?

Mi dispiace, non abbiamo una camera singola disponibile.
I’m sorry, we don’t have a room with a single bed available.

Siamo al completo/ tutti prenotati stasera.
We are full/completely booked tonight.

Below is a list of vocabulary that includes the type of Italian hotel (l’albergo) you may want to choose and the type of room (la stanza) you may need. A few hotel amenities one might ask about when making a reservation are also included.

Almost all hotels in Italy provide breakfast for their guests gratis (free), so it is not usually necessary to ask if la prima colazione (breakfast) is included in the fee for the room. However, it can be helpful to check the internet for images of the dining room and the food served (along with the types of rooms available) prior to making reservations at a hotel. Italian hotels offer a wide range of morning meals — from a simple continental breakfast of coffee, juice and a pastry, to a large buffet with specialty breads and pastries, eggs, cereal, yogurt, lunch meat and cheeses to choose from.

And just in case things are not quite what you expected during your stay at an Italian hotel, you can always ask for l’albergatore or l’albergatrice (hotel manager, masculine and feminine). If you need help choosing where to make dinner reservations, call la reception (reception/front desk) or visit il concierge (the concierge).

l’albergo	hotel
la pensione il bed and breakfast	boarding house bed and breakfast
l’ostello (della gioventù)	youth hostel
il pernottamento	overnight stay
la pensione completa	room and board (includes three meals a day)
la mezza pensione	room, breakfast, and one meal (half board)

la camera/la stanza	room
la camera singola	room with a single bed
la camera matrimoniale	room with a double bed
le camere adiacenti	adjacent rooms
il letto	bed
il letto supplementare	additional bed
la culla	crib

servizio in camera	room service
la piscina	swimming pool
la sauna	sauna
la vasca idromassaggio	Jacuzzi*
il campo da golf	golf course
il campo da tennis	tennis court

*Italian-American history: Jacuzzi Brothers was a company founded in 1915 by seven Italian-American brothers with the surname Jacuzzi, whose family origins were in Casarsa della Delizia in Northern Italy. They initially developed propellers for the military and experimented with the manufacture of aircraft. In 1956, the company developed a pump that could be submerged under water to provide hydrotherapy. Candido Jacuzzi, third generation in the family, invented the whirlpool bath using the company’s hydrotherapy pump to treat his young son’s rheumatoid arthritis. The Jacuzzi tubs we know today were trademarked in 1968.

Making a Reservation in Italian: Train or Theater

Remember that reservations for the train or theater in Italy are made using the military, or 24 hour clock. Once you have made a reservation, here are a few tips on how to proceed when arriving at your destination:

When boarding a train or entering a theater with a ticket that has a reserved seat, one would have “un biglietto con la prenotazione” or “a ticket with the reservation.”

To say you are checking your seat, use the phrase, “Controllo il biglietto con la prenotazione,” for “I am checking the ticket with the reservation.”

However, the actual seat on a train or theater is referred to as “reserved” as in, “Il posto è riservato.” The seat or room has been booked, and no one else can use it. If someone else has made a prenotazione before you, your request might be denied due to un posto riservato.

Remember to use the verbs cambiare and annullare to change or cancel a reservation, as mentioned in the very first section!

Remember that making reservations in Italian
can enhance your experience every day while visiting Italy!

For “All the Italian you need to know to enjoy your trip to Italy,” click on the links below to purchase my Conversational Italian for Travelers books – Kathryn Occhipinti

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to Make Comparisons in Italian with “Di”

May 4, 2022July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Why not set a goal to learn Italian, starting today, for the year 2022? I will try to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® In these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to make comparisons. Every day we all compare the characteristics of one thing to another — larger vs. smaller, better or worse — often to describe what we prefer. The Italian language uses precise sentence structures and specific prepositions when making comparisons that are not always identical to English. The good news is that Italian is consistent, and it is easy to learn the “Italian way” of thinking to compare the things in the world we live in!

In a prior blog in this series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! – How to Use ‘Di’ in Italian,” we learned that the Italian preposition di can mean “of, from, or by.” Now, we will put di to use in another way — to replace the English word than when making comparisons!

Let’s continue our new series on Italian prepositions with another blog about the essential Italian preposition “di.” If we learn how to use the Italian preposition “di” to make comparisons, we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 56th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the preposition “di”
to make comparisons

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar*

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*The material in this blog has been adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and the reference book “Just the Grammar.”

****************************************

Use “Di” to Compare Italian Nouns
and for Comparisons with Piacere

To speak fluently in another language, it is important to know how to make comparisons. Every day we all compare the characteristics of one thing to another — larger vs. smaller, better or worse — often to describe what we prefer. The Italian language uses precise sentence structures and specific prepositions when making comparisons that are not always identical to English. In this blog, we will explore several ways to make comparisons that use the Italian preposition di. The good news is that Italian is consistent, and it is easy to learn the “Italian way” of thinking to compare the things in the world we live in!

To compare two different nouns — people, places, or things — where one has a superior or inferior characteristic, use the following Italian phrases below. Note that the Italian preposition di will combine with the definite article the (il, la, lo, l’, etc.) according to the usual rules, if a definite article is needed in the sentence.

In this case, the Italian preposition di is translated into English with than. Notice that “the” is often used in Italian but is not needed in English, due to the different way the two languages express possession (see the first example below). If you need a refresher on the Italian preposition di, visit a prior blog in this series, “How to Use “Di” in Italian.”

Also, the translation into English will not match the Italian word for word when making comparisons. English uses the irregular “larger” and “smaller” and therefore the Italian “more large” and “more small” cannot be translated directly into English.

Comparison of Two Different Nouns

più… di	more… than
meno… di	less… than

Comparison sentences with two different nouns (person, place, or thing) are given below. The nouns that are being compared are red.

Pietro ha più soldi di Caterina.	Peter has more money than Kathy.
Caterina ha meno soldi di Pietro.	Kathy has less money than Peter.

La casa di Pietro è più grande della casa di Caterina.	Peter’s house is larger than Kathy’s house.
Firenze è più piccola di Roma.	Florence is smaller than Rome.

This Italian sentence structure using di also works
when making comparisons using piacere between two nouns
that have different characteristics.

Let’s look into how to make comparisons with the verb piacere. Piacere is how Italians say they like something. (If you need a refresher on how to conjugate the verb piacere, visit our blog, “Piacere — How Italians Say, ‘I like it!'”)

Piacere often comes into play to describe how much we like doing something compared to something else. For instance, in a prior blog, “Let’s Talk About… TV and Movies in Italian.” we discussed how to state a preference for one film over another. The two lines below give the correct Italian sentence structure and again use più di and meno di.

Mi piace… (film) più di + definite article… (film).
Mi piace… (film) meno di + definite article… (film).

Mi piace il film La Vita è Bella più delle serie Commissario Montalbano.
I like the film Life is Beautiful more than the series Detective Montalbano.

Mi piace il film Pane e Tulipani meno di La Vita è Bella.
I like Bread and Tulips less than Life is Beautiful.

**********************************************************

Use “Che” to Compare
Italian Verbs, Adjectives and Adverbs

However, to combine two different verbs, adverbs or adjectives where one has a superior or inferior characteristic, or one is liked more than another, substitute che for di. The two lines below use più che and meno che with the verbs correre and nuotare in green, and the adjectives giallo and rosso in brown. Notice that the subject is the same in these comparisons — in this case, the subject is what one likes but of course one can substitute “mi piace” with a noun (person, place or thing).

The English transition when comparing two verbs uses the present progressive tense (-ing verb).

Mi piace correre più che nuotare.
I like running more than swimming.

Mi piace giallo meno che rosso.
I like yellow less than red.

Finally, use più che or meno che if making a comparison that uses a preposition.

Rosa è più contenta con te che con me.
Rose is happier (more happy) with you than with me.

Or use che alone to express a preference.
Preferisco partire il 7 che il 5 di mattina.
I prefer to leave at 7 than at 5 in the morning.

**********************************************************

Use “Di” with
Irregular Adverbs

Comparative sentences that use adverbs are common, since people often discuss how well (bene) — or how badly (male) — something is going. To compare how one action is better or worse compared to another, use the irregular comparative adverbs meglio and peggio with the preposition di and the same sentence structure described in the last section of this blog.

In the examples below, the adverb that is used in the comparison is in brown and its verb in green.

Caterina parla italiano bene.	Kathy speaks Italian well.
Caterina parla italiano meglio di Francesca.	Kathy speaks Italian better than Frances.

Francesca parla italiano male.	Frances speaks Italian badly.
Francesca parla italiano peggio di Caterina.	Frances speaks Italian worse than Kathy.

To express the relative superlative “the best” or “the worst” in Italian, one can simply use the comparative sentence structure we have learned with the Italian phrases “meglio di tutti” or “peggio di tutti.”

Caterina parla italiano meglio di tutti.	Kathy speaks Italian better than everyone.
	Meaning: Kathy speaks Italian the best.

Francesca parla italiano peggio di tutti.	Frances speaks Italian worse than everyone.
	Meaning: Frances speaks Italian the worst.

Meglio is used in the same way when talking about a thing, rather than a person. For instance, to compare a recent film with a well-known TV series, see the example below from our blog “Let’s Talk About… TV and Movies in Italian.”

This film is better than…

Questo film è meglio di + definite article…

Questo film è meglio del Commissario Montalbano, sono sicuro!
This film is better than Detective Montalbano, I am sure.

Equally important are comparisons made with the adverbs very (molto) or little (poco). People have a tendency to make comparisons between doing something more (più) or doing something less (meno). We have seen the Italian adverbs piu and meno in action in the first section as part of the sentence structure for making a comparison. When used with the meaning of “more” or “less,” piu and meno are considered irregular adverbs.

However, when making a comparison in Italian using più or meno with the meanings of more or less, speakers often don’t mention the second term. This is common in every day conversation when both speakers already know the topic under discussion. When the second term in the comparison is omitted, the preposition di is added before più or meno to complete the sentence.

Use di più or di meno, rather than simply più or meno
when the second term of the comparison is not stated.

In the examples below, the adverb used in the comparison is in brown and its verb in green.

Pietro ha mangiato molta pizza.	Peter ate a lot of pizza.
Pietro ha mangiato più pizza di Michele.	Peter ate more pizza than Michael.
Pietro ha mangiato di più.	Peter ate more.

Michele ha mangiato poca pizza.	Michael ate a little pizza.
Michele ha mangiato meno pizza di Pietro.	Michael ate less pizza than Peter.
Michele ha mangiato di meno.	Michael ate less.

To express “the most” or “the least” in Italian, one can simply use the comparative sentence structure we have learned with the Italian phrases “più di tutti” or “meno di tutti.”

Pietro ha mangiato più di tutti.	Peter ate more than everyone.
	Meaning: Peter ate the most.

Michele ha mangiato meno di tutti.	Michael ate less than everyone.
	Meaning: Michael ate the least.

*************************************************

Use “Di” with
Irregular Adjectives

See the irregular comparative adverbs we have just discussed in the previous section in the table below, along with their relative superlative adjectives and phrases.

Adverb		Comparative Adverb		Relative Superlative Adjective/Phrases
bene	well	meglio	better	il migliore	the best
male	badly	peggio		il peggiore	the worst
molto	very	più di più	more	più la maggior parte di il maggior numero di	the most
poco	a little	meno di meno	less	meno il minimo di la minima parte di	the least

Now let’s talk about the relative superlative adjectives in the third column of our table above.

The Best and the Worst in Italian:

Earlier in this blog, we mentioned that to express the relative superlative adjective “the best” in Italian, one can simply use the Italian phrase “meglio di tutti” to state “better than everyone.”

However, when we use the irregular adjective “il migliore” to state someone or something is “the best,” a different sentence structure is required. One might say Italian is more precise than English since Italian expresses the difference between Frances the person and Frances’ knowledge of Italian. In English, this difference is simply understood. (If you need a refresher on how to state possession with the Italian preposition di, visit a prior blog in this series, “How to Use “Di” in Italian.”)

In short, an Italian sentence that uses the adjective migliore must start with the noun that migliore modifies. Once again, we encounter differences in the English and Italian way of thinking — in this case about how to be the best!

Below are examples from the prior section again, with the addition of a sentence with “il migliore” for comparison. The last example also includes “the worst,” or “il peggiore,” which follows the same sentence structure. The adverb that is being compared is in brown and its verb in green. The noun described as “the best” or “the worst” is in red.

Caterina parla italiano meglio di tutti.	Kathy speaks Italian better than everyone.
	Meaning: Kathy speaks Italian the best.
L’italiano di Caterina è il migliore.	Meaning: Kathy’s Italian is the best.

Francesca parla italiano peggio di tutti.	Frances speaks Italian worse than everyone.
	Meaning: Frances speaks Italian the worst.
L’italiano di Francesca è il peggiore.	Meaning: Frances’ Italian is the worst.

The Most in Italian:

Previously in this blog, we mentioned that to express the relative superlative adjective “the most” in Italian, one can simply use the Italian phrase “più di tutti” to state “more than everyone.”

We can also use più in a sentence that starts with a noun followed by quello(a,i,e) to express the idea of “the most.” Use this Italian way of speaking to refer to the greatest quantity of something, measure of something (tangible or intangible), or number of something. The Italian sentence structure is similar to the examples given for how to use migliore and peggiore. English speakers tend to express the same idea in a different way, as noted by the translations below.

Il bicchiere di Marco è quello che ha più vino.	Mark has the most wine in his glass.
Anna è quella della famiglia che è più bella.	Ann is the most beautiful of all of us in the family.
Quest’albero è quello che ha più mele.	This tree is the one with the most apples.

Two other phrases, “la maggior parte di” and “il maggior numero di” can also mean “the most,” regarding “the greatest quantity” and “the greatest number” of something.

Also, “Per la maggiore parte…” is commonly used to say, “For the most part…”

Our original examples are listed below again, with additional ways to say “the most.” Notice how the meaning changes with the use of the last two phrases. Also that “fetta di” is itself a separate phrase, so that di is not combined with the definite article.

Pietro ha mangiato più di tutti.
Peter ate more than everyone/the most.

Pietro ha mangiato la maggior parte della pizza.
Peter ate most (the most part of) of the pizza.

Pietro ha mangiato il magior numero di fette di piazza.
Peter ate most (the most number of) of the pieces of the pizza.

The Least in Italian:

Finally, to say “the least,” one can use “meno” with quello(a) and the same sentence structure as described above for più.

Michele è quello della famiglia che ha mangiato meno pizza.
Michael has eaten the least pizza of all of us in the family.

“Il minimo di” and “la minima parte di” can also be used to describe “the least.” See examples below. Remember to change the ending of minimo(a) to match the gender of the noun that is modified.

Michele ha mangiato meno di tutti.
Michael ate less than everyone/the least pizza.

Michele ha mangiato la minima parte della pizza. Michael ate the least (amount of) pizza.

Michele ha mangiato il minimo del pane. Michael ate the least (amount of) bread.

Remember how to make comparisons with
the Italian preposition “di” in conversation
and I guarantee you will use the Italian “di” every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® The many uses of the Italian verb “Mettere”

April 5, 2022September 4, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Have you set a goal to learn Italian? I will try to help you by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® In these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

For instance, many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. However, often the meaning of an Italian verb will vary from the usual English connotation. And in many situations, the same verb can have several different meanings in both languages, depending on the context. Mettere (along with its reflexive form mettersi) is one of those verbs that is used in many ways in Italian and is important to “put to” good use if you want to speak like an Italian.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb mettere, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 55th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian
use the verb

Mettere

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Let’s Talk About…

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Mettere

The Italian verb mettere and its reflexive counterpart mettersi are used in many colloquial expressions in Italy today. It is important to “put in” the time to learn how to use mettere, both literally and figuratively, if one wants to speak Italian like a native!

The Italian verb mettere is most often translated into English as “to put” or “to place.” It can be used in a simple way, to describe moving an object from one place to another.

Mettere is commonly used with the prepositions a, da, in and su in many Italian expressions that have the connotation of “putting” or “placing” something or someone in a place or situation. One commonly heard expression is, “Metti su l’acqua!” for “Put on the water!” which, of course refers to boiling a pot of water in preparation for making pasta! The Internet also provides another opportunity to use mettere su.

Mettersi a and mettere in are used to relay that an individual is “going to” initiate an action — such as starting to cook dinner or starting a car. Mettersi a can also be used in the impersonal third person to describe an act of nature starting up on its own. Finally, use mettere in to describe the emotional state or situations you have been “put into.”

Italian uses mettersi to describe the act of getting dressed. In English, we combine the verb “put” with the preposition “on” to make “put on” with reference to clothing. The preposition “on” does not have any other purpose than to change the meaning of the verb “put,” in the same way that the reflexive form of an Italian verb is used to modify or even change that verb’s original meaning. Messo, the past participle of mettere, is important to describe what one was wearing in the past. Several examples of how to use mettere and mettersi to describe getting dressed will be given in the next section. For additional information on this topic, visit a previous blog in this series: How We Dress in Italian.

Mettere can be used in the figurative sense, meaning, “I suppose” or “I presume.” Mettere can also be used figuratively to ask how something “looks.” If you are more sure of yourself, use ammetere and admit/confirm whatever is under discussion at the moment.

Use the pronominal verb phrase “mettercela tutta” as an informal way to describe that you’ve “put in” the most effort you can/are doing your best, or to encourage another to “give it their all.”

Finally, many Italian sayings incorporate mettere. Some of the most popular have been listed at the end of this blog.

******************************

Let’s talk about how to conjugate mettere in the present, past, and future tenses before using it in some example sentences. Luckily, mettere is regular in all tenses except for the passato prossimo, due to its irregular past participle, which is messo.

Present tense: Mettere is a regular -ere verb in the present tense. The present tense conjugation is below.

io	metto
tu	metti
Lei/lei/lui	mette
noi	mettiamo
voi	mettete
loro	mettono

Past tense: When used in the passato prossimo to describe a single event, avere is the helping verb and the past participle is messo.

Mettere has a regular conjugation in the imperfetto past tense (mettevo, mettevi, metteve, mettevamo, mettevate, mettevano).

Future tense: mettere is regular in the future tense (metterò, metterai, metterà, metteremo, metterete, metteranno).

1. Use mettere to describe the simple act of moving an object from one place and “putting” or “placing” it in another place.

Mettere is commonly followed by a noun and then a preposition to describe the act of “putting” or “placing” an object somewhere in one’s household.
The singular familiar command form of mettere, which is metti is also important to remember when directing family or friends where to put an object.
The past participle messo is important when one has remembered (or is trying to remember) where they have put an object.
The direct object pronouns “them”(le) and “it”(lo) are red, so as not to confuse them with a verb ending.

Ho messo i piatti sulla tavola per la cena.

I put the plates on the table for dinner.

Brava! Ora, pian piano, metti i bicchieri di cristalleria vicino a i piatti!

Great! Now, carefully place the crystal wine glasses next to the plates!

Ho messo le chiavi nella mia borsa, ma ora non riesco a trovarle!

I put the keys in my purse, but now I can’t find them!

Mettilo di là, in stanza mia.

Put it over there, in my room.

2. Use mettere su to describe “putting” food “on” the stove, to “put on” something in figurative sense, or to “put up a post on” the Internet

Mettere with the preposition su is a commonly used expression in home cooking. For instance, when a family is ready for dinner, one can direct another to “put” a pot of water “on” the stove to boil. No other details are necessary, for every Italian knows that boiling, salted water is essential for making pasta! Specific foods one would like to encourage another to cook can also follow mettere su, and one can be asked more directly simply to make la pasta. Of note: with expressions of this type, the preposition su is not combined with the definite article.
Mettere su is used in common expressions to mean “to put on weight” or “to put (someone) on a pedestal,” just like in English.
Use mettere su in the figurative sense, as in to “put on a show” of something, or to “organize” or “create” an event.
To sound like a native Italian when speaking about the internet, use mettere su or mettere in rete instead of postare for “putting up” with the meaning of “posting” or “publishing on line. Along these lines, “mettere in coppia” means “to copy someone” on an email.

Sono arrivato! Metti su l’acqua!

I’m home! Put on the (pot of) water (to boil to make the pasta)!

Metti su la pasta! / Metti su la carne!

Start cooking the pasta! / Start cooking the meat!

Lui ha meso su pancia quest’anno.

He has put on belly fat this year!

Anna mette su un piedistallo il suo fidanzato Marco.

Ann puts her fiancé Mark on a pedastal.

Lui ha meso su uno spettacolo per tutti ieri sera con i suoi scherzi.

He put on a show for everyone last night with his jokes.

Marco ha messo su un bel viaggio per tutti.

Mark has organized a nice trip for everyone.

Metti su internet una foto del tuo viaggio!

Put up a photo of your trip on the Internet!
Post a photo of your trip on the Internet!

Lei ha messo su un blog su internet questa settimana.

She has put up/posted a blog on the internet this week.

3. Use mettersi a, mettersi in the third person, or mettere in moto to describe initiating an action

Mettersi a is used to tell someone you are “about to/starting to” do something, such as starting to cook dinner. The Italian phrase is [mettersi a + infinitive verb]. The English translation is [to be + going to] when mettersi is used in this way.
Mettersi a followed by an infinitive verb can also be used in the third person to describe an inanimate object or an act of nature starting up something by itself. There is a popular Italian saying, “Da Santa Lucia, il freddo si mette in via,” which means, “From Saint Lucia’s Day, the cold is on its way.” The two verbs that mean “to start,” cominciare and iniziare cannot be used in the third person this way. For a more detailed discussion on the topic of how to use impersonal reflexive verbs, visit a previous blog in this series Impersonal Statements and Reflexive Verbs.: “Come si dice?”
Mettere in moto is a commonly used expression to describe starting a car but can also be used figuratively with the meaning of “to embark on” or “set off on” a journey.

Sono arrivato! Ora mi metto a cucinare la cena.

I’m home! Now I am going to cook dinner.

Finalmente lui si mette a lavorare con noi stamattina.

Finally he is going to work with us this morning.

L’eruzione del vulcano si mette a fare la terza eruzione oggi.

The volcano starts the third eruption today.

L’acqua si mette ad alzarsi a Venezia a febbraio.

The water starts to rise in Venice in February.

Michele mette in moto la macchina.

Michael starts the car.

Dopo aver lasciato Anna, Michele mette in moto una vita nuova.

After leaving Ann, Michael sets off on a new life.

4. Use mettere in and mettere a/di to describe negative or positive emotional states or figurative positions you have been “put into.”

Mettere is often used figuratively. There are many expressions that describe the negative emotions and situations one can be “put into” by completing the phrase “mettere in…” An Italian can be put into a difficult position, doubt, embarrassment, ridicule, risk, danger, or even “to their knees” or “on the run!” On the other hand, to be saved is to be “mettere in salvo.” “Mettere in grado” also has a positive connotation, with the meaning “to enable” or “to assist.” The phrase that means “to be quarantined” is “mettere in quarantena.”
Mettere a or mettere di, conversely, are used in many expressions that describe positive interactions, such as: putting someone at ease, putting things in order, being available to help out, and helping to reach an agreement. Mettere insieme means “to put together” but also “to bring together.” And remember to say, “Sono d’accordo!” for “I agree!” once you have come to an understanding with others!
When describing an event, “mettere in…” can simply mean “to put into play” (gioco) or “to put on a show” (mostra). “Mettere in vendita” means “to put up for sale.”
There are many other common Italian phrases that start with mettere! Listen for how Italians use this versatile verb and you will hear it often!

Mettere in…
	difficoltà discussione dubbio	to put in a difficult position to hinder to bring up for discussion to challenge to doubt to warn (semebody)
	grado	to enable to assist
	imbarazzo	to embarrass to make someone uncomfortable
	ridicolo	to ridicule
	rischio	to put someone at risk to put in danger
	ginocchio	to bring someone to their knees
	fuga quarantena	to put someone on the run to put someone in quarantine

Mettere a…	proprio agio	to put somebody at ease
	posto	to put in order to clean up to put away
	disposizione	to make available
	servizio	to put at one’s disposition
Mettere d’… Sono d’…	accordo	to help reach an agreement I agree!

5. Use mettersi to describe the act of getting dressed

There are several Italian verbs that are used to convey the act of wearing clothing and getting dressed. Mettersi is an important verb to know in this regard. For more information on this topic, visit a previous blog in this series: How We Dress in Italian.

Mettersi can be used to convey three different types of English sentences: “I put on my dress,” “I put my dress on,” and “I put on the dress.” In general, Italian uses reflexive verbs to describe daily actions we all must perform to keep up “la bella figura.” English instead uses a [verb + preposition +possessive adjective] sentence structure. Although the last English example is correct, we most often default to using the first two examples, with the possessive “my.”

Although the sentence structure that describes getting dressed differs in Italian and English, in both cases there is a straightforward formula to follow. For Italian, the reflexive pronoun mi (myself) is placed before the conjugated form of mettersi and the article of clothing to be put on is then placed after the verb. The subject pronoun is omitted, as usual. So the final translation for “I put on my dress” is, “Mi metto il vestito.”

Just remember the simple phrase “mi metto” and replace il vestito with your chosen article of clothing and you will be able to describe getting dressed!

To describe action in the tu (you) form, just conjugate mettersi normally and then add the article of clothing, as in “ti metti.” For the lei/lui (she/he) form, use “si mette,” and so on.

(Io) Mi metto il vestito.	I put on my dress./I put my dress on./I put on the dress.
(Tu) Ti metti l’anello.	You put on your ring.
(Lei/Lui) Si mette le scarpe.	She/He puts on his shoes.

In order to describe what they have worn in the past, most Italians use mettersi and its irregular past participle messo.

Remember to use the helping verb essere for the passato prossimo with the reflexive verb mettersi. And, of course the last vowel of the past participle must agree in gender with the person wearing the clothing, since we are using essere as the helping verb (see the red vowels in the examples). The table below shows how this all works:

Marco si è messo un completo oggi.	Mark wore a suit today.
Maria si è messa una gonna oggi.	Maria wore a skirt today.

6. More figurative uses for mettersi and mettere

Mettersi can be used figuratively to ask how something “looks,” such as the weather or an interpersonal situation.
Mettere can be used in the figurative sense, meaning, “I suppose,” or “I presume” in a compound sentence with a subjunctive mood verb. In the examples below, abbia is the subjunctive for avere and sappia is the subjunctive for sapere (singular first, second, and third persons). These are two helpful verbs to remember, even if one is not versed in the subjunctive mood. If you are more sure of yourself, use ammetere and admit/confirm whatever is under discussion at the moment, also with the subjunctive mood.
Remember that the noi conjugation of a verb is also used in the imperative to mean “let’s.” (See the last example.)

Come si mette il tempo oggi?

How does the weather look today?

Come si mette la situazione con Clara?

How does the situation with Clara look?

Tu sai la situazione meglio di me. Quindi, ammetto che tu abbia ragione.

You know the situation better than me. Therefore, I admit/confirm that you are right.

Mettiamo che Marco sappia più di noi.

Let’s presume that Mark knows more than us.

7. Use the pronominal verb phrase “mettercela tutta” as an informal way to describe that you have “put in your best effort.”

Mettercela is a pronominal verb, recognized by the ce and la tacked on to the end of metter, which is just mettere without the last “e.” Conjugate this verb exactly as you would mettere, then add the pronominal particles ce and la. It’s that simple! The particles ce and la do not change… unless la is placed before an h, when speaking in the passato prossimo with avere as the helping verb. In this case, just drop the “a” from “la” and replace it with an apostrophe, to follow the usual rule of grammar for the object pronoun la. (See examples below.)
The pronominal particles ce and la change the meaning of mettere. “Mettercela tutta” means “to put in your absolute best effort” or “to give it your all,” as in strength and determination, in order to achieve a goal.
The speaker can use the phrase “mettercerla tutta” in the present tense to describe an ongoing effort. “Ce la messo tutta…” means, “I am putting in my best effort.” This phrase is also commonly used in the past tense when the speaker wants to emphasize that the outcome wasn’t for lack of trying. In this case, the passato prossimo conjugation for this completed event is, “Ce l’ho messa…”
Mettercela tutta can be preceded by devo, which means “I must” for an even more forceful statement. In this case, there is no need to conjugate mettercela. Just leave it in the infinitive form, as usual for verbs that follow dovere.
Or, the speaker can encourage another to try as hard as they can and keep making their best effort. Use the familiar command form of mettere, which is metti, and attach ce and la to the end of the verb for “Metticerla tutta!” To stress the importance of the effort needed, precede metticela tutta with, “Dai!” for “C’mon!”
Notice another pronominal verb in our examples, farcela, which in this case means “to succeed.”
Follow these simple formulas for using mettercela to really speak like a native Italian!

Ce la metto tutta. Spero di farcela!

I putting in everything I have! I hope to succeed!

Devo mettercerla tutta questa settimana per trovare un cliente nuovo.

I must focus all my effort this week into finding a new client.

Ce l’ho messa tutta, ma non ho superato l’esame lo stesso!

I gave it my all but I failed (didn’t pass) the exam anyway!

Dai! Dobbiamo vincere questa partita. Metticela tutta!

C’mon! We have to win this match. Give it all you’ve got!

*To make sense of the construction “Ce l’ho messa,” we must remember that the l’ stands in for ” la” and therefore is feminine. La drops its “a” in the passato prossimo before ho, to make l’ho, which is easier to say. Then, this dropped “a” reappears as the new ending for the past participle! These rules are explained in detail in our Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Verbs” book.

8. Common Italian sayings that use mettere

Mettere i soldi in cassa = to make money (literally to put money in the cash register)

Mettere a pane e acqua = a harsh punishment (literally to give someone only bread and water)

Mettere i piedi in testa a = walk over/trample over somebody

Mettere il carro davanti ai buoi = put the cart in front of the horse

Mettere in piazza qualcosa = to be open about something/lay your cards on the table

Mettere in primo piano = make a priority of something/ emphasize/focus on

Mettere il becco in = to stick your nose in/interfere

Mettere bocca su tutto = always commenting on/have an opinion on everything

Mettere i puntini sulle “i” = dot your i’s/ be nitpicky

There are even more ways to use the Italian verb mettere than space in this blog!
Practice listening for the Italian phrases that use mettere and
try them out in your own Italian conversations!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to Use the Preposition “Di” in Italian

March 2, 2022March 18, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Let’s start our new series on Italian prepositions with the essential Italian preposition “di.” If we learn how to use the Italian preposition “di,” which can be translated into the English prepositions “of, from,” and “by,” we will truly sound like a native Italian!

This post is the 54th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian use

the preposition “di”

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar *

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

*This material adapted from the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

****************************************

Use “Di” to Say
Where You are From

One of the most frequent questions asked during polite conversation is, “Where are you from?” This is expressed in Italian with the verb to be (essere) and di, which is translated in English to the preposition from in this situation. The Italian sentence structure is, “From where are you?”

di + dove + essere

from + where + to be

In proper English, of course, we would say, “Where are you from?” Although the Italian sentence sounds awkward in English, the rule in Italian is never to end a sentence with a preposition; in effect, the English sentence likely sounds awkward to Italians! The answer in Italian will also use di and is followed by the town of one’s birth. Notice that the subject pronoun io (I) is usually left out of the answer, as it is understood from the ending of the verb. For instance:

Di dov’è Lei?	Where are you (polite) from?
Di dove sei?	Where are you (familiar) from?
Sono di Chicago.	(I) am from Chicago.

Note: there is another way of asking where someone is from in Italian — the phrase, “Da dove viene?” This phrase uses the conjunction da with the verb venire, and is a more general reference to where one has been living in prior years. The answer is “Vengo da…” for “I am from…” This phrase will be discussed in more detail in a future blog about the preposition da.

Expressing Possession with “Di”

In Italian, the word di is used to expresses possession, and in this situation, di means of. To describe ownership of a car in Italian, for instance, one would use di to create the sentence: “Questa è la macchina di Pietro.”

We can translate the Italian way of thinking into English with the following sentence: “This is the car of Peter.” To the American ear, though, this sounds formal and too wordy. We have the option of expressing this thought with [apostrophe + the letter s] (‘s) tacked onto the name of the person doing the possessing. The English version of our example above would be, “This is Peter’s car.” In Italian, though, if we want to use someone’s name to describe possession, we have only the very first sentence structure: “Questa è la macchina di Pietro.”

General Uses for “Di”

1. In order to express authorship of a work, Italians use di, which in this case corresponds to the English word by. Also use di with the verb conoscere to describe “knowing someone by” their appearance or their name. Notice we may render these ideas a bit differently in English.

8 ½ è un film di Frederico Fellini.	8 ½ is a film by Fredrico Fellini.
Conosco Marco di vista, ma non ci siamo mai incontrati.	I know what Mark looks like, but we have not (ever) met.
Conosco Marco di nome, ma non ci siamo mai incontrati.	I know Mark’s name, but we have not (ever) met.

2. In order to express what something is composed of, Italians use di. In English, we say “made of,” and in Italian the past particle fatto can be used as an adjective to make the corresponding phrase “fatto(a,i,e) di.” However, in Italian the adjective fatto is optional and the entire meaning of the phrase is usually conveyed just with the preposition di. This is why it is so important to learn how to use Italian prepositions correctly. A short, simple preposition can change the meaning of an entire sentence!

Note: for all metals that are not gold (oro) and for the cloth velvet (velluto) use the preposition in instead of di. These exceptions are simply by convention.

Questa sedia fatta di legno è dura.	This chair made of wood is tough.
Ho comprato un camicia di seta oggi.	I bought a silk blouse today.
Mio marito mi ha regolato un’anello d’oro.	My husband gave me (as a gift) a ring made of gold.

—–but-—-

Questa è una scultura in bronzo.	This sculpture is made of bronze.
La vecchia poltrona è stata rivestita in velluto.	The old chair was restored with velvet cloth.

There are also many descriptive nouns in English that are composed of two nouns, one of which acts as an adjective to describe the other. Some of these descriptive noun/adjectives must be linked with di in Italian if the descriptive term represents what the main item is made of. For instance the two English words that represent one item from the example silk blouse given above is translated into Italian as camicia di seta. The single English word sandcastle is il castello di sabbia in Italian, or “the castle made of sand.” Descriptive nouns will be covered in more detail in a future blog about da.

3. In order to relate that a topic is being talked about, or discussed/argued about, Italians use di to link certain verbs with the subject matter under discussion. The most common verbs used in this way are: parlare (to talk), discutere (to discuss) and trattarsi, (concerning or regarding).

For the verb parlare, the Italian preposition di is translated as “about” in English. When a verb follows parlare di or discutere di to complete the sentence, Italian simply adds an infinitive verb after di. English uses [about + gerund of the verb]. You remember, of course, that the gerund is the commonly used “-ing” form of a verb in English. Below are two examples using parlare and discutere.

Caterina parla di viaggiare, non di politica.	Kathy talks about traveling, not about politics.
Marco discute di politica troppo!	Mark discusses/talks about politics too much!

Trattarsi di is generally used in the third person as “Si tratta di…” to ask and answer the question “What is this regarding?” Parlare often starts a conversation of this type, when one person asks to speak to another about something, someone, or an action. Two example conversations are below; the first could take place between a boss and a worker, the second perhaps between two family members. To add a feeling of urgency or importance to the conversation, the examples start with “devo” for “I have to.” Notice again how the Italian preposition di is always placed at the beginning of a question, just like in the first section examples that ask where someone is from.

Devo parlarti.	I have to talk to you.
Di cosa si tratta?	What is this regarding?
Si tratta del tuo stipendio.	It is regarding your salary.

Devo parlarti di una cosa importante;	I must speak to you about something important;
…si tratta di Paolo.	…it’s concerning Paul.
…si tratta della mia macchina vecchia.	…it’s regarding my old car.
…si tratta di viaggiare in Italia insieme.	…it’s regarding traveling in Italy together.

To complete our discussion, note a change in use of the preposition di required in Italian: when talking about a person or something by name. Instead of di, the Italian preposition su is used in the following construction: [su + definite article + noun]. As mentioned previously, if the preposition di were used before a name, the translation would be “by.” For a book, for instance, use of di would mean the person had written the book, rather than the book was about the person under discussion.

Sto leggendo un bel libro su DaVinci. Ho guardato un bel film su DaVinci.	I am reading a good book about DaVinci. I watched a good film about Da Vinci.
Ho imparato molto sul Rinascimento all’Università.	I’ve learned a lot about the Renaissance at college.

4. The verb pensare has a special relationship with the preposition di. When saying, “I think so,” to agree with someone, or “I don’t think so,” to disagree, one might say pensare is being used as a verb of discussion, as in #3 above. In this situation, the conjugated form of pensare is followed by “di si” or “di no.”

Also use [pensare di+ infinitive verb] when thinking about an action you may want to carry out. But, use [pensare a +noun] when thinking about a person, place, or thing.

For the sake of completeness, it should be mentioned that [pensare che + subjunctive mood verb] is used to link to phrases with different subjects in a single sentence. However, use of the subjunctive mood is beyond the scope of this blog!

Penso di si.	I think so.
Penso di no.	I don’t think so.
Penso di viaggiare in Italia l’anno prossimo.	I am thinking about traveling to Italy next year.

—–but-—-

Penso a te, a Rosa, e alla vostra famiglia.	I am thinking about you, Rose, and your family.
Penso a Roma ogni giorno.	I think about Rome every day.
Penso a tutti i bei vestiti fatti a Roma.	I am thinking about all the beautiful dresses made in Rome.

5. To mention an acquaintance’s age in conversation, use di as part of a descriptive phrase about the individual before giving their age in years. The phrases “all’età di (at the age of) or “a girl/woman, boy/man, etc. of precede the age type of sentence. This sentence structure also works for the age of an inanimate object, such as a bottle of wine!

Lei è una signora di ottantadue anni.	She is a lady of 82 years.
Ho una bottaglia di vino rosso di 10 anni.	I have a ten-year-old bottle of red wine.

6. To say something happened “in” or “at” a particular time of day, use di before the Italian words for morning (mattina), afternoon (pomeriggio), evening (sera), or night (notte).

Ci vendiamo di mattina.	We’ll see each other in the morning.
Di pomeriggio, vado al lavoro.	In the afternoon, I go to work.
Io e mio marito ceniamo alle sei di sera.	My husband and I eat dinner at 6 in the evening.
“Buona notte!” dice mia figlia preciso alle undici di notte.	“Good night,” my daughter says at precisely 11 o’clock at night.

7. To say something happened “in” the summertime or wintertime, use di before the Italian words for summer (estate) and winter (inverno). Use the Italian preposition in for spring (primavera) and autumn (autunno). This is by convention.

D’estate, andiamo spesso alla spiaggia.	In the summer, we go to the beach often.
Andiamo in montagne a fare sci d’inverno.	We go to the mountains to ski in the winter.
In primavera, tutti i fiori fioriscono.	In springtime, all the flowers are in bloom.
In autunno, le foglie cadono dagli alberi.	In autumn, the leaves fall from the trees.

Common Expressions with “Di”
Avere and Essere

There are several Italian phrases used to express one’s feelings that require the preposition di to link the conjugated form of the verb avere with the infinitive form of the verb of action that will complete the sentence. In English, replacing the Italian preposition di with the translation of is variable. In some cases, the English infinitive verb will be used alone or the English expression may use a gerund instead of an infinitive verb. You must really learn to think in Italian to use these expressions! Some examples of how to use these phrases are given in the last column. How many more can you think of?

avere bisogno di	to have need of	Ho bisogno di… riposare.
		I need to rest.
avere paura di	to be afraid/have fear of	Ho paura di… guidare.
		I am afraid of driving/to drive.
avere voglia di	to feel like	Ho voglia di… mangiare una pizza.
		I feel like eating a pizza.

There are several expressions of feeling that use the verb essere and take the preposition di prior to adding an infinitive verb to complete a sentence. Again, in English, we do not always use an additional preposition for these phrases, aside from the word to that is already a part of the infinitive verb.

essere certo di	to be certain of	Sono certo di… ricordare il tuo nome.
		I am sure to remember your name.
essere sicuro di	to be certain of	Sono sicuro di… ricordare questo posto.
		I am sure to remember this place.
essere contento di	to be happy to	Sono conteno di… stare qui.
		I am happy to be here.
essere felice di	to be happy to	Sono felice di… incontrare mio cugino oggi.
		I am happy to meet my cousin today.
essere fortunato di	to be lucky to	Sono fortunato di… mangiare questa cena.
		I am so lucky to be eating this dinner.
essere libero di	to be free to	Sono libero di… viaggiare.
		I am free to travel.
essere stanco di	to be tired of	Sono stanco di… volare.
		I am tired of flying.

When to Use “Di”
to Link Italian Verbs

When we link two Italian verbs together in the present tense, the first verb, or helping verb, is conjugated and the second verb, or action verb, is left in the infinitive form. For instance, “Tomorrow, I have to go to work,” is a simple statement that can be translated as, “Domani, devo andare al lavoro.” “I have to” meaning, “I must,” is the first person present tense of dovere, which is devo. Andare means “to go.”

Other helping verbs, such as potere and volere work the same way in the present tense. In fact, using the polite first person of potere, which is può, followed by an infinitive verb, is a simple way to ask for what you need while traveling in Italy. Once you remember “Mi può…” no further conjugation is necessary using this method Just tack on the infinitive verb for what you need and finish the sentence!

Some examples that use [può + infinitive verb] useful for traveling are given below:

Mi può portare a Piazza Navona?	Could you take me to Piazza Navona?
Mi può parlare in englese?	Could you speak to me in English?
Mi può chiamare un tassì?	Could you call a taxi for me?

Although the traveler to Italy can get by with simple phrases, it is important to understand how to create a more complex sentence if one truly wants to be fluent in Italian. This is where the preposition di becomes important. There are some action verbs that need to be followed by the Italian preposition di before an infinitive verb is added to complete the sentence.

Most of the verbs that must use di prior to an infinitive verb describe speaking, thinking, or an activity that needs to be completed. We have already discussed parlare and pensare. Other actions, such as trying to (cercare di), finishing (finire di), and waiting (aspettare di) need the preposition di to join them to an additional verb of activity.

In the case of cercare, the meaning will change when di is used to link this verb to another. By itself, cercare means to look for, but cercare di means to try to. For the Italian speaker, it is natural to insert the preposition di after certain verbs; it just sounds correct when one has grown up with the Italian language. For the Italian student, listening to Italian will also be important. Listen for the word di when these phrases come up in Italian movies and songs and soon it will become natural to say these phrases correctly!

Accettare	to accept	Accetto di… lavorare duro perché è necessario.
		I accept working hard because it is necessary.
Aspettare	to wait	Aspetto di… ricevere un regalo dal mio fidanzato.
		I am waiting to receive a present from my fiancée.
Cercare di	to try to	Cerco di… studiare bene.
		I am trying to study well.
Credere	to believe	Credo di… avere ragione.
		I believe I am correct.
Decidere	to decide	Decido di… andare a visitare la mia amica mentre in giro.
		I decide to visit my friend while I am out and about.
Dimenticare	to forget	Non dimenticare di… prendere la medicina! (command)
		Don’t forget to take the medicine!
Dire	to say/tell	Dico di… no. Non sono d’accordo.
		I say no. I don’t agree.
Finire	to finish	Finisco di… lavorare per oggi alle sei di sera.
		I finish working every day at 6 PM.
Occuparsi di	to work at	Mi occupo di… medicina.
		I work as a doctor/nurse/in the medical field.
Ordinare	to order	La mamma ordina ai bambini di… studiare.
		The mother orders the children to study.
Pensare	to think	Penso di… si.
		I think so.
Pregare	to pray/beg	Prego di… andare in Italia l’anno prossimo.
		I pray to go to Italy next year.
Ricordare Ricordarsi	to remember	Ricordati di… prendere la medicina! (command)
		Remember to take the medicine!
Scegliere	to choose	Sceglo di... prendere un caffé con un biscotto ogni mattina.
		I choose to take coffee with an Italian cookie every day.
Scrivere	to write	Scrivo di… viaggiare.
		I write about traveling.
Smettere	to stop	Smetti di… bere il vino! (command)
		Stop drinking the wine!
Sperare	to hope	Spero di… trovare la strada giusta.
		I hope to find the right road.

Remember how to use the Italian preposition “di” in conversation
and I guarantee you will use the Italian “di” every day!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s Talk About… Dating in Italian

January 25, 2022July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Why not set a goal to learn Italian, starting today, for the year 2022? I will try to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

February is the month we in America celebrate Valentines Day, a holiday that originated in Italy and is still popular there today, as described in last years’ February blog “How to Say… ‘I feel’ on Valentines Day with Sentirsi.” Since the Italian phrases that describe a romantic relationship are not usually listed in textbooks, I’ve focused on Italian novels and movies to learn how Italians talk about falling in love. Once I discover a phrase about dating or romance, I check with my native Italian friends and instructors for authenticity and to verify how the phrase is used today.

I’ve managed to piece together the following information about how Italians talk about dating and romantic relationships in this blog, some of which is reprinted from my blog for advanced students of Italian: Italian Subjunctive (Part 4): Italian Hypothetical Phrases of Love. After reading this introductory blog, you may want to check out the dialogue I have created in Italian Hypothetical Phrases of Love, where these phrases are put to use!

If we learn a few phrases to describe dating in Italian, we will be able to talk to others about the person who has become the “special someone” in our life!

This post is the 53rd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian describe

Dating in Italian

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

**************************************

Let’s Talk About… Dating in Italian

Today in America, we “date,” “go out on a date,” or refer to two people who are “dating,” from the first romantic encounter until they become married. After marriage, a couple can still go out on “date nights.” But be careful when translating American romantic experiences into Italian! The English verb “to date” as used in America today to refer to a romantic relationship does not have a literal translation in Italian.

Of course, “to court” a woman was common in past centuries, and the Italian language still reflects this. When a man tries to show he is interested in a woman, the phrase “fare la corte a…” is used from the verb corteggiare or “to court.” For instance, “Marco fa la corte a Maria,” is translated literally as “Mark is courting Maria,” with the connotation that he is “pursuing” her or trying to “win” her love.

The verb corteggiare can also be used figuratively, between any two adults, to describe when one is trying to cajole, flatter, or entice another, usually to “convince” them to do something. “Marco corteggia il proprietario alla festa perché vuole un aumento di stipendio.” “Mark flattered the owner at the party because he wanted an increase in his salary.”

There is a verb still in use in Italy today that refers to a man seducing, or “winning over,” a woman: “conquistare… ” such as, “Marco ha conquistato Maria.” If Maria lets herself be “won over” or “captivated” by Marco, she can use the phrase, “Mi lascio conquestare da Marco.”

*********************

In today’s vernacular, if one wants to allude to the fact that they are dating, or “seeing” someone special in the Italian language, the following phrases can be used:

“Mi vedo con un ragazzo.” “Mi vedo con una ragazza.”	“I’m seeing a boy.” “I am seeing a girl.”
“Esco con un ragazzo.” “Esco con una ragazza.”	“I’m going out with a boy.” “I’m going out with a girl.”
“Il ragazzo con cui ho/avevo appuntamento/date.” “La ragazza con cui ho/avevo appuntamento/date.”	“The boy with whom I have/had an appointment/date.” “The boy with whom I have/had an appointment/date.”

It should be noted that ragazzo and ragazza also translate into boyfriend and girlfriend. To let another know you have a boyfriend or girlfriend, simply say, “Ho un ragazzo,” or “Ho una ragazza.”

Also, you’ll notice that from the above translations that the Italian noun appuntamento does double duty, since it corresponds to both appointment and date. In English, the word appointment is generally used to refer to a business meeting or a formal meeting in general, often between people who do not know each other well. The noun “date” can be used to describe a general meeting between friends, and is always used when one wants to imply a romantic interest.

Italian can be used to refer to regular romantic “get togethers” before marriage with the phrase “to go out with someone”—“uscire con qualcuno.” “Io esco con Marco ogni sabato sera,” means, “I go out with Mark every Saturday night,” and implies, “I go out on a (romantic) date with Mark every Friday night.”

The Italian verb “frequentarsi,” which means “to spend time with each other” can also be used to describe a special relationship. Frequentarsi can also be translated as “to see each other” or “to date each other” in the romantic sense or simply to “to hang out with” friends. The non reflexive form, frequentare, means “to frequent” or “to visit” a certain place.

Some examples of how to use the Italian verbs that describe a special relationship are listed in the table below. Remember that ci and si in these examples stand for “each other.” For a refresher on how to use reciprocal reflexive verbs, visit our blog in this series called Italian Reciprocal Reflexive Verbs.

Marco e io ci frenquentiamo.	Mark and I are spending time with each other. (romantically) Mark and I are seeing each other (romantically) Mark and I are dating each other.
Noi ci frequentiamo il sabato sera.	We are seeing each other/dating every Saturday night.

Marco e Maria si fequentano.	Mark and Maria are dating each other.
Loro si frequentano ogni venderdì sera.	Mark and Maria see each other/ going out on a date every Friday night.

Marco frequenta il Ristorante Paolo il sabato.	Mark frequents/goes to Ristorante Paolo on Saturday nights.
Marco si frequenta con i suoi amici in piazza quando non ha niente da fare.	Mark hangs out with his friends in the piazza when he doesn’t have anything to do.
Marco si fequenta con Maria spesso.	Mark often hangs out with Maria. (as friends)

Marco e i suoi amici frequentano il Ristorante Paolo.	Mark and his friends hang out at Ristorante Paolo.
Loro si frequentano ogni vender sera.	They see each other every Friday night. (as friends)

Finally, to express a close romantic relationship in Italian, we can use the word “rapporto.” Any relationship in general is considered a “relazione.” But be careful, as an “affair” outside of marriage is also a “relazione,” whereas “affari” refers to more general personal and business “affairs.”

*********************

Now that we have learned the Italian needed to talk about dating, let’s review how to say, “I love you” to that special someone on Valentines Day.

“Ti voglio bene” is an old Italian expression that is still used for both platonic and romantic love. The meaning of this phrase is not easily translated into English, but it is used often in Italy to express one’s feeling of closeness to another. This expression has its origin in the Italian phrasal verb “volere bene (a qualcuno).” “Ti voglio bene” can been translated as, “I care for you” or,”I wish you well,” but really, it is the way Italians tell others that they love them.

The expression “ti voglio bene” can be used between family members and friends, as well as a boyfriend and girlfriend or husband and a wife. Watch some older Italian movies, and you will hear this expression often!

Mi voui bene?	Do you care for/about me?
Ti voglio bene.	I care for/about you.

The verb amare, which means “to love” is reserved for romantic love — that one true love held between a couple who are dating, fiancée and fiancé, or wife and husband. Remember the simple expressions with amare in the table below to use with someone special this Valentines Day!

Mi ami?	Do you love me?
Ti amo.	I love you.
Ti amo per sempre.	I will always love you.

If you learn to talk about dating in Italian
and how to use the verb amare
you will really have learned to think in Italian!

Buona Festa del San Valentino!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Impersonal Statements and Reflexive Verbs: “Come si dice…?”

January 5, 2022July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 6 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently in 2022?

Now that 2022 is upon us, why not set a goal to learn Italian, starting today, for the year 2022? I will try to help you with this goal by posting blogs n this series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! “® These blogs describe how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

For instance, did you know that Italians still use impersonal constructions? By “impersonal constructions” I mean sentences that describe what “one” is doing, in order to make a general statement.

A common example of an Italian impersonal construction is the phrase, “Come si dice…” This simple Italian phrase is used by every Italian student at one point or another when asking for help with their vocabulary. The literal translation of “Come si dice…?” is, “How does one say…” In spoken English, this construction is only rarely used today, and usually in formal situations. Instead, to generalize, English speakers often use the collective “you” — directed both at no one in particular and at everyone at the same time! Especially in an informal conversation, “Come si dice…” would be translated as, “How do you say…?” But in Italian, when one generalizes, he or she cannot replace the “si” for “one” with “tu” for “you” the way we do in English.

If we learn how to use impersonal phrases in Italian, with Italian reflexive verbs, we will be able to ask general questions, give directions, and even express how mechanical objects work!

This post is the 52nd in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
in Italian are Impersonal Statements
that describe general interactions
and use

Italian Reflexive Verbs

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Italian Reflexive Verbs

Knowing how to use Italian reflexive verbs is extremely important for conversation, since Italian reflexive verbs often describe activities and emotions that are encountered every day. Reflexive verbs are recognized by the –si ending of their infinitive form. Let’s review a bit about reflexive verbs before going on to discuss how they are used to make impersonal statements.

Direct reflexive verbs, as their name suggests, are used when an action refers back directly to the speaker in the subject of the sentence. For example, if one wants to describe the everyday act of falling asleep in Italian, they must use the reflexive verb addormentarsi. Italian reflexive verbs are also used to express the English concept of “to get,” as we’ve seen in a prior Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day blog. When one “gets mad,” they must express this concept in Italian with the verb arrabbiarsi. Consider also the every day activity of “getting dressed,” with mettersi, which was the focus of another blog in this series, How We Dress in Italian.

All Italian students are introduced to a direct reflexive verb of the –arsi type at the very beginning of their studies, when they learn how to introduce themselves with the reflexive verb that means “to be named,” which is chiamarsi. There are, of course, also reflexive verbs of the –ersi and –irsi types as well, such as mettersi (to put on clothes/to get dressed) and divertirsi (to enjoy oneself).

The necessary component of all reflexive verbs is the reflexive pronoun (myself, yourself, himself, etc.), which is what actually corresponds to and refers directly back to the subject.

To review, the reflexive pronouns are:

mi – myself
ti – yourself (familiar)
si – yourself (pol.)/ herself, himself, itself, oneself

ci – ourselves
vi – yourselves (familiar)
si – themselves

To conjugate a reflexive verb, start with the subject pronoun and follow with the corresponding reflexive pronoun. However, remember that for conversational Italian the subject pronoun is usually left out of the sentence and is only sometimes included for emphasis.

Our first table below starts us on our way to the complete conjugation of a reflexive verb by pairing each subject pronoun with its corresponding reflexive pronoun:

io	mi	I	myself
tu	ti	you (familiar)	yourself
Leilei/lui	si	you (polite)she/he	yourselfherself, himself, itself, oneself

noi	ci	we	ourselves
voi	vi	you all	yourselves
loro	si	they	yourselves (polite) themselves

All we need to do now is to add our verb to create the action! Notice that the English translation adds the reflexive pronoun after the verb, while in Italian the reflexive pronoun comes before the verb (except for familiar commands). This may take a little time to get used to!

Let’s conjugate divertirsi — to have fun / enjoy oneself — as an example:

io	mi	diverto	I enjoy myself
tu	ti	diverti	you (familiar) enjoy yourself
Leilei/lui	si	diverte	you (polite) enjoy yourself she/he enjoys herself, himself

noi	ci	divertiamo	we enjoy ourselves
voi	vi	divertite	you all enjoy yourselves
loro	si	divertono	they enjoy themselves

How to Make Impersonal Statements
Italian Reflexive Pronouns

Generalizations in the third person, called impersonal statements, are used sparingly in English but are common in Italian. An Italian impersonal statement is created by using the reflexive pronoun si, along with a verb in the singular or plural third person (either the lei/lui or the loro form).

As noted from the conjugation tables from the first section…

when the reflexive pronoun si is used in the singular third person, the reference is to a single, unnamed person, and the subject can be translated as “one.”
when the reflexive pronoun si is used in the plural third person, the reference is to a group of unnamed people and the subject can be translated as “they.”

In both situations, the speaker is referring in general to someone,
without a individual or group of people in mind.
It makes sense, then, that these statements are called “impersonal statements.”

A common example of an Italian impersonal statement is the phrase, “Come si dice…” This simple Italian phrase is used by every Italian student at one point or another when asking for help with their vocabulary. The literal translation of “Come si dice…?” is, “How does one say…” This construction is only rarely used in spoken English today, and usually in formal situations. Instead, when an English speaker wants to generalize, he or she often uses the collective “you” — directed both at no one in particular and at everyone at the same time! Especially in an informal conversation, “Come si dice…” would be translated into English as, “How do you say…?” But in Italian, when one generalizes, he or she cannot replace the “si” for “one” with “tu” for “you” the way we do in English.

Some generalizations that come up frequently in Italian conversation are listed below. The direct Italian translation is given first, with the English phrase more commonly used to express the same idea in the following translation. You may want to remember the first example when asking for help with your Italian!

Come si dice…?	How (does) one say…? How do you say…?
Come si dicono…?	How (do) they say… How (do) you all say...

In Italia, si parla italiano.	In Italy, one speaks Italian. In Italy, Italian is spoken.
In America, si parlano molte lingue.	In America, they speak many languages. In America, many languages are spoken.

Si può fare?	Can one do it? Can it be done? Can you do it?
Si sa che…	One knows that… You know that…
Non si sa mai!	One never knows! You never know!

Impersonal statements can also be used to describe a rule and are often found in Italian sayings or proverbs.

Si deve obbedire alla legge.	One must obey the law. You have to obey the law.
Non si paga per parcheggiare la domenica.	One doesn’t pay for parking on Sundays. You don’t pay for parking on Sundays.

Qualche volta, uno si trova a un bivio della propria vita.	Sometimes, one finds himself at a crossroads of his life.
Vivendo s’impara.	One learns by living.

Use Italian impersonal statements when giving directions, such as when talking a friend through a recipe for a favorite dish. For instance, to describe how to make your family’s Italian tomato sauce, use the common verbs aggiungere (to add) and mettere (to put) in the third person singular with the reflexive pronoun “si” to describe how “one” cooks. For examples, see the first table below. In English, of course, we default to “you” when giving directions to someone in conversation, and this is reflected in the translation. To follow are a few pointers about how to cook pasta to go with that delicious pot of tomato sauce!

Prima, si taglia a pezzi una cipolla e uno spicchio d’aglio.	First, one chops an onion and a clove of garlic into small pieces. First, you chop…
Poi, si mette la verdura in pentola con l’olio di oliva.	Then, one puts the vegetables in a pot with olive oil. Then, you put…
Li si cuoce, si mescola bene, fino a quando tutti e due sono morbidi.	One cooks them, sautéing well, until both are soft. You cook them…
Si aggiunge la passata di pomodoro, l’acqua, e il basilico.	One adds tomato puree, water, and basil. You add…
Si agguinge un po’ di sale e pepe.	One adds a little bit of salt and pepper. You add…
Si cuoce la salsa per almeno un’ora, e si mescola bene.	One cooks the sauce for at least one hour, stirring well. You cook the sauce… and you mix…

Per la pasta perfetta, si deve seguire questo metodo:	For the perfect pasta, one must follow this method: For the perfect pasta, you must…
Si mette una pentola grande con tanta acqua sui fornelli.	One puts a large pot with lots of water on the stovetop. You put…
Si copre e si riscalda l’aqua fino a bollire.	One covers it and heats up the water until it is boiling. You cover it… you bring the water to boil…
Si aggiunge una manciata di sale, si ricopre la pentola, e si riscalda l’aqua fino a fare bollire di nuovo.	One adds a handful (lots) of salt, one covers the pot, and brings the water to boil again. You add… you recover the pot… and you bring the water to boil…
Quando l’acqua sta bollendo, scoperchiare la pentola e aggiungere la pasta. Si deve mescolare bene a questo punto.	When the water is boiling, uncover the pot and add the pasta. One must mix well at this point. You must mix well…
Si fa bollire la pasta secondo le istruzioni nella scatola della pasta.	One must boil the pasta according to the directions on the pasta box. You must boil the pasta…
Quando la pasta è al dente, scolare l’acqua e aggiungere la salsa!	When the pasta is “al dente,” drain the water and add the sauce!

How to Describe Movement with
Italian Reflexive Verbs

When an inanimate object does something automatically, this idea is rendered in Italian using the third person of a reflexive verb. In many situations, Italian uses a reflexive verb to describe movement when English relays the same idea by combining the verb with a preposition, such as “on” or “up.” Note that in English, the preposition is added only to change the meaning of the verb. In the same way, Italian uses a reflexive verb, with its reflexive pronoun, to change the meaning of a verb.

Let’s take a simple, everyday situation at home for our first example: “Ann turns on the light.” The verb that means “turn on” in Italian is accendere and the Italian translation is, “Anna accende la luce.” However, electric lights can be programmed to turn on automatically. In English, I can say, “The automatic light turns itself on when I enter the room.” Although the preposition “on” is required in English, the reflexive pronoun “itself” is optional. To convey the same idea, it is mandatory in Italian to use the reflexive verb accendersi: “La luce automatica si accende quando entro la stanza.”

In short, English sometimes uses a third person reflexive verb to describe an automatic action but often does not, instead relying on the addition of a preposition. Italian is more consistent, with a reflexive counterpart to most verbs of action that refer to mechanical movement.

Another simple action that requires a reflexive verb in Italian and a verb + preposition combination in English is that of “rising up” or “going up.” The verb alzare means “to raise” or “to lift” something. “I lifted the box onto the table,” is a simple sentence that translates as, “Ho alzato la scatola sul tavolo.” But if a person “gets up” in the morning, the action becomes reflexive and the verb alzarsi is needed. Similarly, a bird or an inanimate object such as a kite can “rise up” or “go up” into the sky and the verb alzarsi once again comes into play.

Below are some examples of how Italians use reflexive verbs to describe movement of inanimate objects. Notice exceptions to what we have just discussed: the verb cominciare (to start) and cadere (to fall) are not reflexive when speaking about an inanimate object. However, mettersi a followed by an infinitive verb can be used in the third person to describe an inanimate object or an act of nature starting to do something by itself. Also, the verb smettere (to stop) is not used in a reflexive way, although fermare, which also means to stop, does have a reflexive counterpart: the verb fermarsi.

La luce automatica si accende quando entro la stanza.	The automatic light turns (itself) on when I enter the room.
Le luci della casa si accendono ogni sera.	The house lights turn (themselves) on every night.
Le luci della casa si spengono ogni sera.	The house lights turn (themselves) off every morning.

L’acensore si apre.	The elevator opens.
L’acensore si chiude.	The elevator shuts.

Il treno comincia l’itinerario.Il treno si mette ad andare velocemente.	The train starts its route.The train starts to go fast.
Il treno si ferma automaticamente.	The train stops automatically.

Il gabbiano si alza e vola via.	The sea gull rises up and flies away.
L’aquilone si alza nelle nuvole.	The kite rises into the clouds.
Le foglie cadono per terra ogni autunno.	The leaves fall to the ground every autumn.

How to Describe Nature and Life with
Italian Reflexive Verbs

We all know the forces of nature well, as they act every day to create the environment in which we live. Since nature is an inanimate being, the actions of the weather are often given with reflexive verbs in Italian. Listen closely to the Italian news and you will hear about how a volcano in Sicily finally stopped erupting, or how the sea has begun to rise in the Venetian lagoon — all described in the third person with Italian reflexive verbs!

For the common phrases that describe what weather “it” is making, such as, “Fa caldo oggi” (“It is hot today”) or “Fa freddo oggi” (“It is cold today”), Italians use fare in the third person without an indirect object pronoun. But to say, “It is getting late,” or “It is getting dark,” we use the reflexive farsi for the phrases, “Si fa tarde” or “Si fa buio.” (For more of these common phrases, visit our blog in this series, “Lets talk about… the weather in Italian!”)

In the same way, it is often necessary to use Italian reflexive verbs when speaking about abstract forces that can “act” on our lives. Life itself is often spoken of as “moving” slowly or quickly. However, there is no reflexive verb for passare, so time can be seen as “passing by” without the addition of a reflexive pronoun. (For more ways to use passare, visit our blog in this series, “The Many Uses of Passare.” )

In short, to understand the nuances of how to use reflexive verbs to describe actions of the weather or make generalizations about life, it is helpful to listen to native Italians as much as possible. In this way, it will eventually become natural to use Italian verbs the way Italians do!

The examples discussed above are listed below.

L’eruzione del vulcano in Sicilia si è fermato.	The eruption of the volcano in Sicily has stopped.
L’acqua a Venezia si è alzata due metri e si sta alzando ancora!	The water in Venice has risen 2 meters and is still rising!
Fa caldo oggi. / Fa freddo oggi.	It is warm today. / It is cold today
Si fa tarde. / Si fa buio.	It’s getting late. / It is getting dark.

Nella campagna, la vita si muove lentamente.	In the country, life moves slowly.
Il tempo passa lentamente quando si aspetta.	Time passes slowly for one who waits (when one is waiting for something.)

Listen carefully to Italians when they speak
and I guarantee you will hear
Italian impersonal statements and Italian reflexive verbs
every day!

Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s Talk About… An Italian Christmas Celebration

Photo of two Conversational Italian for Travelers books downloaded on smart phones with smiling snow man next to the books.

December 7, 2021July 14, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 3 Comments

Buon Natale a tutti voi!

Christmastime is a magical time in Italy. The colorful decorations and holiday lights that adorn every Italian town bring with them a feeling of celebration that inspires children and adults alike. Italians of Jewish faith celebrate Chanukah in December as well, with glowing candles that bring their own special beauty to the December evenings. Chanukah was celebrated earlier this month, and if you’d like to learn more about how Chanukah is celebrated in Italy, please visit the blog “Our Italy — Celebrating Chanukah in Italy.

But what really makes the December holidays special,
both in Italy and around the world? For most, it is the gathering of family and friends.

For 2021, my hope is that all people who celebrate the Christmas holiday (le vacanze di Natale) or another holiday of their faith this December, can gather with their loved ones. As of this writing, there is a good possibility that the new normal will continue to expand to include Christmas parties (le feste di Natale) and gatherings for Chanukah dinners, instead of online meetings where people are together, yet distant. Extended families and friends should be able to celebrate the joy of being in each others’ presence and even have the opportunity to introduce new friends to old ones during the holidays for 2021.

This post is the 51st in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE.

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian

are used during the
Christmas Holiday Season

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

******************************

Christmas in Italy

There are several important holidays that Italians celebrate during the Christmas season (periodo di Natale), which begins on December 8th with L’Immacolata and ends on January 6th with L’Epifania. The feast of Santa Lucia on December 13th is also an important holiday in northern Italy and this saint day is celebrated with candles, special pastries, and presents for children who have been good during the year.

Young girl with ring of candles on her head celebrating Santa Lucia Day — Young girl celebrating Santa Lucia Day

See the table below for a list of the important celebrations that take place in Italy during the Christmas season and some common phrases that Italians use to wish each other “happy holidays.” We first encountered these phrases in our blog What I wish… for the holidays!

L’Immacolata	Feast of the Immaculate Conception: Catholic holiday that celebrates mother Mary.
Vigilia di Natale Natale	Christmas Eve Christmas
Buon Natale! Buone Feste!	Merry Christmas! Happy Holidays!
Auguri di buon Natale!	Best wishes for a merry Christmas!
Tanti Auguri! / Auguri!	Best wishes!
Il biglietto di auguri Natalizi Regalo di Natale	Christmas greeting card Christmas gift

L’ultimo dell’anno	New Year’s Eve
La notte di San Silvestro	December 31st is the feast day of San Silvestro for the Catholic church.
Capodanno	New Year’s Day
Buon anno nuovo! Buon anno!	Happy New Year! (used most often)
Felice anno nuovo!	Happy New Year!
L’Epifania	Epiphany: Catholic holiday that celebrates when “Wise Men” visited the baby Jesus. In Italy, gifts are exchanged on this day. Italian tradition holds that a friendly witch, La Befana, brings gifts to children on this day, although Santa Claus is also celebrated.

******************************

An Italian Holiday Party Conversation

When at a holiday party where Italian is spoken,
one will surely encounter the introductory phrases and polite responses below.

Introductions:

The most common Italian introduction at a gathering is a familiar phrase — a phrase used when a person introduces one of their friends to another. For example, let’s assume Pietro and Caterina are friends. Pietro wants to introduce Caterina to another of his friends, Paolo. He will do this with the simple sentence, “Caterina, ti presento il mio amico Paolo.” Pietro uses the informal “ti” since he is already friends with Caterina, the person to whom he is speaking.

In a more formal situation, Pietro may want to introduce someone he does not know well to one of his friends. In this case, if Pietro is addressing either a woman or a man, he will need to use “Le” (“polite you” indirect object pronoun). To stay in the polite mode of conversation, Pietro will likely introduce one guest to another using their last names with a polite title, such as il Signor (Mr.), la Signora (Mrs.), or la Signorina (Miss).

Keep in mind that in English we do not use the same sentence structure as in Italian, so the English translation of these phrases will not follow the Italian word for word. We may start out with “Let me” or “I would like to” and then add “introduce you to…” Also, in an informal situation, English speakers in America tend to omit the “Let me introduce you to” altogether! Instead, an English speaker might just say something like, “Kathy, meet my friend Paul.”

Several options to use when making an introduction are listed below. Remember to use the direct article before the title for a formal introduction!

Caterina, ti presento il mio amico Paolo.	Kathy, let me introduce you to my friend Paul. Kathy, meet my friend Paul.
Signor Rossi, Le presento il Signor Manzini.	Mr. Rossi, let me introduce you to Mr. Manzini.
Signora Rossi, Le presento il Signor Manzini.	Mrs. Rossi, let me introduce you to Mr. Manzini.
Signorina Rossi, Le presento il Signor Manzini.	Miss Rossi, I would like to introduce you to Mr. Manzini.

Responses:

At first glance at the table below, the responses to an Italian introduction may seem a bit complicated, because they have several variations. The most important key to understanding which of these variations to choose is the formality of the situation.

In the initial phrases in this table, “Piacere di conoscerla“ and “Piacere di conoscerti,“ the difference between the two phrases will depend on whether one is speaking in the polite (pol.) or the familiar (fam.). The polite phrases are given first in our example list, as it is the norm in Italy to use the polite form with a new acquaintance. The familiar form of this phrase is often be used between younger people, who tend to be less formal, and may also be appropriate among older adults of the same age or social status. If you need a refresher on when to use polite and formal Italian phrases, please refer to our blog Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! – Getting from polite to familiar with “Dare del tu.”

The other reason there are so many variations to learn when introductions are made is the Italian use of masculine and feminine nouns and adjectives. Every Italian student learns early on that nouns and adjectives must agree in gender and number.* At first, it may not be obvious that one is using an adjective at the beginning of the sentence, “Lieto(a) di conoscerla/ti,” since these phrases are used so often in Italy that the subject and verb of the sentence, “I am…” have been left out! The full sentence, “I am delighted to meet you,” though, makes it clear that the verb essere (to be) is in use, and of course the ending for the adjective lieto(a) for delighted must reflect back to the gender of the speaker to make sense.

The easiest thing for the Italian student to do, of course, is to pick out the phrase that corresponds to their own situation and memorize the endings. But these phrases provide a good opportunity to learn how to change Italian endings quickly and easily and can provide a pattern for more complicated sentences. For the examples below, the nouns, adverbs, and prepositions are black, the verbs are green, the polite/familiar pronouns red, masculine adjectives blue, and feminine adjectives brown.

Piacere di conoscerla. Piacere di conoscerti.	Pleased to meet you (pol.). Please to meet you (fam.).
Piacere mio.	The pleasure is mine.
Lieto di conoscerla. Lieta di conoscerla. Lieto di conoscerti. Lieta di conoscerti.	Delighted (masc. speaker) to meet you (pol.). Delighted (fem. speaker) to meet you (pol.). Delighted (masc. speaker) to meet you (fam.). Delighted (fem. speaker) to meet you (fam.).
Molto lieto! Molto lieta!	Delighted! (masc. speaker) Delighted! (fem. speaker)
Sono molto contento di vederla. Sono molto contenta di vederla. Sono molto contento di vederti. Sono molto contenta di vederti.	(I) am very happy (masc. speaker) to see you (pol.). (I) am very happy (fem. speaker) to see you (pol.). (I) am very happy (masc. speaker) to see you (fam.). (I) am very happy (fem. speaker) to see you (pol.).
Sono felice di rivederla. Sono felice di rivederti.	(I) am happy to see you (pol.) again. (I) am happy to see you (fam.) again.

*Italian nouns are assigned a gender, either masculine or feminine. Italian adjectives, which modify nouns, will change their endings to match the noun modified. In general, Italian nouns will end in -o if masculine and -a if feminine. A noun that ends in -e can be either masculine or feminine. There are, of course, many exceptions to these rules!

******************************

Below is an excerpt from the Conversational Italian for Travelers story found on the website www.learntravelitalian.com. This short dialogue will allow us to put together all we have discussed about what to say when introducing and meeting others at an Italian holiday party. In this dialogue, Pietro introduces his cousin Caterina to his friends Luigi and Paolo. This simple conversation uses phrases that are repeated over and over again at Italian gatherings of every type.

At the end of the dialogue printed here is a common transition phrase that takes Caterina into the familiar form with Pietro’s friends, “Diamoci del tu, per favore!” We have discussed this phrase and others used to make the transition from a polite to a formal situation in a previous blog, “Getting from Polite to Familiar in Italian with ‘Dare del tu!'” With this simple line, a friendly conversation can truly begin! To listen to the remainder this conversation in its entirety, just click on the link It’s a Party!

Pietro:	Caterina, ti presento il mio amico Paolo.
	Kathy, (I) introduce to you (fam.) my friend Paul.

Caterina:	Piacere di conoscerla.
	(It is a) pleasure to meet you (fam.).
	(Caterina uses the polite form for a person she has just met, even though Paolo is Pietro’s friend.)

Pietro:	E questo è il mio amico Luigi.
	And this is my friend Louis.

Caterina:	Piacere.
	(It is) a pleasure.

Luigi:	Piacere mio. Io sono professore dell’italiano, come Pietro.
	Paolo è un medico.
	(The) pleasure is mine. I am (an) Italian professor, like Peter.
	Paul is a physician.

Caterina:	Molto interessante.
	Very interesting.

Paolo:	Io sono di Novara, una città vicino a Milano.
	Diamoci del tu, per favore!
	I am from Novara, a town near to Milan.
	Let’s use the familiar form of you with each other, please!
	(Paolo officially asks if he can use the familiar, or “tu” form with Caterina.)

Caterina:	Va bene. Volentieri!
	O.K. Gladly!

Warm wishes for a Merry Christmas
and a Happy New Year
filled with treasured time
together with family and friends!

Auguri a tutti voi!

Our Italy — Celebrating Chanukah in Italy

Images of all the things for a traditional Chanukah celebration are presented with "Happy Hanukkah" in the center of the image.

November 27, 2021November 27, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Ciao a tutti! Since 2020, I have been posting the series of blogs called, “Our Italy.” In this series, I share bloggers’ experiences of Italy, a country whose culture has captivated the world for thousands of years. I think now is the time to share these memories, especially since now some of us have started to return, inspired anew by the Italian people and their land.

Today I am happy to share a blog of my own about how Italians celebrate Chanukah. Read on for a bit of history about how the Jewish community was established in Rome and the special way they celebrate Chanukah today.

Afterwards, please enjoy a recipe for how to make fried chicken courtesy of the Italian Jewish community in Rome, Pollo Fritto alla Giudia, a delicious main dish that is traditional for Chanukah and can be enjoyed any time of the year. Watch me make this special fried chicken on a short Instagram video if you like at Conversationalitalian.french!

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

//www.instagram.com/embed.js

**********************************************************

Chanukah in Italy

The Jewish holiday Chanukah, also known as the festival of lights (le feste delle luci), is celebrated for a period of 8 days, and on today’s calendar falls sometime in the month of December. On the Hebrew calendar, (based on the phases of the moon), Chanukah begins on the evening of the 25th day of the ninth month, which is the month of Kislev. This holiday is also commonly spelled Hanukkah when translated into English from the Hebrew (l’ebraico) characters. During Chanukkah, those of Jewish faith set aside eight days to commemorate the rededication of the Holy Temple in Jerusalem in 165 BCE. It is said that a miracle occurred at that time, when only a small amount of Holy oil found in the temple, enough for only one day, burned for instead for eight days.

The date of the Chanukah celebration will change each year on the Gregorian calendar we use today (which is based on the sun). In 2021, Chanukah will begin the evening of November 28 and end on the evening of December 6. It should be no surprise that Chanukah is celebrated in Italy, since the first Jewish settlers arrived in Rome from their homeland in Israel as far back as 160 BCE, after fleeing from the rule of the Syrian King Antiochus. The Jewish settlement in Rome is probably the oldest outside of the Middle East in the world. In 1555, by decree of Pope Paul IV, the Jewish people of Rome (gli ebrei) were enclosed within the walls of a portion of Rome situated across the Tiber River. This area (quartiere ebraico) came to be called the Jewish ghetto (ghetto) in reference to the poor living conditions at the time, but it was, and still is, the center of Jewish life in Rome today. Other ancient Jewish settlements can be found in Venice, Milan, Florence, Palermo and in many other cities in Sicily.

Image by kristyna_pixel from Pixabay

To celebrate Chanukah, those of the Jewish faith gather with the family each evening before dinner to say prayers and light a special candelabra with nine arms, called a Menorah (candelabro ebraico a nove bracci). The ninth candle, from the tallest arm in the center of the Menorah, is lit first and then used to light the other eight. One additional candle is lit each night, until the entire Menorah is glowing on the last night. In Rome, there is a grand, 20 foot tall Menorah in the Jewish section at Piazza Barberini that is lit every year and followed by a street party with dancing. At home, children are typically given one present (un regalo) each evening and play with a Driedel, which is a type of spinning top (una trottola) with Hebrew letters on each side. To wish someone a Happy Chanukah in Italian simply say, “Auguri!” (Best wishes!), “Buon Chanukah!” or “Felice Chanukah!”

**********************************************************

The Italian Chanukah Dinner

As with all holidays celebrated in Italy, there are traditional Italian foods served at Chanukah dinners each night, with an emphasis on fried foods, including Italian fried chicken (Pollo Fritto). This fried chicken is first marinated in olive oil with garlic and lemon, then rolled in flour and dipped in beaten egg to create a light coating before frying. See below for the recipe and a link to conversationalitalian.french to watch a video as I fry up this simple but delicious way to make fried chicken.

Brisket (la punta di petto) is also popular. Simple accompaniments include applesauce, bread, and dairy products, such as milk, cheese, and sour cream.

Special Italian side dishes (contorni) popular for Chanukah have existed for centuries in the Roman Jewish culinary history and include artichokes and eggplants fried in olive oil and garlic (Carciofi alla Giudia and Melanzane alla Giudia). Unfortunately for those of us who live outside of Italy, the variety of Italian artichoke that is necessary to make Carciofi alla Giudia is not usually available. This particular variety of artichoke is small, and all leaves are tender, so it can be flattened and then fried whole.

Traditional dishes served throughout the world for Chanukah are also served in Italy, and include latkes, or potato fritters (Frittelle di Patate) and blintzes, or fried crepes filled with cheese. (Crepes al Formaggio Fritte).

A typically Italian Chanukah dessert is a pie with ricotta and cherry or chocolate chip filling (Torta di Rocotta). Other popular Italian desserts include fried donuts, poppy seed cookies shaped like stars, or fried bread shaped like a diamond and flavored with anise and raisins (Fritelle de Chanuka).

**********************************************************

Pollo Fritto alla Giudia

(Roman Style Fried Chicken)

Bowl of crispy, golden brown fried chicken made Roman style. — Fried Chicken Roman Style for Chanukah — crispy, golden brown and ready to serve.

Ingredients
(Serves 4)

One frying chicken, cut into serving pieces
Olive oil for frying

For the marinade:
1/2 cup olive oil
1 large clove of garlic, chopped finely
1 lemon, juiced
1 bunch of fresh parsley, chopped
salt and pepper

For the coating:

flour to coat the chicken
2 large eggs

Method

Rinse the frying chicken and pat dry. (Note: make sure to use a frying chicken, which will have a breast that is small enough to finish cooking at the same time as the rest of the chicken pieces.)

Cut the frying chicken into serving pieces as follows: (1) separate the legs from the thighs, (2) Cut each breast along the breast bone lengthwise and then in half crosswise to make 4 pieces of breast meat total, (3) cut the tips off the wings and discard the tips.

Make the marinade by combining all ingredients and pour over the chicken pieces. Roll each piece of chicken so it is coated with the marinade and then let rest in the refrigerator for 1 hour.

Remove the chicken, rinse off the marinade and pat dry.

Set two shallow dishes next to each other, one with flour and the second with 2 eggs. Lightly beat the eggs with a fork.

Heat oil halfway up a large (10-12″), deep frying pan. (A deep fryer works as well, of course, if you have one.) Check that the oil is hot enough for frying by sprinkling with a tiny drop of water. When the water fizzles, the oil is ready. Do not over heat the oil or it will start to smoke.

Salt and pepper the chicken lightly. Then dredge in flour. Shake off excess flour and then roll in egg mixture.

Immediately put into the hot oil and fry, turning every 5 – 10 minutes to make sure the chicken cooks evenly.

Cooking time will vary between 30 and 40 minutes, depending on the temperature of the oil and piece of meat. Generally, wings will cook the most quickly, then drumsticks, thighs, and breasts. I always pierce thicker pieces with a thin knife to make sure juices run clear and are safe to eat.

Cook until chicken coating is a dark, golden brown.

Remove from heat, pat with paper towels and then drain on more paper towels or on a baking rack if you have one.

Sprinkle with a pinch of salt if desired.

Serve your fried chicken while hot with applesauce and potatoes of your choice!

Visit www.learntravelitalian.com for more of my Italian and Italian-American recipes, cultural notes and advanced Italian language blog posts updated monthly. Click on the link “our blog” in the upper right hand corner to reach blog.Learn Travel Italian.com.

Thanksgiving Appetizers for an Italian-American Dinner

Still life with pumpkins and a basket and Black Eyed Susans in a vase

November 19, 2021November 19, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Thanksgiving appetizers — a few bites to nibble on while the main meal is being prepared — are great for guests and keep up a cook’s energy in the kitchen as well!

The Italian method of topping a slice of crusty Italian bread with a savory treat works well for Thanksgiving. Below are two recipes for crostini toppings that can be prepared ahead of time. The first is a white bean puree and prosciutto with a drizzle of balsamic vinegar. The second crostini topping is my version of a liver appetizer that I had once during lunch at a farmhouse in Tuscany, using turkey liver and caramelized onions.

If you have a chance during this busy time, leave a note and let me know what your Italian-American Thanksgiving will be like this year. Does your family make pasta along with the turkey? Or even skip the turkey entirely?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you!
Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

Buona Festa del Ringraziamento!
Happy Thanksgiving!

*****************************************

Thanksgiving Appetizers

Crostini with turkey liver and caramelized onions

Bake the crostini:

Slice the bread thinly and brush with olive oil.
Rub a piece of garlic on the bread or brush a very little bit of garlic in the jar on the bread.
Bake in the oven at 400° until the edges brown.

Caramelize the onions:

For 1 medium onion: Cut the onion into thin, small crescents as follows:
Cut the onion crosswise. Put cut side down and cut in half lengthwise. Continue to cut slivers of onion lengthwise to form small, thin crescents of onion.
Put the onion slices into a frying pan with 1 Tb butter, 1 Tb olive oil, and a pinch of salt.
Cook on low heat, turning occasionally, about 20 minutes, until onions have completely softened and lightly browned.

Cook the turkey liver:

Rinse the turkey liver and put it into a small frying pan with 1 Tb butter and 1 Tb olive oil.
Add a small clove of garlic that has been crushed.
Heat the liver and garlic over medium high heat, turning to brown the liver and then reduce heat to medium/medium low in order to cook through.
Remove garlic.
When the liver is just cooked through (cut in half to check), add 2 Tbsp. red wine vinegar or Marsala wine and turn the liver in the vinegar.
Let cool. Break up the liver with a fork into small crumbles.

Assemble the crostini:

For each piece of garlic toast: Put onions and then cover with liver crumbles.

Crostini with turkey liver and caramelized onions

Bake the crostini as in the first recipe

Prepare the beans:

Put the following into a small saucepan:
1 (15 oz.) can of white beans, 4 fresh sage leaves, 1 clove of garlic, smashed (skin off)
1 Tbsp. olive oil
Salt/white pepper
A little water, and more water as needed for cooking.
Bring to a boil and then lower to a simmer.
Cook about 30 minutes or more so flavors can blend.
Cook off most of water by the end so puree won’t be too thin.
Off heat, remove garlic. Puree beans.
Adjust salt/pepper and swirl in 1 Tb extra virgin olive oil.

Assemble the crostini:

For each piece of garlic toast:
Put white bean puree on bottom of toast and then top with prosciutto curled up.
Drizzle with balsamic vinegar.

Buona Festa del Ringraziamento!
Happy Thanksgiving!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® The many uses of the Italian verb “Tenere”

November 2, 2021July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2021?

I have been trying to help you by posting blogs in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day! “® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

Many Italian verbs have a similar use to those in English, which simplifies translation from one language to the other. However, many times the meaning of an Italian verb will vary from the usual English connotation. And in many situations, the same verb can have several different meanings in both languages, depending on the context. Tenere (along with its reflexive form tenersi, and the pronominal verb tenerci) is one of those verbs that is used in many ways in Italian and is important to “keep in mind” if one wants to use it correctly.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb tenere, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 50th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in conversation

use the Italian verb
tenere.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Let’s Talk About…

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Tenere

The Italian verb tenere has a wide range of meanings and its use lends a bit of sophistication to one’s Italian. It is important to “keep in mind” the nuances of the verb tenere to create sentences as we would in our native language.

The Italian verb tenere is most often translated into English as “to hold” or “to keep.” It can be used in a simple way, to describe holding an object or holding another’s hand. As in English, the verb tenere can also mean “to hold,” with reference to capacity, as in how many objects or people can occupy or be contained in a certain space or place. The word “hold” in English can also take on the connotation of “to support” something (as a column holds up a roof) or someone (as a fan supports his team). So it is with tenere, which can mean “to support.”

Tenere is an important verb to use when dining at an Italian restaurant to tell someone to “keep the change.”

When the verb tenere is combined with the phrase “conto di,” it takes on different shades of meaning. [Tenere + conto di] is used to describe the concepts of keeping something in mind, keeping track of something, or being aware of something. The phrase can also have the connotation of considering or taking to heart important issues.

Combining the verb tenere with “conto che,” as in [tenere + conto che], adds yet another nuance to the original ideas of “to keep” or “to hold,” and is used to convey the idea of to consider. [Tenere in conto + noun] means to consider something.

Tenersi, the reflexive form of tenere, is also often used in the important everyday phrase “keep/stay in contact” and is a nice way to end a conversation or an email with a friend. Tenersi is often used when giving another instructions to hang/hold onto something or abide by/follow certain rules and regulations. If your emotions get the best of you and you can’t keep from laughing or crying, then use [tenersi + da] to get this point across!

There are many common Italian expressions that combine tenere with the preposition “a.” A few of these expressions will be listed in example sentences below.

When the verb tenere is combined with the preposition “a” and an adverb or adjective, as in [tenere +a +molto] the meaning changes once again. [Tenere + a] means to care about someone or something. You might think of using tenere in this way as being similar to the English phrase “to hold someone dear.” Consider also that the adjective tenero(a) is used to describe the following characteristics: tender, sensitive, or warm. For full emphasis, the pronominal verb tenerci followed by “a” [tenerci + a] can be used to stress the importance of something. A description of pronominal verbs and their uses is beyond the scope of this blog, but rest assured, if you add the pronoun “ci” before “tengo a,” you are telling someone that something is important to you!

Finally, in some important Italian phrases, tenere can be used interchangeably with the verb avere, and take on the meaning of “to have.”* Using tenere in this manner is a subtle way to emphasize that you are “keeping” or “holding close” the thing that you have.

Let’s talk about how to conjugate tenere in the present, past, and future tenses before using it in some example sentences.

Present tense: tenere is an irregular -ere verb in the present tense, since it has an irregular stem in all forms but the noi and voi forms. The present tense conjugation is below. The irregular stem is in brown:

io	tengo
tu	tieni
Lei,lei,lui	tiene
noi	teniamo
voi	tenete
loro	tengono

Past tense: When used in the passato prossimo to describe a single event, avere is the helping verb and the past participle is tenuto.

Tenere is regular in the imperfetto past tense (tenevo, tenevi, teneva, tenevamo, tenevate, tenevano).

Future tense: Tenere is irregular in the future tense due to it’s irregular stem.

io	terrò
tu	terrai
Lei,lei,lui	terrà
noi	terremo
voi	terrete
loro	terranno

1. Use tenere to describe the simple act of holding something or holding someone’s hand.

Tenere can also be used to refer to the capacity of something, or “how much” a certain thing or a place can hold.
Tenere can mean “to support” something or somebody.

Tieni stretto questo biglietto; tienilo in mano; non lasciarlo!

Hold this ticket tightly; hold it in your hand; don’t lose it!

Mi piace tenere la mano del mio fidanzato quando camminiamo in piazza.

I like to hold my fiance’s hand when we take a walk in the piazza.

L’Allianz Stadium a Torino tiene 41,507 spettatori.*

The Allianz Stadium in Turin holds 41,507 spectators.

Ho raccolto tutti i fiori che posso tenere in una mano!

I have collected all the flowers that I can hold in one hand!

Vengo da Turino. Tengo per la Juve / Tifo per la Juve. **

I am from Turin. I support/root for the Juventus soccer team.

Le mure sono molto vecchie. Grazie di Dio le colanne tiene il tetto!

The walls are very old. Thank goodness the columns support the roof!

* Regarding the use of tenere with the meaning of “to have/to own/to possess”: the verb tenere is used mostly in the south of Italy, while in the north they would simply use the verb avere (example: Lo stadio ha 41,507 spettatori.).

**Regarding the use of tenere to describe support for a sports team: “tengo per” is used in the south of Italy. “Tifo per” is used in the north.

2. Use tenere to mean “to keep” — the simple act of keeping something in a place.

In a restaurant, a common phrase spoken by the customer to the waiter in both English and Italian is, “Keep the change!” In Italian, the polite command (subjunctive) form of tenere is used for this phrase, often with the addition of the Italian word “pure“ which serves to encourage the server to keep the tip. Use of the subjunctive is beyond the scope of this blog. Just memorize this simple phrase, which should come up often!

Tengo gli attrezzi per cucinare di là.

I keep the cooking utensils over there.

Tenga pure il resto!

Keep the change, please!

3. Use [tenere + conto di] with the figurative meanings listed below.

to keep something in mind
- [tenere a mente] also means “to keep something in mind”
to keep track of something
to consider (See also #4, listed below)
- [tenere in conto + noun] and [tenere conto che] also mean “to consider”
- “non tenere in sufficiente considerazione a…” means
  “not to give sufficient consideration to…“
to take to heart

Ho dovuto tenere conto di tutte le regole che tu mi hai detto al lavoro.

I have to keep in mind all the rules you told me at work.

Tieni conto dei clienti e dagli quello che vogliono!

Keep track of the clients and give them what they want!

Terrò conto del fatto che il gruppo ha lavorato molto quando gli darò gli incentivi.

I will consider that the group has worked hard when I give them the bonuses.

Mi raccomando, tieni conto di quello che io ho detto!

I insist/demand/ (that you) take to heart what I have said!

Ho tenuto conto di tutto che tu hai detto. E sono d’accordo!

I’ve considered all that you have said. And I agree!

4. Use [tenere + conto che] or [tenere in conto + noun]

for “to consider.”

“non tenere in sufficiente considerazione a…” means
“not to give sufficient consideration to…“
[tenere conto di] can also mean “to consider” (See #3).

Devo tenere conto che ci sono molte opinioni in questo gruppo prima di prendere una decisione.

I have to consider that there are many opinions in this group before making a decision.

Devo tenere in conto anche le altre regole.

I must also consider the other rules.

5. Use the reflexive verb tenersi to ask someone to “keep/stay” in touch or give a command to “follow/abide by” a rule.

Other translations of tenersi include “hang onto” and “hold onto”.
[Tenersi + da] can also be used to express the phrase “to keep from…” doing something, such as laughing or crying. In this case, tenere is often combined with the verb riuscire, which means “to manage to,” and further emphasizes the effort one has put into trying to “keep from” doing something. To learn more about how to use the verb riuscire, visit another blog in this series: “The Many Uses of the Italian Verb “Ruscire.”

Teniamoci in contatto!

Let’s keep in touch (with each other)!

Ragazzi, tenetevi al regolamento o non vincerete la partita!

Boys, follow the rules or you all will not win the game!

Tieniti il tuo cappello; è molto ventoso oggi!

Hang onto your hat; it’s very windy today!

Tieniti alla ringhiera bambini!

Hold onto the handrail, children!

Questo film è molto triste. Non riesco a tenermi dal piangere.

This film is very sad. I can’t manage to keep from crying.

Quello attore era molto divertente. Non riuscivo a tenermi dal ridere.

That actor was very funny. I couldn’t keep from laughing.

6. Common Italian phrases with [tenere + a]

Tenere a bada = Tieni a bada i tuoi animali domestici.

To keep under control = Keep your pets under control.

Tenere a cavezza = Marco tiene a cavezza i suoi figli.

To keep someone under one’s thumb =Mark keeps his children under his thumb.

Tenere a freno = La famiglia di Anna tiene a freno tutte le ragazze.

To keep a tight rein on = Ann’s family keeps a tight rein on all the girls.
To hold back

Tenere a battesimo = Anna teneva a battesimo la sua nipote.

To sponsor a child at baptism = Ann sponsored her niece at the baptism.
To be a godfather or godmother Ann became her niece’s godmother.

Tenere a distanza = Maria tiene a distanza da Marco perché non le piace.

To keep at a distance = Maria stays away from Mark because she doesn’t like him.

Tenere a balia = Marco teneva a balia questo lavoro
perché lui è pagato a ore.

To drag out = Mark dragged out this job
To take longer than necessary because he was paid by the hour.

Tenere a pane e acqua =Marco tiene a pane e acqua Maria oggi.

To punish somebody =Marco punished Maria today.
(lit. to keep somebody on bread and water)

Tenere a pigione = Caterina tiene a pigione la sua casa in campagna ai suoi cugini.

To have as tenants =Kathy is renting her house in the country to her cousins.
To rent

Tenere aggiornata = Marco tiene aggiornato Maria sulle notizie ogni giorno.

To keep somebody updated =Marco keeps Maria updated on the news every day.
To keep somebody posted/in the loop about something

Tenere all’oscuro di = Marco teneva all’oscuro Anna dalla notizia.

To keep somebody in the dark about something =Mark kept Ann in the dark about the news.

Tenere alto il morale = Marco ha tenuto alto il morale della sua squadra anche
se stavano perdendo

To lift up someone’s spirits = Mark lifted up the spirits of his team even when they were losing.

Tenere alta la bandiera = Teniamo alta la bandiera della nostra città.

To honor your homeland or city = We honor/bring honor to our city.
(lit. to hang the flag high)

7. Use [tenere + a + adverb/adjective] or [tenerci + a] to describe caring about something very much

Remember another way to talk about platonic love and caring among family members and friends is to use the verb volerci, with the phrase, “Ti voglio bene.” For a review of the many ways to express one’s feelings of love, visit our blog in this series: “How to Talk About Relationships and Love in Italian.”
[Tenerci + a] can also be used in an introductory phrase when the speaker wants to emphasize the importance of what they will talk about or what they have done. Therefore, this phrase is often followed by the verb dire or fare.

La mamma tiene molto ai suoi bambini.

The mother cares very much for her children.

La mamma ci tiene a loro.

The mother cares very much for them.

Ci tieni a me?

Do you care about me?

Si! Ci tengo a te!

Yes! I care about you!

Ci tengo a dire che studiare la cultura è l’unico modo di capire un altra lingua.

It’s important to me to say that studying the culture is the only way to understand another language.

Ci tengo a fare la cosa giusta.

It’s important to me to do the right thing.

8. Use the tenere in place of avere for certain expressions.

Avere famiglia / tenere famiglia = Ho/Tengo una famiglia con tre figli a Roma.

To have a family =I have a family with three children in Rome.

Avere sotto il braccio / tenere sotto il bracchio =Ho/Tengo il pane sotto il braccio e cammino a casa.

To carry underarm =I carry the bread underarm and walk home.

Avere in serbo / tenere in serbo =Ho/Tengo una speciale bottiglia di vino per te.

To set something aside =I have set aside a special bottle of wine for you.

Avere in serbo / Tenere in serbo =Ho/Tengo una sorpresa per te!

To have something in store for someone (figurative) =I have a surpise for you!

Remember how to use the Italian verbs tenere, tenersi, and tenerci in conversation
and I guarantee you will use these verbs every day!

Our Italy – How to Celebrate “The Day of the Dead” in Sicily, by Ettore Grillo

October 25, 2021October 25, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Kathryn Occhipinti, MD, for Conversational Italian for Travelers books

Ciao a tutti! Since 2020, I have been posting the series of blogs, “Our Italy.” In this series, I share bloggers’ experiences of Italy, a country whose culture has captivated the world for thousands of years. I think now is the time to share these memories, especially since now some of us have started to return, inspired anew by the Italian people and their land.

Today I am happy to share a guest blog entitled: Bones of the Dead, Typical Sicilian Cookies by Ettore Grillo. Learn a bit about how “The Day of the Dead” is celebrated in Sicily on November 2 in his blog and about how bakeries make the special holiday cookies that are shared when remembering loved ones. Grillo even explains this holiday in more detail in his book, which you can find on Amazon.

Ettore Grillo's Blog and Books

November 2 is drawing near and in all bakeries in Sicily it is possible to buy the typical cookies for this day, “the bones of the dead.” They look like human bones, are hollow and hard to eat.

Today, after buying some, I asked the baker to tell me the secret to making them so hard and hollow. He said that he leavens dough for two days on a canvas to make it lose its moisture, and then he bakes them at a low temperature, about 140 degrees. During the process, they lose sugar and become hollow.

On November 2, children receive gifts from the dead. Obviously, this is a fiction, for parents actually buy the gifts and pretend that the dead brought them. This way, children are taught to respect and love the souls of those who are no longer with us.

November 2nd is a day of celebration…

View original post 71 more words

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® Let’s talk about… Soccer in Italian!

October 5, 2021July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2021?

Why not try to learn a few words about a sport that is an integral part of Italian society? Of course I am referring to soccer, or calcio as the Italians call the popular sport, derived from the verb calciare, which means “to kick.”

After Italy’s thrilling victory at the UEFA EURO 2020 this past July, I decided to revisit a couple of blogs I’ve written about Italians and their passion for soccer. I’ll expand on these blogs today to give a brief history of the sport, talk about Italy’s most popular soccer team and the Italian victories at the FIFA and UEFA competitions, all while focusing on basic Italian words and phrases about the game.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when we talk about soccer in Italian, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

Were you able to watch EURO 2020 this past summer? Was it your first introduction to Italian soccer or were you already a lifelong fan? If you are in a soccer league here in the United States or just like to watch soccer at home, knowing a few Italian words and phrases will certainly add to the excitement of being involved in this truly Italian sport!

This post is the 49th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian

are used to talk about
Italian Football, or Calcio.

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Let’s Talk About…

Soccer in Italian

Italy’s thrilling victory over England at the UEFA EURO 2020 soccer championship this past July sparked a week-long, country-wide celebration. Why not try to learn a few words about a sport that is an Italian passion? Calcio, as the Italians call this popular sport, is derived from the verb calciare, which means “to kick.” If you are in a soccer league here in the US or just like to watch soccer at home, knowing a few Italian words and phrases will certainly add to the excitement of being involved in this Italian passion!

Soccer — a brief history of the game

The basic idea behind soccer — a game of skill that involves kicking a ball — is said to date back as far as 2500 B.C., as a form of the game we know today was played by the Greeks, Egyptians and Chinese. The Roman game of Harpastum and the ancient Greek game of Episkyros were ball games that involved two teams kicking a ball but also allowed the use of hands or sticks, similar to today’s rugby.

According to the blog “The Origin, History, and Invention of Soccer”:

“The most relevant of these ancient games to our modern day “Association Football” is the Chinese game of Tsu’Chu (Tsu-Chu or Cuju, meaning “kicking the ball”). Records of the game began during the Han Dynasty (206 B.C.–220 A.D.) and it may have been a training exercise for soldiers.

Tsu’Chu involved kicking a small leather ball into a net strung between two bamboo poles. The use of hands was not permitted, but a player could use his feet and other parts of his body. The main difference between Tsu’Chu and soccer was the height of the goal, which hung about 30 feet from the ground.

From the introduction of Tsu’Chu onwards, soccer-like games spread throughout the world. Many cultures had activities that centered on the use of their feet, including Japan’s Kemari, which is still played today. The Native Americans had Pahsaherman, the Indigenous Australians played Marn Grook, and the Moari’s had Ki-o-rahi, to name a few.”

********************************************************

“Soccer began to evolve in modern Europe from the medieval period onwards. Various forms of what is now known as “folk football” were played (in England). The codification of soccer began in the public schools of Britain at the beginning of the 19th century. The word soccer was derived from an abbreviation from the word association. The -er suffix was popular slang at the Rugby School and Oxford University and used for all sorts of nouns the young men shortened. The association came from the formation of the Football Association (FA) on October 26, 1863.

Over the years, more clubs joined the FA until the number reached 128 by 1887. (England) finally had a nearly uniform rule structure in place.

Italian Soccer Victories

The International Federation of Association Football (FIFA) was formed in Paris in 1904 with seven members. This included Belgium, Denmark, France, the Netherlands, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland. Germany announced its intention to join the same day.

In 1930, the first-ever FIFA World Cup was held in Uruguay. There were 41 members of FIFA at the time and it has remained the pinnacle of the soccer world ever since. The championship has been awarded every four years since the first tournament in 1930, except in 1942 and 1946, due to World War II.”

Statistics about Italian Soccer Victories from “Wikipedia: Italy at the FIFA World Cup”:

Italy is one of the most successful national teams in the history of the FIFA World Cup,
having won four titles (1934, 1938, 1982, 2006), just one fewer than Brazil.

The UEFA, or the Union of European Football Associations dates back to 1927, when the French Football Federation’s administrator Henri Delaunay first proposed a pan-European football tournament. The UEFA Champions League is an annual club football competition organized by the Union of European Football Associations and holds annual competitions.

Statistics about Italian Soccer Victories from “Sports Adda”:

Prior to their championship win of the EURO 200 in 2021,
the Italy national football team had reached the European Championship final in 1968, 2000 and 2012.
And Italy’s (last) title win in the UEFA Euros came in 1968,
when the Blues had beaten Yugoslavia over two matches (in Rome).

What do Italians call the different games of foot ball played around the world?

Football (UK)	il calcio
Soccer (US)	il calcio
To play soccer	giocare a calcio
To enjoy playing soccer	divertirsi giocando a calcio

Football (AU)	football australiano
Football (US)	il football americano
College football ( US)	il football universiatrio
Rugby	la palla ovale

Juventus – the most well-known soccer team in Italy

Allianz Stadium, Turin, Italy — Allianz Arena in Turin, Italy. Home of the Juventus soccer team.

From a previous Conversational Italian! blog entitled “Italian Soccer, anyone?”

Juventus was founded in 1897 by a group of male students from an elite school in the city of Turin, the Liceo Classico Massimo d’Azeglio. The Latin word for “youth” is “iuvenis,” and is where the name of this team comes from. For years, I wondered why the letter “J” starts the name of this famous Italian team when “J” doesn’t exist in the Italian language. It turns out that the name was translated from Latin into the dialect spoken in the Piedmont region of northern Italy at the time, which does use the letter “J.”

Over the years, the Juventus team has been called by many nicknames. Perhaps the most famous is “Vecchia Signora,” which means “Old Lady” in Italian. I’ve heard many explanations for this, but the most plausible seems to be that it is a reference to the history and greatness of the team — the team is like royalty over in Italy, and signora means both “Mrs.” and “royal lady.” Of course, this name can also be taken ironically because the team includes young men.

Juventus, the most successful Italian soccer team of all time, plays in the top Italian football league, which is the Serie A League. The winner of this league is awarded the Scudetto (“little shield” or “coat of arms” of the Italian tricolors worn on the uniform the next season) and the title Campioni d’Italia (Champions of Italy), along with a trophy called the Coppa Campioni d’Italia. In the 2016–2017 season, Juventus made history with their sixth consecutive Scudetto. They went on to play in the European Champions Cup but did not win a European title that season.

The Italian Soccer Team and Soccer Match

Juventus Soccer players — Juventus soccer players at Allianz Stadium, Turin, Italy

For those who are new to the game of soccer, below is some Italian vocabulary and an explanation of the basic rules.

A soccer tournament is called un torneo di calcio. A soccer commentator is called un critico di calcio or un/un’ opinionista di calcio.

A soccer match, or partita di calcio, is played by two teams. Each soccer team, or soccer club, is called una squadra di calcio.

When playing a soccer game, 11 players can be on the field at any one time, one of whom is a goalkeeper. A soccer match lasts 90 minutes. There is a halftime break, called l’intervallo, after 45 minutes. If the score is tied, the game may go into overtime — as happened just this summer at the exciting conclusion of the EURO 2020.

The object of soccer is for a player to get the ball into the other team’s goal by using
any part of the body except the player’s hands and arms — and then only while he is
located in his own penalty area.

The referee, or l’arbitro, is in charge of the soccer game. The calls the referee makes may be a bit confusing to the new soccer fan. Some penalties are more severe than others. Yellow and red cards are given to players who violate certain basic rules. This will determine the type of penalty imposed for a given infraction. For further explanation of these rules, I suggest the blog “The 17 Basic Rules of Soccer.”

A typical soccer field, or campo da calcio, from “The 17 Basic Rules of Soccer”:

The art of the game:

la palla / il pallone calciare	soccer ball to kick
calcio d’inizio calcio d’angolo calcio di rigore calcio di punizione deviare la palla	kick off corner kick penalty kick free kick deflect the ball
la rete gol fare gol segnare marcare	net used for the goal the goal to make a goal/to score to score to score
l’allenatore	soccer coach
il giocatore	soccer player
il calciatore	soccer player
il portiere	goal keeper/goalie
l’arbitro	referee/umpire
la gara	competition
il fallo di mano	foul for using one’s hands
il fallo di reazione	retaliatory foul
il fallo da ultimo uomo	last man foul
il fallo a gamba tesa	studs-up tackle
la scorrettezza	foul play/rudeness
scorretto(a)	improper/rude
l’insulto	insult
il cartellino giallo	yellow “caution” card is given for improper play, hand foul, or unsportsmanlike or rude behavior
l’espulsione	expulsion from a soccer game occurs if a player receives two yellow cards
il cartellino rosso	red “expulsion” card occurs for a serious foul using violence, a retaliatory foul, a last man foul, insults, or when two yellow cards have been received

The Italian Soccer Fan

The Italian phrases that describe an Italian soccer fan echo the passion that they feel for the sport: appasionato di calcio, fanatico del calcio, and fan del calcio/tifoso di calcio.

A popular exhortation to encourage a team to score is “Rete!” “Score!” / “Into the net!”

When at a Juventus soccer game, the popular chant is Forza Azzuri!, which is a reference to the team’s blue uniforms. The word forza literally means strength but is also used in this case as an exhortation, to mean , “Come on!” The Italians also wear blue uniforms during international competition, so this chant is appropriate at FIFA and European matches as well. (By the way, Italians do not chant “Forza Italia!” as this phrase has been usurped by an Italian political party, which took the name “Forza Italia” when led by former Italian Prime Minister Silvio Berlusconi.)

Another popular chant includes the name of a team player:

Solo noi, solo noi, (name of player) ce l’abbiamo solo noi!
Only us, only us, (name of player) only we have him!

Have fun playing soccer!

For anyone inspired to play soccer by Italy’s recent win at the EURO 2020, below are a few Italian terms to urge on your teammates!

I’ve got him!	Mio! Quello è mio!
One on one	uno contro uno

I’m marking that man (I have him)	Ce l’ho!
Try to avoid the marking of an opponent	Smarcati! /Liberati!

Go on wing	Vai sulla fasica! / Allargati!
Pass the ball to the wingman right/left	apri a destra/sinestra

From one side of the field to the other	da porta a porta
Pass it through the defenders!	In mezzo!

Corner!	Calcio d’angolo
Leave it!	Lasciala!

If you are a fan of Italian soccer, leave a comment about your favorite Italian team
or the most exciting game you’ve watched.
I’d love to hear from you!

Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

Your Italian-American Gardening Tips – Growing Tomatoes and Making Caprese and Panzanella Salads

Large bowl of just-picked tomatoes of various sizes and colors in the shade.

September 16, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

All Italian gardeners I know spend the summer diligently watering and weeding in eager anticipation of their favorite crop — the tomato. For most of us, the tomato is the reason we create a garden at all. Yes, it is wonderful to grow eggplants, zucchini, and peppers so that these vegetables are a short walk from our kitchen when we need them. But for those who love fresh tomatoes, there is nothing like a warm, juicy tomato pulled fresh from the vine after ripening in the sun. Tomatoes are a fruit, and those left to ripen to their full potential will have a complex balance of acidity and sweetness. Each variety will have its own subtle variation in flavor. It is impossible to describe the feeling eating such a delicious fruit brings to one who has only eaten commercially grown store-bought tomatoes, except to say that for many of us it is close to heaven.

Since I live around the corner from a family-run nursery, I am lucky to find over 20 varieties of tomato plants every spring that are ready to plant. Each of these is listed as determinate (the tomato plant will stop growing after it reaches a certain size) and indeterminate (the tomato plant will not stop growing and will need side stems, a.k.a. “suckers” pruned). In a previous blog, Your Italian-American Gardening Tips (with Recipes) – Tomatoes, Zucchini… I discussed how to grow tomatoes and gave several tips about what to do if you should run into difficulties. In a You-Tube Video, I posted about how to prune suckers from an indeterminate tomato plant. Growing Tomato Plants: Pinching off side stems.

Let’s talk a bit more about tomatoes for the end of the summer season this year!

“What is the purpose of growing different types of tomatoes?” you may ask. In one of my Instagram posts, I share a picture of the tomatoes I grew this year and list the uses for each.

Four bowls that contain various types of tomatoes and peppers — Recent harvest of different varieties of tomatoes, including plum, pear, and cherry tomatoes. Italian peppers also included in the photo.

In short, we all know that medium to large tomatoes, the largest of which are called “Beefsteak” are great for cutting into slices or wedges and eating on sandwiches, in salads, or just by themselves. Some people like to add a sprinkle of salt or a drizzle of olive oil to their plate of tomato wedges to create the perfect summertime snack. Dried oregano can be added to wedges of tomatoes along with olive oil for a “tomato salad,” with or without red onion. These tomatoes come in many shades of red, as well as pink, yellow, and even “zebra” yellow and green. The different colored varieties add visual interest to a salad and those other than the bright red tend to have less acidity.

Plum tomatoes are fleshier than other tomatoes and have less juice. These are the tomatoes that undergo processing to create tomato paste. San Marzano plum tomatoes from the region around Naples are the most sought-after plum tomatoes.

Cherry tomatoes are a favorite of mine because they ripen early and produce tomatoes all through the summer and into the fall. They are a great snack for eating out of hand and are wonderful to add to lettuce salads as they are already bite-size and will not loose their juices and soften the lettuce. Grape tomatoes are slightly larger than cherry tomatoes. This year I had cherry tomato plants that produced red, yellow and brown tomatoes. All were delicious!

For tips on how to create an authentic Caprese Salad with tomatoes, buffalo mozzarella, basil and extra-virgin olive oil, visit Your Italian-American Gardening Tips with Recipes: Basil (Basilico). Be creative!

Caprese salad in a large serving bowl made with alternating red and yellow tomatoes, basil and mozzarella. — Caprese salad in a large serving bowl made with alternating red and yellow sliced tomatoes, basil and mozzarella.

Caprese salad made with alternating red and yellow tomatoes, basil and mozzarella. — Caprese salad made with alternating red and yellow cherry tomatoes, basil and mozzarella.

What about Panzanella salad?” you may ask.
Isn’t this another wonderful Italian tomato salad I can create with my fresh tomatoes?

I have also blogged about making Panzanella salad before, and included tomatoes in this salad, in the blog for my learn Travel Italian website entitled, Caprese and Panzanella Salads with Fresh Tomatoes and Basil. Here is an image from that blog of my initial idea of what this salad should be like:

Bowl of Panzanella salad with bread, tomatoes, basil and mozzarella.

I recently updated that blog to include a little known fact (at least to me). The original Panzanella salad did not include tomatoes! Here is a photo I posted on Instagram of the Panzanella salad I made after I learned of a recipe from the great writer of the Decameron, Giovanni Boccaccio, from the 1300s.

Plate of cucumbers, red onions, reconstituted bread and basil for Panzanella salad — Panzanella Salad made in the 1300s according to Giovanni Boccaccio: Stale bread (softened), cucumber, red onion, basil and mixed greens.

My family did not make Panzanella salad when I was growing up. As an adult, I had tried this salad in in restaurants and thought it a nice change from the usual Caprese salad, so I added it to my post. Caprese and Panzanella salads, I thought, were the two important Italian tomato dishes. Recently, I learned from a blog by Emiko Davies titled “Bronzino’s Panzanella,” that Panzanella salad is indeed a popular and traditional Italian salad in Tuscany, mentioned by the writer Bronzino himself in a poem, prior to the appearance of tomatoes in Italy.

We can assume that Panzanella salad started out as a way to use up old bread, as stale Tuscan bread lends itself well to being softened with a sprinkle of water. A little red onion, perhaps some basil, and olive oil and red wine vinegar might have been all an Italian housewife had available to lend some flavor her bread salad. According to the recipe provided by Bronzino, cucumbers and even some arugula could be added to magically turn the bounty of summer into a crunchy and refreshing summer treat.

Serendipitously, I had been growing Armenian cucumbers in my garden for the very first time this year, when I came across Davies’ blog. When I read about Bronzino’s version of Panzanella salad, I made it myself and posted the result on Instagram on Conversationalitalian.french.

Panzanella salad made Bronzino’s way, with cucumbers, was truly a revelation. The seeds of the Armenian cucumber were easy to remove from the center of the vegetable, and without the skin this variety of cucumber was light, crunchy, and flavorful. There are no real proportions to this salad; use as much reconstituted bread as you like and as much cucumber and other ingredients as you have on hand. Now THAT’s Italian!

Below is my method for making Panzanella salad with cucumbers, originally posted on Instagram on Conversationalitalian.french. and the method for making Panzanella salad with tomatoes, originally posted on blog.learntravelitalian.com.

Try Panzanella salad both ways. I ‘m sure you won’t be disappointed!

Today’s Panzanella Salad with Tomatoes

Tomato and bread Panzanella salad — Italian Panzanella salad with halved cherry tomatoes, mozzarella, fresh torn basil and bread

Ingredients
(Serves 1-4)

Dry Italian bread, cubed, or large croutons
Sprinkle the dried Italian bread with water to soften
(see comments about the proper bread to use below*)

1-2 large, vine-ripened tomato, cut into small wedges
or several cherry tomatoes, halved
sprinkle lightly with sea salt

1/2 red onion, sliced thinly into crescents

Extra-virgin Italian olive oil
Italian red wine vinegar

Large, freshly picked basil leaves, hand torn

Mozzarella, preferably soft, cubed or small bocconcini (optional)

Method

In a large dish, combine small wedges of fresh tomatoes or halved cherry tomatoes and dry Italian bread (as pre-processed as above) and red onions.

Drizzle on extra virgin Italian olive oil and red wine vinegar and combine. Make sure the bread has softened enough to be edible. If not, you may want to let the ingredients sit for a bit before finishing the salad.

Then add the optional mozzarella and torn basil leaves.

Mix gently.

Taste and drizzle with extra olive oil and vinegar if needed.

Mix again gently to combine all and enjoy!

*About the bread for any Panzanella salad: be sure to use a crusty loaf of good* Italian bread that is at least two days old and has dried out and hardened. Bread that has become stale naturally will need to be sprinkled with water to soften a bit prior to making this salad. Place the bread in a small bowl and sprinkle it with water the morning before you are planning to make the salad. The end result should not leave the bread mushy; the bread should spring back to life after the water is added if you are truly working with real Italian bread. If the crust is still too hard, it can be removed. Remember that the bread will continue to soften when it is combined with the vinegar and tomato juice when you make the salad.

If you want to make Panzanella salad with fresh Italian bread, you can always cut it into slices and dry it out in the oven just enough to be crunchy, or even add a bit of olive oil and brown it a bit to make croutons.

************************************************************

Traditional Cucumber Panzanella Salad

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

Visit www.learntravelitalian.com for more of my Italian and Italian-American recipes, cultural notes and advanced Italian language blog posts updated monthly. Click on the link “our blog” in the upper right hand corner to reach blog.Learn Travel Italian.com.

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to Say, “I miss you…” with Mancare

September 8, 2021July 25, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 1 Comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2021?

An important Italian verb you will need to learn how to use is mancare (to miss). This is the verb Italians use when they have not been able to visit a loved one. Of course it is important to be able to tell those we care about that we miss them!

In this blog, we will discuss how to use the verb Italian mancare, which part of a group of Italian verbs that always take an indirect object pronoun and therefore “work” differently from your typical Italian verb.

Previously, we have spoken about piacere (to like), the prototype for this unique group of Italian verbs in our blog “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day: Piacere, How Italians Say, “I like it!.” We have also covered another verb of this type, servire (to need) in our blog “How to Say, “I need…” in Italian: Mi serve…”

After this blog, we can add mancare to our list of important Italian verbs discussed that only take indirect object pronouns. Piacere, servire, and mancare all work in the same way, but we will go over once again how to conjugate and translate a verb of this type.

Note: in our very last blog, “He Said,/She Said and Object Pronouns,” we made a list of verbs of communication and giving that take an indirect object pronoun when referring to a person. These verbs are in a different group than piacere, servire, and mancare, since they take a direct object pronoun when referring to things, but are a very important group to understand as well!

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb mancare, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 48th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in conversation

use the Italian verb
Mancare

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

Overview of Italian Verbs

that take

Indirect Object Pronouns

A short review of Italian verbs that take indirect object pronouns:

In our very last blog, we made a list of verbs of communication and giving that take indirect object pronouns when referring to a person.

Previously, we have spoken about piacere (to like), the prototype for verbs that always take indirect object pronouns, in our blog “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day: Piacere, How Italians Say, “I like it!” We have also talked about another Italian verb that uses only indirect object pronouns, the verb servire (to need), in our blog “How to Say, “I need…” in Italian: Mi serve…”

After this blog, we can add mancare to our list of important verbs that take indirect object pronouns. All three of these verbs work in the same way, but we will go over once again how to conjugate and translate a verb of this type with mancare. Full disclosure: there are other Italian verbs that take indefinite articles, along with the three already mentioned! Below is a short list of the most important Italian verbs that take indefinite articles for the meanings given below.

Piacere	to like
Servire	to need
Mancare	to miss someone to be missing to need something
Accadere Capitare Succedere	to happen
Bastare	to be enough
Interessare	to be interested in to be affected by

A short review of the Italian indirect object pronouns and their meanings:*

mi	to me
ti	to you (familiar)
Le	to you (polite)
le	to her
gli	to him

ci	to us
vi	to you all
gli	to them

*Of course, mi, ti, ci, and vi do double duty as direct object pronouns. Also, with reflexive verbs mi stands for “myself” and ti stands for “yourself, etc.“

******************************

How to Say, “I miss you!”

with Mancare

The Italian verb mancare has many meanings: to miss/ to need/to lose/to lack/to be lacking/to omit/to fail. Perhaps the most common way mancare is used is to convey the idea of “to miss someone,” so it is important to learn the conjugation and sentence structure for this verb for everyday conversation.

To start off, you should know that the sentence structure used for mancare is the same as for the verb piacere, the prototype for Italian verbs that only take an indirect object pronoun. You should also realize that this group of Italian verbs works differently from its English counterparts. Therefore, the English translation will not match the Italian word for word. The idea will remain the same, however.

In English, we say the subject of the sentence misses someone using the person who is missed as a direct object. Example: I (subject) miss (verb) John (direct object).

In Italian, however, there are two significant differences from the English way of thinking. Below are English and Italian sentence structures with examples that have identical meanings. We will change the Italian sentences into the most commonly used Italian structure with an indirect object pronoun step by step, in order to aid in understanding how both languages can say the same thing in a different way. For these examples, the English translation is given in the Italian way of thinking, and is in parentheses. Notice the color coding that follows throughout the examples: subject in brown, verb in green, direct object pronoun in blue, and indirect and stressed object pronouns in red.

First, let’s look at the English way of thinking. The subject is the person talking and the direct object is who they miss:

English: [subject: person missing someone + miss conjugated to reflect subject + direct object: person missed]

I + miss + John.

Italian: [subject: person missed + mancare conjugated to reflect subject + stressed object pronoun: person missing someone]

Giovanni + manca + a me.
(John is missing to me.)

Italian: [indirect object pronoun: person missing someone + mancare conjugated to reflect subject + subject: person missed]

Mi + manca + Giovanni.
(To me is missing John).

To make matters more confusing to the English speaker, the subject of the sentence — which in this case is Giovanni — can be left out entirely as long as the person who is being discussed is known from the context. But, in most cases the subject is then added to the end of the sentence for clarification.

*The stressed pronoun is handy to use for emphasis, as its name suggests.

******************************

Below is the present tense conjugation of mancare. Notice that the tu and noi forms have irregular spelling to keep the hard “c” sound that we hear when we pronounce the infinitive verb. These are marked with an asterisk.

Mancare = To Be Missing (To)

io	manco	I am missing (to…)
tu	manchi*	you (fam.) are missing (to…)
Lei lei/lui	manca	you (polite) are missing (to…) she/he/it is missing (to…)

noi	manchiamo*	we are missing (to…)
voi	mancate	you all are missing (to…)
loro	mancano	they are missing (to…)

The sentences below give some common examples of how to use the verb mancare in the present tense. To aid the English speaker in understanding this Italian way of thinking, the Italian subject pronouns are included in parentheses. But remember that Italian subject pronouns are usually left out of a sentence, unless needed for clarification. Also, the word-for-word Italian to English translation is given in parentheses, with the correct English translation in the third column in bold black.

If the idea behind how to use mancare seems too complicated at first, just memorize the first four examples, as you will likely use these the most!

Example Sentences with Mancare

(Tu) Mi manchi.	(You are missing to me.)	I miss you.
(Lei/Lui) Mi manca.	(She/he is missing to me.)	I miss her/him.

(Io) Ti manco?	(Am I missing to you?)	(Do you) miss me?
(Lei/Lui) Ti manca?	(Is she/he missing to you?)	(Do you) miss her/him?

(Io) Gli manco.	(I am missing to him.)	He misses me.
(Io) Le manco.	(I am missing to her.)	She misses me.
(Tu) Gli manchi.	(You are missing to him.)	He misses you.
(Tu) Le manchi.	(You are missing to her.)	She misses you.
Gli manca (Maria).	(Maria is missing to him.)	He misses Maria.
Le manca (Maria).	(Maria is missing to her.)	She misses Maria.
Gli manca (Paolo).	(Paul is missing to him.)	He misses Paul.
Le manca (Paolo).	(Paul is missing to her.)	She misses Paul.

******************************

Mancare is often used in the past tense. Consider the phrase “I missed you!” This implies that a definite period of absence has passed, and now the individuals are finally together and are able to talk about their feelings. The past tense of mancare is regular in the passato prossimo and takes essere.* This is the past tense form for mancare that is most commonly used during conversation.

See below for the passato prossimo conjugation of mancare:

Singular forms: sono sei, è, + mancato(a)

Plural forms: siamo, siete sono + mancati(e)

*There are situations in which the past participle of mancare takes avere. This will be covered in another blog!

The imperfetto form of mancare is regular as well, and is used most often for narration. Remember when telling a story about something that has happened without mentioning a specific period of time to use the imperfetto past tense. If you need a refresher on when to use the passato prossimo and imperfetto, refer to our previous blogs about the Italian past tense. In the case of mancare, the reference is often to a nonspecific amount of time that people missed each other in the past.

See below for the imperfetto conjugation of mancare:

Singular forms: mancavo, mancavi, mancava

Plural forms: mancavamo, mancavate, mancavano

Find four common examples below of how to use the verb mancare, in past tense, with the passato prossimo. As in the examples for the present tense, the subject pronouns are included in parentheses, but remember that they are usually often left out of a sentence unless needed for clarification. Also, the direct Italian to English translation is given in parentheses, with the correct English translation in the third column in bold black. How many more examples can you think of?

(Tu) Mi sei mancato(a).	(You were missing to me.)	I missed you.
(Lei/Lui) Mi è mancato(a).	(She/he was missing to me.)	I missed her/him.

(Io) Ti sono mancto(a)?	(Was I missing to you?)	(Did you) miss me?
(Lei/Lui) Ti è mancato(a)?	(Was she/he missing to her/him?)	(Did you) miss her/him?

Remember how to use the Italian verb
mancare in Italian
when missing someone dear to you!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® “He Said/She Said” Italian Verbs that Take Indirect Object Pronouns

August 5, 2021April 16, 2024 ~ stellalucentellc ~ Leave a comment

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2021?

Two of the most popular every day phrases are, “He said to me… ” or “She said to me…” In fact, the equivalent phrase in Italian, “Mi ha detto.” is used so often that it usually comes out in quickly, in one breath!

In this blog, we will discuss the popular phrase “Mi ha detto,” and use it as a springboard into a discussion of indirect object pronouns that can be used with the verb dire and many other Italian verbs as well.

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when use the Italian verb dire, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 47th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in conversation

use the Italian past tense verb + indirect object pronoun
Mi ha detto…

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

What He Said… What She Said…

in Italian with Indirect Object Pronouns

Let’s begin by looking at the verb dire — to say — in our important phrases “he said” and “she said” for discussion in this blog. The past tense for “he said” and “she said” in Italian, a one-time event, uses the passato prossimo, and is “ lui/lei ha detto.” This Italian past tense verb also translates into the less commonly used English past tense, “he has said” and “she has said.”

Since the subject pronoun is generally left out of an Italian sentence, we are left with “ha detto” to describe both what he said and what she said. The subject pronouns lui (he) or lei (she) may be added before the verb for emphasis in this case, but generally those having a conversation know who they are talking about.

Because the phrases “he said” and “she said” are used frequently in everyday conversation, we should commit the Italian passato prossimo verb “ha detto” to memory.

To make a complete sentence using the verb dire to describe what was said, use either “di” or “che” to link the subject and verb to the topic that was discussed. Di is used as the conjunction in the examples in the table below to answer a question in the affirmative or negative. Of course, even though our focus in this blog is on how to use the verb ha detto, it should be noted that one usually answers “yes,” or “no,” for themselves with ho detto, although they can also relay someone else’s answer using a different conjugation of dire, such as ha detto, abbiamo detto, etc. In all situations, when answering “yes” or “no” in Italian, the conjunction di is required.

Ho detto di si.	I said yes.
Ho detto di no.	I said no.

Ha detto di si.	He/She said no.
Ha detto di no.	He/She said no.

Abbiamo detto di si.	He/She said yes.
Abbiamo detto di no.	He/She said no.

****************************************

Adding an indirect object pronoun before the verbs ho detto, abbiamo detto, or ha detto will allow the speaker to describe to whom something was said. For this section, though, our discussion will focus only on “ha detto” and Italian indefinite articles.

Why focus on “ha detto?“ One of the most popular every day phrases is, “He/She said to me,” which is, “Mi ha detto” in Italian. In fact, the phrase “mi ha detto” is used so often that it usually said in one breath! We can build on this simple, easy to remember phrase to describe more complex situations. For instance, we can substitute other indirect object pronouns for mi (to me), such as ti (to you), gli (to him), or le (to her).

In English, when we use the indirect object pronouns “to me,” “to you,” “to him/her,” they are placed after the verb, while in Italian, they are placed before the verb. This may take some time to get used to. In the summary table below, the indirect object pronouns are in red.

Ha detto	He said / She said
Mi ha detto	He said / She said to me
Ti ha detto	He said/ She said to you
Gli ha detto	He said / she said to him
Le ha detto	He said / She said to her

The next table uses our verb ha detto and indirect object pronouns in example sentences. For these examples (and for all other instances in Italian except those given in the table in the previous section regarding a “yes” or “no” answer), “che” is used as the conjunction.

The subject pronoun is included in some of the examples in the table below for clarity. Again, the Italian and English indirect object pronouns are in red. In all cases except the first, when the subject is directly quoting what someone else has said to them, English uses a direct object pronoun, and this is given in green. Notice how many permutations of the same sentence are possible with only the singular indirect object pronouns!

Lui ha detto che il film era bello. Lei ha detto che il film era bello. Mi ha detto: “Il film era bello.”	He said that the film was good. She said that the film was good. He/She said to me: “The film was good.”
Mi ha detto che il film era bello.	He/She told me that the film was good.
Ti ha detto che il film era bello?	Has he/she told you that the film was good?

Giovanni gli ha detto che il film era bello.	John told him that the film was good.
Anna gli ha detto che il flim era bello.	Ann told him that the film was good.

Giovanni le ha detto che il film era bello.	John told her that the film was good.
Anna le ha detto che il film era bello.	Ann told her that the film was good.

****************************************

Our example sentence, “Mi ha detto che il film era bello,” and its translation, “He/She told me that the film was good,” brings up an important difference between Italian and English verbs and object pronouns; not all Italian verbs that take indirect object pronouns do so in English!

We have just seen the the Italian verb dire takes an indirect object pronoun that goes before the verb, whereas its English counterpart “to say,” in general conversation usually takes a direct object pronoun that goes after the verb. We would not say, “He told to me that the film was good,” although this is correct in Italian!

This adds to the difficulty in choosing when to use an Italian indirect object pronoun, since the correct English translation will not always reflect the indirect object pronoun choice in Italian.

The difference in the Italian and English [object pronoun-verb] combination may not be immediately apparent in the phrase “mi ha detto,” since the Italian pronoun mi plays double duty as both an indirect and direct object pronoun! The Italian pronoun mi can be translated as both “me” (direct object pronoun) and “to/for me” (indirect object pronoun).*

The same goes for the Italian pronoun ti, which is translated as “you”(direct object pronoun) as well as “to you“ (indirect object pronoun).*

Choosing between an indirect and direct Italian object pronoun when conversing about others in Italian becomes important in the masculine third person, as one must decide between lo (him) and gli (to him). For females, the choice is between la (her) and le (to her).

So how does an English speaker know when to choose an indirect object pronoun in Italian?

Italian verbs of communication and giving
take indirect object pronouns
when referring to a person.

The table below is a short list of the verbs of communication that take Italian indirect object pronouns when referring to other people in conversation. You will recognize the example verb in this blog, dire, at the top of the list.

Note that if one of these verbs is followed by a person’s name, the Italian pattern to follow is [verb + a + name]. The Italian indirect object pronoun can be though of as substituting for the “a“ placed before a person’s name.

In some cases, both Italian and English verbs take an indirect object pronoun but in other cases the English translation uses a direct object pronoun, as we’ve already mentioned. Unfortunately, there is no rule that connects the Italian way of speaking to the English way, so the Italian verbs that take [a + name] or indirect object pronouns just need to be memorized. In short, in order to speak Italian, we must think in Italian!

*And, of course with reflexive verbs mi stands for “myself” and ti stands for “yourself.”

Some Italian verbs of communication that take indirect object pronouns:

Dire	to say
Parlare	to talk
Telefonare	to call
Scrivere	to write

Domandare	to ask
Chiedere	to ask

Insegnare	to teach
Spiegare	to explain
Consigliare	to give advice

Examples that use Italian verbs of communication with indirect object pronouns are given below. The indirect object pronouns are in red, the direct object pronouns are in green, and the person to whom the object pronoun refers to is underlined. Of course, there are a infinite number of combinations! Try to create your own sentences, taking situations from your own life!

Ho detto a Maria che… I told Maria that…
Le ho detto che… I told her that…

Ho domandato a Franco se… I asked Frank if…
Gli ho domandato se… I asked him if…

La Signora Rossi ha spiegato a me che… Mrs. Rossi explained to me that…
La Signora Rossi mi ha spiegato che… Mrs. Rossi explained to me that…

Some Italian verbs of giving that take indirect object pronouns:

Dare	to give
Offrire	to offer
Donare Regalare	to gift
Mandare	to send
Portare	to bring/deliver

Examples that use Italian verbs of giving with indirect object pronouns are given below. The indirect object pronouns are in red, the direct object pronouns are in green, and the person to whom the object pronoun refers to is underlined. Of course, there are a infinite number of combinations! Try to create your own sentences, taking situations from your own life!

Ho dato a Maria il vino. I gave Maria the wine.
Le ho dato il vino. I gave her the wine.

Ho offerto a Franco un lavoro. I offered Frank a job.
Gli ho offerto un lavoro. I offered him a job.

La Signora Rossi ha mandato a me… Mrs. Rossi gave me…
La Signora Rossi mi ha mandato… Mrs. Rossi gave me…

*And, of course with reflexive verbs mi stands for “myself” and ti stands for “yourself.”

Remember how to use the phrase
“mi ha detto” in Italian and I guarantee
you will use this phrase every day!

Smorgasbord Cafe and Bookstore – New Author on the Shelves – #Languages – Conversational Italian for Travelers: Just the Important Phrases (with Restaurant Vocabulary and Idiomatic Expressions) by Kathryn Occhipinti

July 30, 2021July 30, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

A great big GRAZIE MILLE to SALLY from the Smorgasbord Cafe and Bookstore for her review of my Conversational Italian for Travelers series reprinted below!

Delighted to welcome Kathryn Occipinti to the Cafe and Bookstore with her language books in Italian and French. Very useful now that the world is opening up again.

About Conversational Italian for Travelers

Your traveling companion in Italy! Truly different from other phrase books – this book is friendly, humorous, and also provides a method to understand and remember important Italian phrases. There are many tips for the reader on how to create their own phrases and how to ask questions to get around Italy comfortably. Includes sections not found in other phrase books so the traveler can really fit into the culture of Italy. Light weight book of phrases slips easily into a pocket or purse. Keep handy simple phrases of greeting, how to change money, or how to take the train. Learn about how to communicate politely in any situation. And, of course, learn how to read those Italian menus and order at an Italian restaurant! This book is contains excerpts from the larger work, Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook. All the phrases you need to know with tips on how to create your own!

One of the reviews for the book
P. Zoro4.0 out of 5 stars Effective learning guide Reviewed in the United Kingdom

Travelling to a foreign country can be a terrible experience if you don’t know how to communicate. Kathryn thus solved this potential problem for all foreign visitors to Italy with her book picking on just the important phrases.

To start with, the book is both exciting and humorous. The reader discovers the Italian alphabethas 21 letters and borrows some additions from Latin. There are surprising differences from English, like z becomes zeta and is pronounced zeh-tah. I spent some time translating my name and found the result amusing. Learning to pronounce the words correctly was an enjoyable experiment in which I found myself closer and closer to sounding very foreign and learned.

I discovered “buongiorno” is all I need to say from morning to early evening, and if I am not yet in my hotel then “buonasera” will do until bedtime. For hi and bye to friends there is just one word to learn – “ciao”, but there are so many ways to say goodbye you really have to take your time to learn them. “Millie Gracie” means thanks a lot (a thousand) though I expected it to be “thanks a million”.

The writer takes the reader through the basic everyday conversational Italian in an interesting manner. You learn to be polite and formal and at the same time to be friendly and appreciative of any assistance. You also learn how to form important phrases, how to ask for the important things and making friends. The book teaches you to get comfortable at the hotel, at a restaurant and when sightseeing. It is indeed a comprehensive guide I would recommend to anyone travelling to Italy who does not speak Italian.

As for me if someone says “Parla italiano?” (Do you speak Italian?), I will just say “Si, un po’” (Yes, a little) even though sono di Zimbabwe (I am from Zimbabwe).
Si, I loved this book.

Read the reviews and buy the book: Amazon US – And:Amazon UK – Electronic copies: Learn Travel Italian

Also by Kathryn Occhipinti

Read the reviews and buy the books: Amazon US – And: Amazon UK – More reviews: Goodreads – Websites: French and Italian: StellaLucente.com – Blogs: Beginning Italian: Conversational Italian! – Twitter: StellaLucente@travelitalian1 and @travelfrench1

About Dr. Kathyrn Occhipinti

Dr. Kathryn Occhipinti is a radiologist of Italian-American descent who has been leading Italian language groups in the Peoria and Chicago areas for about 10 years. During that time, she founded Stella Lucente, LLC, a publishing company focused on instructional language books designed to make learning a second language easy and enjoyable for the adult audience.

Using her experiences as a teacher and frequent traveler to Italy, she wrote the “Conversational Italian for Travelers” series of books, which follow the character Caterina on her travels through Italy, while at the same time introducing the fundamentals of the Italian language.

Nada Sneige Fuleihan is a native French speaker and translator who now resides in the Chicago area.

The two writers have teamed up to create the pocket travel book, “Conversational French for Travelers, Just the Important Phrases,” using the same method and format as found in the Italian pocket book for travelers “Conversational Italian for Travelers,” originally created by Kathryn Occhipinti.

You can connect to Kathryn on her websites, blogs and social media at these links

Facebook group: Conversational Italian!
Facebook pages: Stella Lucente Italian and Stella Lucente French
Instagram: Conversationalitalian.French
YouTube Channel: Learn Conversational Italian
Pinterest: StellaLucenteItalian and StellaLucenteFrench

Thank you for dropping in today and it would be great if you could share Kathryn’s books on your own network.. thanks Sally.

Your Italian-American Gardening Tips – Growing Basil and Making Pesto alla Genovese

Pesto alla Genovese with gnocchi in a bowl lined with prosciutto slices, held by blogger Kathryn Occhipinti, from Conversationalitalian.french Instagram post 2021.

July 28, 2021July 25, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 3 Comments

This summer I have had the usual bumper crop of fresh basil leaves from the basil plants in large pots that I keep in a sunny position in my garden and provide with an abundance of water. The plants started to go to seed — make the green and white column of flowers at the end of each stalk — by mid June. So, I dutifully cut back my basil: at first just the flowers, then the stalks with the flowers, and then in mid July did a hard cut-back, taking both stalks and leaves, leaving about 50% of each plant. This will enable the basil plants in the pots to keep growing new stalks with new basil leaves, hopefully into August.

I’ve posted about growing basil before, of course, since basil is such a wonderful Italian herb to have in the home garden, and is easily grown in pots and harvested throughout the summer. For a post on how to grow basil, visit Planting a lettuce patch and starting tomato and basil from seeds. For tips on how to grow basil and an authentic Caprese Salad method, visit Your Italian-American Gardening Tips with Recipes: Basil (Basilico).

I have also blogged about making pesto before, which I love to do at least 2-3 times each summer when I have an abundance of fresh basil leaves.

There is truly nothing like the fresh aroma of newly crushed basil over a warm bowl of pasta. And best of all, my children love it!

If you are really curious about what pesto is and how it is made, read the reprinted blog below to learn “everything you always wanted to know” about making pesto from my blog Learn Italian!, where I post tips on how to learn advanced Italian and also share authentic Italian recipes. In this blog Pesto alla Genovese with Gnocchi: Everything You Always Wanted to Know About Making Pesto! , I give a short history about my experiences trying to make basil, the best basil plant to use and the theory behind the method. I have included a video in the original blog about how to use a marble mortar and wooden pestle — essential equipment — no food processors, please!

Finally, at the end of this blog I have reprinted the recipe with the proportion of basil, garlic and cheeses that I like. Try my method and modify the ratio of ingredients for your family!

If you would like to see me making pesto live, watch this 1 minute video from my Instagram post on Conversationalitalian.french:

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

//www.instagram.com/embed.js

Pesto alla Genovese with Gnocchi: Everything You Always Wanted to Know!

Pesto alla Genovese is the famous bright green “pasta sauce” from the northern Italian region of Liguria, whose capital is the city of Genoa. My introduction to pesto, which was not a part of my southern Italian upbringing, was from one of those little glass jars I found in a grocery store in Peoria, Illinois. The jar had been labeled “pesto” by an Italian company. Back then, I was trying to learn to cook true Italian “regional” cooking and specifically to expand my sauce-making techniques beyond the ubiquitous and well-loved southern Italian red tomato sauce. Read the full post here: Pasta alla Genovese.

***********************************************************************

Italian Recipe: Kathryn’s Pesto alla Genovese
con Gnocchi

Ingredients and tools needed for making Pesto alla Genovese: Mortar and pestle as it is being used, olive oil, cheese, basil leaves — Pesto alla Genovese: Ingredients needed are shown as they are slowly ground together in a marble mortar with a wooden pestle.

Ingredients for Italian Recipe
Kathryn’s Pesto alla Genovese
(Serves 4)

Small leaves from 1 small sweet basil plant (Genovese basil is best!)
(about 3 cups of lightly packed leaves, rinsed, patted dry, stems removed)
1 to 2 small garlic cloves, peeled, halved lengthwise
(and bitter green center removed if present)
2 tablespoons Italian pine nuts
2/3 cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese
1/3 cup freshly grated Romano cheese
1/4 tsp salt
3/4 cups of extra virgin olive oil, from Liguria, if possible

If desired: Prosciutto to line the bowl of gnocchi and pesto dressing for serving.

Method for the Pesto

Note: Before starting, set a large pot of well-salted water on the stove to boil, and cook your pasta or gnocchi to “al dente” tenderness (“to the tooth). Time the pasta so it finishes cooking just before the pesto is complete. Keep in mind that fresh pasta and gnocchi will take far less time to cook than dried pasta.

Put the garlic cloves into the mortar with a few grains of salt and begin to crush. Add the pine nuts and continue to crush into a smooth paste.
Remove the garlic/pine nut mixture from the mortar to a small bowl.
Put a few of the basil leaves and a few grains of salt into the mortar and begin to crush, using the method shown in the link to the video in this blog post.
As the basil leaves become crushed and release their essential oils, add a few more. Continue to crush the leaves, adding a few at a time, until all are crushed fairly uniformly.
Add whatever salt is left to the crushed basil leaves, the garlic/pine nut mixture, and then drizzle in a bit of olive oil. Combine.
Add the cheeses and a bit more olive oil. Combine.
Drizzle in the rest of the olive oil while continuously stirring the garlic/pine nut/ crushed basil/cheese mixture until a creamy dressing has formed.
Reserve 1 to 2 tablespoons of pasta water and mix into the pesto to warm.
Quickly drain the pasta and put the warm pasta into a large serving bowl.
Dress with your pesto, mix to coat, and serve immediately!

If desired, as in the Instagram video above, line a large bowl with prosciutto and carefully added your pesto dressed gnocchi. Allow gnocchi to warm the prosciutto a bit, and then serve. This idea from John Coletta’, chef of Quartino Restaurant in Chicago, in his cook book titled: “250 True Italian Pasta Dishes.”

A large bowl lined with prosciutto slices and filled with gnocchi that have been tossed to coat with pesto dressing. This presentation is courtesy of John Coletta, chef of Quartino Restaurant in Chicago.

If you would like to preserve your pesto rather than use it right away, it can be frozen in small plastic containers. Top off with a small amount of olive oil. Leave a small amount of room in the container for the liquid to expand and then cover.

Visit www.learntravelitalian.com for more of my Italian and Italian-American recipes, cultural notes and advanced Italian language blog posts updated monthly. Click on the link “our blog” in the upper right hand corner to reach blog.Learn Travel Italian.com.

Occhipinti Author Interview, by Dawn Mattera for Modern Italian Network.org

Collage with photo of Kathryn Occhipinti, author, and images of the Conversational Italian for Travelers series of books

July 25, 2021July 24, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

As an independently published author, I am always thrilled when asked to give a video interview, since this is such a personal way for me to connect with my readers. And I do I love to talk about my reasons for venturing into the realm of Italian language learning as much as I love to write about the Italian language and culture!

So I was very excited when Dawn Mattera, a professional speaker and an author herself who writes about Italian culture, interviewed me last week. Dawn and I have become friends through an internet community focused on the Italian culture called The Modern Italian Network (m.i.o). There is no charge to join the m.i.o online community of Italians and Italophiles and receive daily updates on all things Italian. From their homepage:

Why mi.o?

mi.o is a community for people who wish to share their passion for Italy with others, learn about all aspects of Italian culture including the Italian language, and find the best ways to experience Italy and Italian culture both in Italy and around the world.

*************************************************

I’d also like to include a few words about Dawn Mattera, who kindly took time out of her day to interview me about my Conversational Italian for Travelers books, my tips to learn Italian, and my travels to Italy.

Dawn Mattera is an author and speaker who has helped people for over 25 years achieve personal success and overcome challenges. She has written articles and newsletters for international organizations, hosted and spoken at packed seminars and virtual events, and starred in monthly TV spots. Dawn holds a Bachelor’s Degree in Electrical Engineering, a Diploma for the Italian Language, and is a Microsoft Office Master (but, would rather be a Jedi master). She is also a Certified Unhackable® Coach, Speaker and Trainer.

Dawn Mattera’s latest book on Amazon is The Italian Art of Living: Your Passport to Hope, Happiness and Your Personal Renaissance.

*************************************************

Finally, if you would like to hear me — Kathryn Occhipinti — talk about why I wrote the Conversational Italian for Travelers books, listen to my tips on how to learn Italian, and learn why knowing even a few Italian words will greatly enrich your trip to Italy, just click on the link below!

If you are interested in my Conversational Italian for Travelers books and the FREE material to learn Italian that I talk about in the video, click on the link below for my website, www.learntravelitalian.com.

For the Interactive Audio Dialogues that tell the story of Caterina, the Italian-American girl who travels to Italy and at the same time teach us “everything we need to know to enjoy our trip to Italy, click here.

To “look inside” my Conversational Italian for Travelers books and to purchase a book for delivery –or– to purchase the right to download a book in PDF format onto two electronic devices, go to the website purchase page at www.learntravelitalian.com.

Buon divertimento!

Above all, enjoy your adventure learning Italian!

Your Italian American Gardening Tips: Spring Greens – Healthy and Delicious Recipes for the Season

Joshua McFadden Cavolo Nero Salad; cavolo nero greens topped with large bread crumbs and Peccorino-Romano cheese in the middle of a ceramic plate rimmed by flowers.

May 24, 2021May 24, 2021 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Ciao a tutti! A lot has happened in my garden since my last “Your Italian-American Gardening Tips” blog in early April. I’ve been posting photos periodically on my Instagram ConversationalItalian.French to demonstrate the progression of fresh vegetables available during the springtime in Chicagoland. I also post videos on Instagram of seasonal Italian and French dishes using with what’s available in the kitchen garden. For our blog today, it’s time for a recap of cool weather vegetables and for a report on which warm weather-loving Italian vegetables I’ve planted this year for summertime harvest.

Recap: the seeds I planted in early spring have really taken off and the harvest of cool spring greens has been going on for about 2 weeks now! The cool weather in Chicago lasted throughout April and into the very last week of May, which is wonderful for the Italian lettuces, spinach, cavolo nero (Tuscan kale) and broccoli rabe (Italian: rapini) that I am growing. Hearty greens don’t mind a bit of frost, and even though we had several nights of frost May they were not stunted by the bit of extra cold. And by May 15, the arugula and broccoli rabe had matured and were ready for harvest. See below for how to prepare broccoli rabe the Italian way as a side dish for dinner.

My overwintered leeks have picked up growing where they left off last fall and now are grocery-store size. I harvested several to make “pot-au-feu” (see below) and planted new sets I bought from the garden store in their place. I should have an almost continuous harvest of these fragrant oniony vegetables available throughout the year. All other members of the onion family are growing nicely with the cool weather, including my overwintered chives (now flowering), and newly planted green onions and shallots.

The potatoes I planted in the first days of spring struggled a bit with frost-bite, but their leaves seemed to have recovered. Those planted later were saved this difficulty as they are just now starting to show their first leaves. I’m hoping “new” potatoes will be available for harvest by mid June and for weeks after.

The strawberries in the raised garden between the potato beds are going strong, covering almost every inch of their box and flowering nicely, also getting ready for a June harvest.

As I have mentioned in my Your Italian-American Gardening Tips blogs, for the last two years, my focus has been on how to grow Italian vegetables in the suburbs, even in a small space.

My hope is that you will enjoy the tips I’ve learned about gardening through many years of experience and be encouraged to start an Italian garden yourself — be it large or small, in a yard or on your porch, or even indoors in pots near a sunny window — after reading the blogs in this series “Your Italian Gardening Tips.”

Check out my Instagram account, ConversationalItalian.French to see photos of my garden as it progresses.

In this blog I’ll describe when to harvest springtime greens that love the cool weather, and provide some ideas for how to use them in simple dishes you can make at home.

And remember the Conversational Italian for Travelers series of books on Amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com if you want an easy, step-by-step way to learn the Italian of today. Free Cultural Notes, Italian Recipes, and Audio to help you practice your Italian are also found on Learn Travel Italian.com.

*******************************

Another Recipe with Leeks!

Pot-au-feu: Classic French Dinner

In my April post, I provided some tips about growing and cooking leeks, and provided an Instagram post of a salmon, leek and cream dish that I think is the perfect combination of flavors. With my leeks now grocery-store size and available to harvest by mid May, I made a classic French dish called “Pot-au-feu,” which means “Pot on the fire,” that pairs veal shank with fragrant leeks, fennel bulbs, carrots and parsnips.

The veal broth created by cooking the veal shank with spring vegetables makes a traditional and flavorful starter for this spring-time meal. Vermicelli noodles are often cut into shorter pieces, cooked, and then added to the soup for a bit of texture.

The leeks, fennel, carrots, and parsnips are cooked in the broth after the veal is done to until just tender and make a wonderful accompaniment for the veal as the main course. Most Italians love a fragrant broth, as well as fennel, and I was glad I gave this simple dish a try. Watch me make Pot-au-feu on Instagram below by clicking on the image and then try your own. Your family will love the flavorful broth created while cooking the veal and this perfect springtime meal. (Ingredients listed on Instagram.)

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

//www.instagram.com/embed.js

*******************************

Italian Lettuces and Greens Growing Strong

What a difference a few weeks makes! Check out the image of my raised garden bed below on May 15, where I planted spinach and lettuces from Seeds from Italy early last April. (“Seeds from Italy” is the name of an American distributor of seeds from authentic Italian producers. Check out their website!)

Arugula: Both common and “wild” varieties of arugula were ready to harvest by May 15, and other lettuces and spinach followed shortly after. I enjoyed the “wild arugula” leaves that I planted for the first time this year. The wild arugula variety has leaves that are smaller and more tender then the common variety, so they are easier to mix into a salad. Both Italian varieties of arugula have the same peppery flavor.

Cavolo Nero: The cavolo nero (a Tuscan kale, called “black cabbage” in Italian) seeds I planted in their own row just outside the garden bed are growing nicely and I’ve already thinned them out a bit, which created the opportunity for a kale and citrus salad. See the link to my Instagram post below.

Broccoli rabe: As mentioned earlier, the broccoli rabe seeds I planted from Seeds of Italy took off and grew nicely all spring, and were ready to harvest by May 15. Broccoli rabe is actually a type of turnip that is grown for the greens rather than the root. Turnips and broccoli are in the same family, called the Brassicaceae family, so it is not surprising they can look similar.

Broccoli rabe (cime di rapa or rapini in Italian) looks like a leafy green with several small ” broccoli-like clusters at the tip of their stalks. Broccoli rabe should be harvested when the center stalk with the cluster of broccoli-like clusters becomes taller than the leafy portion of the plant. After this stalk elongates, it can take only a day or two for the plant to “go to seed” by forming small yellow flowers from the green clusters. I sewed a second set of seeds, in late May when I had harvested about half of my broccoli rabe, although these may not germinate or reach full maturity before the heat of summer sets in.

Below is an Instagram post of how to cook broccoli rabe. It is usually sautéed in a large pan with olive oil, garlic, and 1 or 2 hot peppers, and with or without a bit of sausage. A large bunch will cook down significantly, just like spinach. I like to trim the stems off, although they are edible. Orecchiette pasta can be added for a classic pasta dish.

Romanesco broccoli: The romanesco broccoli I planted started to perk up by the end of May, as did my Swiss Chard.

Onions: Shallot sets and green onion sets from the garden shop in my neighborhood complete my lettuce beds this year. As I’ve mentioned, it is easy to grow all relatives of the onion family in Chicagoland. My chives came up again in their own pot nearby, as expected early in spring, as they have been doing for over 10 years!

********************

See below for an image of my garden beds with the greens and onions this year just after planting and in mid May. Between the garden beds are lavender that I planted last year as part of my herb garden. A row of sedum was planted by the previous owners of my house, and comes up reliably every year, so I have kept it in place as a border.

Leeks growing in the center of a raised garden bed; in the distance another raised garden bed and additional land for leafy greens. Seeds have just been planted. — Italian garden beds for lettuce, onions, and leafy greens, after seeds were planted. The leeks overwintered from last summer.

Raised garden bed with rows of spinach, arugula, leeks in the foreground and lettuces and onion sets in the back. Broccoli rabe growing in the ground behind the beds. — Raised bed in the foreground, left to right: 2 rows of spinach, 1 row of common arugula, 1 row of wild arugula, leeks. Raised bed in the back: mixed lettuces and onion sets. Semicircle plot: broccoli rabe to the right.

Broccoli rabe growing in the semicircular plot behind the raised garden beds, ready to start harvesting. Large, saw-tooth type leaves are growing in a cluster. — Broccoli rabe growing in the semicircular plot behind the raised garden beds, ready to start harvesting.

Broccoli rabe close up, ready to harvest before the yellow flowers develop and the plant goes to seed.

Broccoli rabe gone to seed; the stalk has elongated and the leaves are shriveled and small. Small bright yellow flowers sit atop the stalk. — Broccoli rabe gone to seed.

Just one week later, the temperatures reached 90° and this lasted for 3 days in a row. All broccoli rabe went to seed. The delicious leaves seem to shrink and most of the plant is just a long stem with yellow flowers on top. The season was fairly long, but ended suddenly.

Salads, Salads, and More Salads

Last year, I provided a method for how to create salads with the lettuces I grew in my garden and described how to make a classic vinaigrette in my blog Four Salads for Summer Days. I also showed methods for making herbed and garlic croutons. Check out this blog for the following salads:

Mixed baby greens, chive flowers and radishes (with Bree cheese and crackers) — a great salad for spring, using what’s available in the kitchen garden!

2. Insalata mista (Typical Italian salad of mixed lettuces, carrots, tomatoes and radishes) with garlic croutons

3. Mixed greens, gorgonzola cheese, walnuts, and raspberries

4. Spinach salad with goat cheese and strawberries — spinach and strawberries are usually available at about the time in early summer.

Even with all the varieties of greens I had planted in my garden this year, I decided in early spring to follow the advice of my grandmother on how to make a nutritious salad and harvest dandelions freely growing around my property. Dandelions are called “dente di leone” in Italian, and their saw-toothed leaves and bright yellow flowers are unmistakable. They come up on their own reliably in early spring every year (to the chagrin of those in the American suburbs who like a tidy lawn) and are a good source of Vitamins A, C, K and even minerals like iron and calcium. The stems always grow out from one central root, so be careful to watch for this root if harvesting ( especially before they flower), in order to make sure you are picking the correct weed! The smaller dandelion leaves are the most tender; when using the larger leaves, remove the thick rib along the back. Inspect both sides of the leaves for dirt and rinse very well and leave in the refrigerator; rinse again before using.

Dandelion ready to flower. Dente di leone in Italian. The image shows all stalks growing toward a central root. — Dandelion ready to flower. “Dente di leone” in Italian. All stalks grow from a central root.

Italians love dandelion greens with a simple dressing of red wine vinegar, pinches of salt and pepper and finely chopped garlic. The garlic is an important ingredient, as it counters the bitterness of the dandelion. The finely chopped garlic sold in the grocery store in jars and kept in the refrigerator is best for this type of salad dressing, as it is softer and less sharp than freshly chopped garlic. Chives and parsley are also available at the same time as dandelions in spring and can be freshly chopped and added to the salad dressing at the end. The ratio: 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar to 6 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil. See below.

Dandelion salad with a simple red wine and chive vinaigrette arranged on a plate in a starburst pattern like a composed salad, served with a breadstick. — Dandelion salad with a simple red wine and chive vinaigrette served with a breadstick.

A warm bacon dressing can also be used on dandelion greens, just as with spinach or frisèe. A thick slice of pancetta cut into rectangles and cooked slowly over medium heat makes delicious lardoons, as pictured below. For a traditional vinaigrette that goes on this type of salad, sauté a chopped shallot in the rendered fat from the pancetta until it softens. Remove the shallot and 1 Tbsp. of rendered fat into a bowl and add 2 Tbsps of red wine vinegar and a pinch of mustard, salt and pepper.

Dandelion salad Lyonnaise style with pancetta lardons; poached egg in center of greens with bacon bits and croutons in the periphery — Dandelion salad Lyonnaise style with pancetta lardons

For a salad made with fresh baby cavolo nero greens, check out my Instagram post below. The dressing I used was taken from the cook book “Six Seasons,” by Joshua McFadden, the chef who trained in Italy and started the kale craze from his Brooklyn restaurant. He writes in his cook book “This is the kale salad that started it all.” Make your own large breadcrumbs with a good loaf of bread dried out in the oven at 200 or 250 degrees for about 20 – 30 min to sop up the delicious dressing. It is worth it!

For the Joshua McFadden dressing: 1/2 garlic clove, smashed, 1/4 cup finely grated Peccorino-Romano cheese, 1/8 tsp hot dried chile peppers, pinches of salt and coarsely grated pepper, “large glug” (2-3 Tbsp) olive oil and juice from one lemon. Whisk all together all ingredients.

Chiffonade (roll up and cut into thin strips) cavolo nero, toss in dressing, and top with more grated cheese and breadcrumbs.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

//www.instagram.com/embed.js

*******************************

Cooking Broccoli Rabe the Italian Way

Broccoli rabe traditionally needs only a quick sauté in olive oil, garlic and small red chile peppers. The olive oil and garlic work counter the bitterness of the broccoli rabe and the chile peppers add an extra bit of zest, but can be omitted for those who cannot tolerate spicy-hot food. Red bell peppers cut into small pieces are a good substitute, although not traditional.

I created a video while I was cooking up some broccoli rabe as a side dish to show how much of the vegetable you need for just 2 people. Quite a bit, really! The broccoli rabe really cooks down. I added a bit of Italian sausage and could have also added Orecchiette pasta at the end for a traditional pasta dish and a satisfying meal. In fact, my children ask me to make broccoli rabe in the spring time and all summer long!

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Kathryn Occhipinti (@conversationalitalian.french)

//www.instagram.com/embed.js

*******************************

Strawberries and Asparagus have come to life!

Check out the difference in last year’s strawberry bed after the first fertilization in early spring and the second fertilization in mid May below. The strawberry crowns I planted earlier this year have struggled a bit, as there was not much rain this spring to help their roots grow, but are coming into their own slowly in the same raised beds as the asparagus. Too bad I will have to wait at least another year to harvest my asparagus!

Raised garden bed with overwintered strawberries, now with green leaves — Strawberries spring 2021, overwintered with both green and brown leaves. The small plant with new red stalks and green leaves peeking out in the center is overwintered rhubarb.

Strawberry bed from 2020 with rhubarb growing in the center. The strawberry plants have taken over the bed. — Strawberry bed from 2020 with rhubarb growing in the center.

Second year asparagus with first year strawberries in the perimeter.

*******************************

This Year’s Peas and Then…

Tomatoes, Peppers and Eggplant

Peas did not come up as quickly as I would have liked this year. I think this was due to the lack of rain. We had the driest April and May months on record in Chicagoland. But luckily, I have plenty of space in my raised garden beds this year, so they are free to grow as long as they like. I reserved the far bed (#4) for my late tomatoes with large fruits and tall stalks and my cherry tomatoes, both of which take up a lot of space. Plumb tomatoes and early tomatoes are in the next two beds over (#2 and #3), along with eggplant, arranged in spots where peas did not come up. Not ideal, but they are adequately spaced. Hot and sweet peppers are in bed #1.

Four new raised garden beds planted with peas

Four raised garden beds with tomatoes, eggplants and peppers from background to foreground. Peas growing in the beds in the foreground.

*******************************

Please write and let me know what you are planting in your garden this year.
I’d love to hear how your garden grows!
Until the next blog, follow my Instagram account, Conversationalitalian.french
for recipe ideas from my garden to yours!

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to say “I know” in Italian: “Sapere” vs. “Conoscere”

September 2, 2020November 12, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 2 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2020?

To be “in the know” about how the Italian language works, we must know how to use the verb sapere and be acquainted with the verb conoscere.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” with the verb sapere, we will be able to speak about what we know in Italian; and with the verb conoscere we will be able to to describe who are friends are. We will be on our way to building complex sentences and speaking more like we do in our native language!

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to incorporate “commonly used phrases” when we ask for what we need in Italian, we will be able to communicate just as we do in our native language!

This post is the 37th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases” in Italian

start with “I know”
and use the verbs

sapere and conoscere

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these verbs?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

How to Say “I know ” in Italian

Sapere

To be “in the know” about how the Italian language works, we must know how to use the verb sapere and be acquainted with the verb conoscere.

Let’s start with sapere.

Sapere is an irregular verb that ends in -ere. It means “to know,” as in to know a fact.

Since sapere is irregular, the root will be different from the infinitive verb for all forms except the voi form. Interestingly, the root for the noi form differs by only a single letter from the regular root — with the addition of a second letter p. The irregular conjugations are given in the table below in brown and the regular conjugation in green. The syllable to be accented in each conjugation has been underlined.

Sapere – to know (a fact)

io	so	I know
tu	sai	you (familiar) know
Leilei/lui	sa	you (polite) knowshe/he knows

noi	sappiamo	we know
voi	sapete	you all know
loro	sanno	they know

******************************

How do we use the verb sapere?

Just remember: “so, sai, sa”!

The present tense form for “I know…” from sapere is “Io so…” but of course, we leave out the subject pronoun, so the word that Italians use in conversation is just, “So…”

For the question, “Do you know…?” use the conjugated verb, (tu) “Sai…?” for someone you are familiar with. Or: “Lei sa…?” for someone you have just met (including the subject pronoun Lei) to be polite.

“Does she or he know?” is, (lei, lui) “Sa…?” In order to emphasize the masculine or feminine nature of the subject, the subject pronouns lei or lui can also be used, for: “Lei sa?” or “Lui sa?” Most times, though, the subject is known to the speakers from earlier in the conversation and therefore left out of the sentence.

Remember, there is no need to use the word “do” when asking a question in Italian. Just these three simple, short Italian words, “so,” “sai,” or “sa” will suffice. Use these short words to tell someone what you know or to ask someone what they know!

“Lei sa dov’è…” means, “Do you (polite) know where is the…?” (Or, in correct English: where the… is?”) This is an important Italian phrase to know when traveling in order to ask for directions. When approaching a stranger, it is customary to precede this question with the polite phrase “Mi scusi” for “Excuse me.”

Here are some examples of travel phrases we can make with the verb sapere:

Mi scusi,	Excuse me,
…Lei sa dov’è…	…(do) you (pol.) know where is……(do) you know where the… is?
…l’albergo?	…the hotel?
…il ristorante?	…the restaurant?
…la metro/metropolitana?	…the subway?
…la fermata dell’autobus?	…the bus stop?
…la stazione dei treni?	…the train station?
…la banca?	…the bank?
…l’ufficio postale?	…the post office?
…il museo?	…the museum?

Note: If the answer to these questions involves a particular street, the answer you will hear will use the phrase in… via, for the English on… street.

La banca è in via Verde. The bank is on Green Street.

******************************

Use a similar format to ask questions about schedules using sapere when traveling.

Mi scusi,	Excuse me,
…Lei sa quando…	…(do) you (pol.) know when…
…arriva il treno?	…the train arrives (lit. arrives the train)?
…arriva l’autobus?	…the bus arrives?
…parte il treno?	…the train leaves (lit. leaves the train)?
…parte l’autobus?	…the bus leaves?
…apre il museo?	…the museum opens (lit. opens the museum)?
…chiude il museo?	…the museum closes?

******************************

Finally, here are some commonly used, everyday phrases that you can make with the verb sapere. The word “Chissà” is a popular adverb and interjection used in Italian conversation. It is a word that can be used d in many different situations. Chissà can be used alone or in phrases that end with perché, se, or che (why, if, or what). Try to complete the questions that start with “Chissà…” in the table below on your own, using the simple present tense.

Note the use of the subjunctive mode with the conjugation sappia and the imperfetto conjugation sapevo in our last two examples. Commit these phrases to memory, even if you haven’t fully mastered their verb forms, as they will come up often in conversation. Knowing these two verbs will also impress your Italian friends!

So (qualcosa) a memoria.	I know (something) by heart.
Chissà? Chissà perché…? Chissà se…? Chissà che…? Non si sa mai!	Who knows? Who knows why…? Who knows if…? Who knows what…? One never knows!
Come ben sai.	As you well know.
Si sa che…	Everyone knows that…
Non ne sa niente.	He/she knows nothing about it.

Lo so.	I know (it).
Non lo so.	I don’t know (it).
Che io sappia. Che lei/lui sappia?	As far as I know. What does she/he know?
Lo sapevo!	I knew it!

How to Say “I know ” in Italian

Conoscere

Conoscere is a regular -ere verb. Conoscere also means to know, with the connotation to become acquainted with a person or a place.

The regular conjugation of conoscere is listed in the table below. Notice that the pronunciation of the ending of the io and loro forms will change once the regular endings are added on to the stem. There is a “hard c” sound with the endings of –sco/–scono for the io and loro forms. These verbs are listed in orange. The remaining forms retain the softer “sh” sound of the infinitive conoscere with their –sci and –sce combinations.

The stressed syllable for each conjugation is underlined.

Conoscere – to know (be acquainted with)

io	conosco	I know
tu	conosci	you (familiar) know
Leilei/lui	conosce	you (polite) knowshe/he knows

noi	conosciamo	we know
voi	conoscete	you all know
loro	conoscono	they know

How to Say “I know ” in Italian

Sapere vs. Conoscere

As we have just described above, sapere and conoscere are two Italian verbs that both mean, “to know.” Think about how many times each day we say, “I know,” “you know,” or, “Do you know?” In Italy, these expressions are also used frequently. But, there are differences in how each of these verbs that means “to know” is used. If we learn which situations use the verb sapere and which use conoscere, we will be able to speak about what we know and who are friends are in Italian!

To follow are some specific examples of how each verb is used.

Sapere is used to indicate knowledge of something, such as a fact. For instance, if we tell someone that we know a language very well we are stating a fact and use sapere. Notice how the definite article (the) (l’) is used after the verb sapere to describe the Italian language in this case.

(Io) So l’italiano molto bene.

I know (the) Italian language very well.

Sapere is used to describe knowledge of something tangible that we can see or feel. The word that links the description of what we know to the subject of these types of sentences is the conjunction che. Che cannot be omitted, as we often do in English. Below are two examples that use sapere to describe something that we can see.

Ora so che il primo romanzo scritto in italiano si chiama, “I Promessi Sposi.”

Now (I) know that the first novel written in Italian is called, “The Betrothed.”

(Io) So che il cielo è blu.

I know that the sky is blue.

*By the way, if you don’t know something, you must say,
“Non lo so.” = “I don’t know (it).”

Sapere is used to describe the ability to do something. Notice in the translations below that the English phrase “how to” is not necessary in Italian. Instead, and an infinitive verb follows directly after “so.”

(Io) So guidare la macchina.

I know (how to) drive a car.

Sapere is also used when asking questions, as noted in the first section in this blog. If asking directions from a stranger, it is customary to begin with, “Mi scusi,” or just, “Scusi,” for the polite (command) form of “Excuse me.” Then follow with the polite, “Lei sa…”

Mi scusi. Lei sa quando arriva il treno?

Excuse me. (Do) (you pol.) know when arrives the train?

Do you know when the train arrives?

Mi scusi; Lei sa dov’è il binario tre?

Excuse me; (do) (you pol.) know where is (the) track three?

Do you know where track three is?

Conoscere means to know, as in to be acquainted with a person or a place.

Io conosco Julia, la nonna di Paolo.

I know Julia, Paul’s grandmother. (lit. the grandmother of Paul)

Io conosco Milano molto bene.

I know Milan very well.

Conoscere is also used in reference to meeting/getting to know someone for the first time.

Caterina vuole conoscere suo cugino Pietro in Italia.

Kathy wants to meet/get to know her cousin Peter in Italy.

Remember how to use sapere and conoscere to describe

what and who you know in Italian.

I guarantee you will use these verbs every day!

"Just the Verbs" from Conversational Italian for Travelers books — Conversational Italian for Travelers “Just the Verbs”

Available on Amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!® How to say “each other” with Italian Reciprocal Reflexive Verbs

August 5, 2019November 12, 2023 ~ stellalucentellc ~ 4 Comments

Do you want to speak Italian more easily and confidently by the end of 2019?

I’ve been trying to help you with this goal by posting a new blog every month in the series “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!”® With these blogs, I discuss how Italians use their language on a daily basis and in so doing help you to “think in Italian.”

Now that more than half the year has passed, and I’m sure you have made a few Italian friends and would like to talk about your relationships with “each other.”

As I’ve said before, I believe that “commonly used phrases” are the key for how we can all build fluency in any language in a short time.

If we learn how to say “each other” in Italian, a “commonly used phrase” in English that is expressed with Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs, we will be able to talk about common feelings and experiences — just as we do in our native language!

With a little Italian reciprocal reflexive verb practice, soon we will be able to say “each other” in Italian in order to fully interact with our friends and describe what is happening around us.

This post is the 25th in a series of Italian phrases we have been trying out in our Conversational Italian! Facebook group. If you’d like to read the earlier posts in the series, “Italian Phrases We Use EVERY Day!” just click HERE

Many “commonly used phrases”
that describe our interactions with “each other”
use

Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs

See below for how this works.

As we all master these phrases, so will you. Try my method and let me know how it works. What sentences will you create with these phrases?

Please reply. I’d love to hear from you! Or join our Conversational Italian! group discussion on Facebook.

The basics of the Italian language are introduced in the Conversational Italian for Travelers textbook and reference books Just the Verbs and Just the Grammar

found on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com.

The rights to purchase the Conversational Italian for Travelers books in PDF format on two electronic devices can also be obtained at Learn Travel Italian.com.

************************************************

How to Say “Each Other”

Italian Reciprocal Reflexive Verbs

Reciprocal reflexive verbs are used in the special situation when two or more people perform the same action together; this will make all people involved the subject of the action.

To express this type of situation in English we simply add the phrase “each other” after the verb that describes the action. Italians employ the -si ending, as with regular reflexive verbs that describe actions that revert back to the speaker.

Listed below are verbs that commonly use the reciprocal reflexive form:

abbracciarsi	to hug each other
aiutarsi	to help each other
amarsi	to love each other
baciarsi	to kiss each other
chiamarsi	to call each other
conoscersi	to get to know each other
fidanzarsi	to become engaged
guardarsi	to look at each other
incontrarsi	to meet each other (planned meeting)
odiarsi	to hate each other
parlarsi	to speak to each other
salutarsi	to greet each other
scriversi	to write each other
sposarsi	to marry each other
telefonarsi	to call each other
trovarsi	to meet each other
vedersi	to see each other

A quick glance at this list reveals two things: (1) many of these reflexive verbs have non-reflexive forms with similar meanings, such as amare (to love), parlare (to talk), scrivere (to write), and vedere (to see); (2) many of these reflexive verbs are also used as simple reflexive verbs, such as fidanzarsi (to get married), and sposarsi (to get married).

The verb chiamare and its reflexive form chiamarsi are also interesting. Chiamare alone means “to call,” as in to yell over to someone (or to make a telephone call, now that technology allows us to do this) but chiamarsi in its simple reflexive form has a different meaning: “to call oneself a name.” Of course, every Italian student quickly learns the first conjugation of the verb chiamarsi as part of their initiation into the Italian language with the phrase,“Mi chiamo…” for the English phrase “My name is…” So chiamarsi does “double duty” as a simple and a reciprocal reflexive verb, with different meanings depending on the context.

In short, reflexive verbs add shades of meaning to the Italian language in a simple, yet brilliant way.

******************************

How do we actually use Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs in conversation?

Let’s give this a try with the two most commonly used persons in spoken Italian, the first person plural noi and the third person plural loro forms.

If the speaker is involved in the action with someone else—we are doing the action—conjugate the verb in the sentence using the first person plural noi form and put its reflexive pronoun ci before the conjugated verb.

If the speaker is talking about a group of other people—they are doing the action—conjugate the verb in the sentence using the third person plural loro form and put its reflexive pronoun si before the conjugated verb.

As we have learned in our previous blogs, the subject pronouns are almost always omitted when conversing in Italian, and this “rule” applies to sentences that use reciprocal reflexive verbs. But the subject pronouns have been included in parentheses in our Italian examples in the table below, just to make it immediately clear who is the subject. With time, we should not need this hint, at least for the noi form, with its easily recognizable -iamo verb ending, which is the same for all verbs in the present tense!

Also, notice that in Italian the immediate future is expressed by the present tense, while in English, we tend to use the future tense for every future activity. It is easy in English to speak in the future tense, since all we have to do is place the word “will” in front of the verb. Since the word “will” is not actually included in the Italian sentences given as examples, and we are not conjugating in the Italian future tense, the word “will” is given in parentheses in our English translations in the table below.

If we try to think a little bit in Italian, and translate the Italian ideas into the English we would ordinarily use, we will find that it is really not that difficult to understand Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs!

Io e Francesca ci vogliamo bene.	Frances and I care for each other very much.

(Noi) Ci sposiamo oggi.	We (will) marry each other today.
(Noi) Ci scriviamo ogni giorno.	We write each other every day.
(Noi) Ci vediamo al teatro.	We (will) see each other at the theater.
(Noi) Ci vogliamo bene.	We love each other very much.

Caterina e zia Rosa si salutano.	Kathy and Aunt Rose greet each other.
Michele e Francesca si vogliono bene.	Michael and Frances care for each other very much.

(Loro) Si vogliono bene.	They care for each other very much.
(Loro) Si incontrano.	They meet each other.
(Loro) Si chiamano ogni giorno.	They call (telephone) each other every day.

******************************

Let’s try this in the past tense. Remember, of course, that all reflexive verbs take essere in the passato prossimo past tense, and that the past participle ending must change in gender and number when using essere as a helping verb.

Io e Francesca ci siamo voluti bene.	Frances and I cared for each other very much.

(Noi) Ci siamo sposati oggi.	We married each other today.
(Noi) Ci siamo scritti ogni giorno.	We wrote each other every day.
(Noi) Ci siamo visti al teatro.	We saw each other at the theater.
(Noi) Ci siamo voluti bene.	We loved each other very much.

Caterina e zia Rosa si sono salutate.	Kathy and Aunt Rose greeted each other.
Michele e Francesca si sono voluti bene.	Michael and Frances cared for each other very much.

(Loro) Si sono voluti bene.	They cared for each other very much.
(Loro) Si sono incontrati.	They met each other.
(Loro) Si sono chiamati ogni giorno.	They called each other (on the telephone) every day.

There are, of course, many more occasions for the use of reciprocal reflexive verbs than those I have just listed. How many more an you think of?

Remember how to the Italian reciprocal reflexive verbs and I guarantee you will use then every day!

Available on amazon.com and Learn Travel Italian.com

The Italian Verb Dovere

How to Conjugate Dovere

1. Use dovere with the meaning “to have to” or “must,” to describe an obligation and create complex sentences in Italian.

2. Use dovere with the meaning “to have to” or “to must,” to ask about a necessity during transactions or when asking for directions.

3. Use dovere in common expressions that describe the necessity of what you “have to” or “had to” do during a typical day.

4. Use dovere in the past tense with essere to describe where you “had to” go.

5. Use dovere as an independent verb to describe what you owe “to someone.”

6. Use dovere as a masculine noun to describe the feeling of duty

Share this with your friends!

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared with Family and Friends – Part 3

Expressing Boredom in Italian — Annoiare and Annoiarsi

Expressing Annoyance in Italian — Infastidire and Seccare

Share this with your friends!

Let’s Get Together — in Italian

Meeting someone at a gathering —

Piacere di conoscerla...

After you’ve met —

Conoscere, Incontrare and Conoscersi, Incontrarsi

Simple Italian phrases to invite someone out —

Inviting someone to join a group —

Venire con noi… and Unirsi a noi…

How to say, “I love you” in Italian —

Ti amo and Ti voglio bene

Share this with your friends!

Let’s Talk About…

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Dare

Grammar for the Italian Verb

Dare

Conjugation of the Italian Verb

Dare

1. Use dare to describe the act of “giving” something to someone else, or literally, “handing over” something to another.

2. The colorful Italian interjection “Dai!”

3. Use dare or regalare /regolarsi to describe the act of “giving a present” or “treating oneself”

4. Use dare or donare /donarsi to describe the act of “making a donation,” or “giving of oneself” “devoting/dedicating oneself”

5. Use “darsi a” as “to devote/dedicate oneself” and in the extreme to mean “to go wild.” Use darsi to mean “to exchange”

6. Use dare in these common Italian expressions:

6. Use dare as a noun to mean “debt” or “debit”

Share this with your friends!

The Italian Christmas Season

The Story of La Befana

Celebrating La Befana in Italy

The Befana Tradition Continues

Share this with your friends!

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared withFamily and Friends – Part 1

Expressing Happiness in Italian —Contento, Felice, and Piacere

Sono contento(a) di…

Sono felice di…

Esserne contento(a)…Esserne felice…

Fare piacere!

Expressing Excitement and Anticipation in Italian — Emozionato, Aspettare, Aspettarsi and Aspettarsela

Share this with your friends!

Let’s Talk About… Italian Phrases to Use with the Family

The Italian Family of Yesterday and Today

Some Italian terms of endearment (and other not-so-endearing terms) used between family members

Giving instructions to children in Italian — what to do — and what not to do!

Saying “sorry” in Italian

Asking family “What are you doing?” and “What’s going on?” in Italian

Asking family and friends, “Where are you?” or “Have you seen…?” in Italian

Birthdays in Italian

Remember how to use these simple Italian phrases for the family and I guarantee you will use these phrases every day!

Share this with your friends!

The Many Uses of the Italian Verb

Mancare

Grammar for the Italian Verb

Mancare

Conjugation of the Italian Verb

Mancare

1. Use mancare to describe the feeling of “missing” someone (see previous blog about mancare). (transitive)

2. Use mancare to describe “needing” something (transitive)

3. Use mancare to describe the “lack of” or “lacking” something (transitive) or mancare + di when describing a person’s character “to be lacking” (intransitive phrasal verb)

4. Use mancare to describe “failing” at something, perhaps by “missing an opportunity” or by “missing a target” in sports (intransitive)

5. Use mancare as the English equivalent of “be left” and “be away” (intransitive)

6. Use mancare alone or “venire a mancare” to refer to a death

Share this with your friends!

About Italian Imperative Verbs

How to Create an Italian Command

Italian Imperative Verbs:Italian Commands with Reflexive Verbs

Italian Imperative Verbs:Common Irregular Italian Verbs

Negative Italian Commands withCommon Irregular Italian Verbs

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared with
Family and Friends – Part 3

Let’s Talk About… Emotions Shared with
Family and Friends – Part 1

Expressing Happiness in Italian —
Contento, Felice, and Piacere

Esserne contento(a)…
Esserne felice…

Let’s Talk About… Italian Phrases to Use with
the Family

Remember how to use these simple
Italian phrases for the family
and I guarantee you will use these phrases every day!

Italian Imperative Verbs:
Italian Commands with Reflexive Verbs

Italian Imperative Verbs:
Common Irregular Italian Verbs

Negative Italian Commands with
Common Irregular Italian Verbs

Remember how to use Italian imperative verbs
and I guarantee you will use these phrases
with family and friends every day!

Italian Linking Verb
Essere

Italian Linking Verb
Diventare

Italian Linking Verb
Sembrare

Italian Verbs
Sembrare vs. Somigliare

Remember how to use Italian adjectives
and I guarantee you will be able to create
colorful Italian phrases every day!

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Things

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Family Members Singular

Italian Possessive Adjectives
for Family Members – Plural

A couple of “Exceptions” to the
Rules for Italian Possessive Adjectives

Italian Adjectives of Nationality
After the Noun

Italian Adjectives for Colors
After the Noun

Italian Adjectives Before the Noun
Buono, Bello and Personal Characteristics

Remember how to use Italian adjectives
and I guarantee you will be able to create
colorful Italian phrases every day!

Use the Italian “in”
for Italian Regions

How to Use
the Italian “in” and “nel”
for the United States of America

How to Use
the Italian “a”
for the Islands of United States of America

Remember when to use the Italian prepositions
“in” and “nel” or “a”
to describe locations in Italy and the US
and I guarantee you will use these Italian phrases every day!